Episode Transcript
Available transcripts are automatically generated. Complete accuracy is not guaranteed.
Speaker 1 (00:00):
Hello, and welcome to Jasonnewland dot com. My name is
Jason Newland and this is let Me pull you to sleep.
Please only listen when you can safely close your eyes.
Speaker 2 (00:27):
Blah blah blah.
Speaker 1 (00:31):
So yeah, it's Sunday, the seventeenth of August two thousand
and twenty five.
Speaker 2 (00:50):
Yeah, it's been.
Speaker 1 (00:53):
I mean, technically it's been quite a busy week, but
really just because of all the recordings I made, but
I only made like since Monday, I've only made to
(01:15):
let Me boy you to sleep recordings. I didn't do
a Q and A Friday this week because or last
week where if you want to call it, you know,
this previous Friday because I got one question.
Speaker 3 (01:35):
I know, perhaps I left it a little bit late
to post on the Facebook group.
Speaker 1 (01:41):
You know, any questions, But maybe I should just stop
doing the Q and A Friday if no one's if
there's no more questions, then there's no more answers. I
can't answer questions that are not asked. So yeah, if
you want me to continue to do the Q and
A Friday, then please, I mean, you can send a
(02:07):
question in via my website if you want, and I'll
just add it to a list of questions. Just let
me know it's for this coming Q and A Friday,
and I'll add it because there's a contact form on
my website, or you can you know, when I post
(02:30):
any Q and A questions for Q and a Friday
on my Facebook group, which is Jason Newland's Boring Group,
you can maybe leave a question there as well, or
instead of you know whatever.
Speaker 2 (02:49):
But yeah, I can't.
Speaker 1 (02:53):
I'm not going to do it if there's no questions,
because it seems a little bit I mean, there was
one question. I mean, in all fairness, I probably could
have made that one question last for a bad an hour.
But the question really was.
Speaker 3 (03:10):
Whether or not I preferred personal questions or non personal questions?
And has there been any times that I haven't answered
a question because it was too personal?
Speaker 1 (03:28):
So I can kind of answer that here in a
sense of generally, I'm open to most questions. If it's
a question that I don't really want to answer, then
I will be purposefully vague, I suppose, or I will
(03:52):
distract myself and move on to something else.
Speaker 3 (03:56):
I don't know, it's I'm not I'm not great with
family questions because that is personal. But also I don't
really have much in a way of family to talk about. Really, Yeah,
(04:16):
as long as it's about me, it's fine. I'm okay.
You know, I talk about myself. That's the only thing
I've really got any right to talk about, really, isn't
it in a sense? I mean, you know, I've done
a few done some podcasts about step moms and stuff,
but that was all nice things that I talked about.
(04:41):
So yeah, generally, if it's about me, that's kind of
what the the Q and a Friday's for. But it
can be about you as well. It can be like
you could ask my opinion on something. You could ask me.
Speaker 1 (05:00):
Because I've been in life for so long. You can
ask me about world events maybe that's happened during my lifetime.
Asked me about English culture. If you live in another country, you.
Speaker 2 (05:21):
Could ask me.
Speaker 1 (05:27):
Jobs, places I've lived, girlfriends, hobbies, interests, TV programs I liked, music,
movies I've seen.
Speaker 2 (05:56):
Yeah, really, it's.
Speaker 3 (06:00):
I think sometimes I'm better at some of the older
stuff because if something because let's.
Speaker 2 (06:09):
Say, if I went to.
Speaker 3 (06:12):
Someone slamming the doors downstairs like constantly, and I really
don't know why they've been doing it for about twenty minutes,
just slamming it. Well, let it slam over and over
and over again, which is very sor I never got
a dog dog barking. That's why these recordings are so
(06:36):
much better than hypnosis recordings, because I can't I have
to stop talking. If a dog barks in the background.
With these recordings, all sounds are fine. I mean, maybe
not for you.
Speaker 1 (06:52):
But generally it's in a distance, it's in the background,
and it's either make a recording or don't make a recording.
(07:12):
One of the things that starts that dog off and
also starts venning off, and also starts another dog around
the corner off or across the road off is this cat.
So this lady that lives in a building opposite, she's
put bells on her cat's collars. Now, I thought she
(07:36):
did it just to annoy the docks, but she didn't.
She did it to warn birds. So actually she's done
it for a really nice reason. But the side effect
of this particular medication is dogs hear it. I mean
(07:58):
he can hear it in the middle of the night
and he starts barking sometimes or growling. And I know what,
I'll look out the window.
Speaker 3 (08:08):
I can just make out the cat, and the cat's
just standing in the garden staring up.
Speaker 2 (08:16):
At the window.
Speaker 1 (08:18):
Proper wind up merchant that one. So it's weird, isn't it.
Speaker 4 (08:24):
It's what she's doing is a really good thing to have,
because I really love birds.
Speaker 3 (08:37):
But there's always there's a it seems to be a
what do they call that thing? Not a brush off,
a playoff the downside, I don't know.
Speaker 1 (08:55):
Yeah, it's not a win win situation. It's a win
win situation for the birds, which I'm really pleased about.
It's not a win win situation for the cat. So
the cat doesn't get to catch.
Speaker 3 (09:13):
Birds, which is good, but a cat does get to
get some pleasure from annoying the dogs, which I imagine is
quite pleasant for it. Now, it's not a win situation
for the dogs, unless, of course, the dogs.
Speaker 2 (09:30):
Getting excited.
Speaker 1 (09:30):
So Vinnie might actually be enjoying barking when he hears
the cat. It's more excitement than anger or anything, so.
Speaker 2 (09:44):
Bless him.
Speaker 3 (09:47):
Yeah, so Uncle's sausages. The funeral has been changed. It
was on the toy. It's supposed to be on the
twenty first of August, but they haven't got the birth
the death certificate yet. So it's been put off till
(10:07):
another week.
Speaker 2 (10:11):
So that was that's weird.
Speaker 1 (10:14):
The I had to get the counseling for the mouse
exterminator people. I'm not sure what you call them, animal
prevention unit. I don't know, vermin control, something like that.
(10:38):
And they came in last Friday and they put down bait,
and they came back this Friday and said there's nothing
in there. There's no They put stuff in the into
the lofts and everything, and there's nothing, no sign, not
(10:59):
a single sausage, excuse the pun.
Speaker 3 (11:04):
And it's all the residue, all the leftovers from the
previous mister that.
Speaker 2 (11:13):
So it's not.
Speaker 3 (11:14):
Yeah, it's old historic, he said, which is good. It's
not good in a sense, but it's good obviously for
the rest of the building because we don't want those
things running around. But it's not it's like he was
living with all that stuff around. He didn't even know it.
Speaker 2 (11:40):
So the.
Speaker 1 (11:43):
I'm thinking that the council are going to come in
and start emptying his place, probably in the next week
or so. So I've still got his key to let
them in, and then that'll be the whole process coming
and emptying it and painting and all that stuff and
(12:09):
getting a place ready for the next tenant and a
new a new adventure begins, hopefully a quiet adventure.
Speaker 2 (12:18):
But we'll see.
Speaker 1 (12:22):
Yeah, I could, really, I really don't need a new
neighbor opposite me.
Speaker 2 (12:28):
You know.
Speaker 3 (12:28):
It's the noisy ones, the ones downstairs, and then there's
a couple. Well one's moved out now, but there was
a couple that slammed the door continuously downstairs. Now it
shakes the building. It's really loud. It echoes through the
hallway and stuff.
Speaker 1 (12:47):
And it's one thing downstairs, but here, if I had
the same thing happening opposite me, it's going to be
I think it will be disturbable, disturbable, disturbably loud, And
(13:08):
I don't know, I'm not looking forward to that because.
Speaker 3 (13:12):
There seems to be two types of people in this world,
those that know how to close doors and those that
don't know how to close doors. I didn't think it'd
be too complicated, you know, and so considerate people and
inconsiderate people. But I also realized as I got older, that.
Speaker 1 (13:37):
Inconsiderate people aren't actually quite often doing it to be
harmful to other people. They're just not thinking they're just
they're just going about their business, going about their life.
They're not even noticing the doors slamming when they leave,
(13:59):
and perhaps not noticing they've got loud music at night,
or you know, they're just they're not doing it purposefully
to cause problems.
Speaker 2 (14:10):
I think some people.
Speaker 3 (14:11):
Just they're just not aware of or not aware but
not aware that other people are around they can hear.
Maybe they assume that they're everything they can hear is
just for their ears and no one else can hear it.
(14:35):
Have you ever seen someone on public transport talking about
someone else and they're literally like ten foot away, but
that person can hear you.
Speaker 2 (14:49):
I can hear you, and I'm in the next town.
It seems to Yes, it's kind of weird. One no
one can hear me. Yeah, they can hear.
Speaker 1 (15:03):
You, you know, when we're not not everybody.
Speaker 2 (15:09):
But so that would be interesting.
Speaker 1 (15:14):
I mean, I hope it will take a while before
they get anyone in there, and I hope when they do,
it's not going to be.
Speaker 3 (15:28):
You know, it's going to be Yeah, well I hope
it's going to be a nice person, that's all.
Speaker 2 (15:35):
Someone that's.
Speaker 1 (15:37):
Idea is someone that's older, someone that's maybe but I
don't think it really matters about agees that they're nice,
nice and quiet.
Speaker 5 (15:49):
That would be nice, Yeah, I think quiet.
Speaker 1 (15:55):
How many people have I had lived here, not in
my flat, but live in this building since I've been
here for ten years.
Speaker 2 (16:05):
Ten and a half years now.
Speaker 6 (16:09):
Oh so when I moved in, we had her him, him, him.
Speaker 1 (16:21):
So there was someone when I moved in, there was
Uncle's Sausages. He's been here the whole he was here
the whole time until recently.
Speaker 3 (16:39):
And then next to him there was someone that was
there for a while and then he moved out, and
then someone else moved in. I didn't realize it was
a different person. But he's been in there for a
long time, and I'll get on really well with him
as well, So he's cool. He's about eighty. And then
(17:08):
so this has kind of been the same for a
long time, the last probably eight years. This has pretty
much been the same upstairs until now. Downstairs there's someone
that's been there the whole time as well as she
(17:29):
was here when I moved in, not below me, but
one of the flats downstairs. And then in the other
flat next to the one I was just talking about downstairs,
that was where my friend Luke lived, and.
Speaker 7 (17:51):
He was.
Speaker 3 (17:54):
I think he's been there for like two, two or
three years before I moved in, at least a couple
of years before I moved in.
Speaker 8 (18:05):
So.
Speaker 2 (18:07):
And he was here until.
Speaker 1 (18:12):
What month is it now, August, September, October, November, so
it'll be two years in November that he left.
Speaker 8 (18:25):
Let me dark shut up.
Speaker 1 (18:31):
I do wonder if she just the owner of that
doctor's prods it to make it bark.
Speaker 2 (18:37):
Because it's too quiet and we need noise. Bark. That's good.
I haven't got to think now, just make lot noise.
We need noise.
Speaker 1 (18:51):
So when he left, the counsel came and did their
thing and all that stuff.
Speaker 2 (19:01):
But it did take.
Speaker 1 (19:04):
Quite a long time before anyone moved in, so it
was a good.
Speaker 3 (19:23):
I don't know if I just got a feeling it
was last summer, but maybe kind of April May time,
so December, January, February, March April, so at least five
or six months before someone moved in there. Yeah, so
(19:43):
it wasn't it might have been March April.
Speaker 2 (19:47):
It was all I know.
Speaker 1 (19:48):
It's very very sunny, so maybe four five months, so
it's quite it's quite a long time. I mean the
longer the better. The longer it takes, the better.
Speaker 2 (20:03):
I think.
Speaker 3 (20:04):
Not for people that are waiting for housing, obviously it's
not good for them, just for the tenants, you know,
just have that little break. That's I don't know, a
bit selfish, isn't I suppose. Sorry, I give myself permission
(20:27):
to be selfish once a day, and that was my
little selfish moment. So and then so soone moved in
there into to loose flat about.
Speaker 2 (20:46):
I don't know.
Speaker 1 (20:48):
I'm sure it's about May, but there might have been earlier.
Speaker 2 (20:54):
And then.
Speaker 3 (21:01):
She's moved out already as far as I know, she's
moved out a couple of weeks ago. So that tenant's gone.
So there's now another flat.
Speaker 2 (21:13):
Empty, but the council haven't come.
Speaker 1 (21:15):
In to refurbish it. So I'm not sure what's going on.
All I know is she moved I've been told that
she's moved out.
Speaker 2 (21:32):
And then.
Speaker 1 (21:34):
Downstairs, so we've got two flats empty at the moment,
but both kind of just been lived in it as
it were, you know, so they need to be what
the counse would normally do, you know, if there's stuff
in there like there was still some stuff in there
(21:55):
with Luke. They come in and they take all the
stuff out and they put it to the back of
a like a lorry van thing, you know, those cage vans.
And I don't know obviously where you live, I'm not
(22:16):
sure what it's like, but they kind of they use
quite often for cutting, like you know, the grass cutters
are doing parks and stuff, and they chuck stuff in
the back there. So it's got a cage. It's not
it's not got a top on it, but it's got
a cage at the side, so then it doesn't you know,
and they can open it at the back and put
(22:37):
stuff on and wheel stuff into it. I mean, it's
probably used in building sites that kind of things. Well,
I don't know, but I imagine, well they use that's
what they generally seem to use, so they chuck stuff
on there. Then there's a while because I guess the
(23:01):
process depends well how quick the process is depends on
how many flats need to be done, because they've got
limited workers to do it, I imagine. So you know,
if suddenly one hundred flats become available, a hundred properties
(23:25):
become available in one month, they're going to struggle to
do that many they're going it's gonna take a while,
I guess, but there I don't be honest, I don't
really know what the council actually do.
Speaker 2 (23:42):
To the property.
Speaker 3 (23:44):
I mean, once they take everything out, which they I know,
they take the carpet out as well. The only way
you get to have a carpet is if you do
a council swap with someone else. So, for example, I'd
love to live in Talkie. It's a long way away,
(24:08):
but I just think it's beautiful place or maybe something
like Cornwall or you know, somewhere that's just nice visually
nice with a beach.
Speaker 1 (24:23):
And yeah, I'm not, I'm not. I mean, this is
okay as a base, but it's not. I'm very secluded
here and I do like beaches and I've lived on
(24:44):
a well, I've lived in towns with beaches three times,
including Buttlings. I mean technically, well was not. Technically there
was a beach there, but I think I only went
to it twice and it was winter, so it wasn't.
(25:06):
Really I'm pretty sure the beach was. I think that
part of the beach might have been private just for no,
it wouldn't have been private with it.
Speaker 2 (25:21):
I don't know anyway.
Speaker 3 (25:24):
I remember I did go there a couple of times
at late at night, and it's very windy, very cold,
very rainy.
Speaker 2 (25:36):
Yeah, I do quite like beaches.
Speaker 3 (25:37):
I lived in South End when I was a little kid,
and back then South End was a very popular place
for holiday goes, and I mean it probably I think
Blackpool was always the most popular. I think, but I
(26:02):
think what happened and I might be I'm partly making
this up, is depending on where you lived in the country,
when it came to a holiday, you'd go to the
popular place that's in that part of the country. So
(26:24):
if you lived in I suppose Liverpool or Manchester and
stuff like that, you perhaps traveled to Blackpool. If you
lived in London, perhaps you travel to South End or
to Clacton. And if you're in Essex, maybe Clacton or
(26:48):
South End because both of those are in South End.
So and it's probably the same in other places, you
know where you'd go to a place where.
Speaker 1 (27:03):
There's I'm trying to think the East Coast Yarmouth. Yarmouth
was a very popular place. Yarmouth Beach is one of
the nicest beaches I ever went to in this country.
It was a long time ago. I went on a
school trip. Was there a school trip?
Speaker 8 (27:26):
Wow?
Speaker 2 (27:26):
Why I've always gone squeaky?
Speaker 1 (27:31):
Why did I go to Yarmouth? I went on a
trip with someone, but I don't know why I went.
Maybe it was with the see Cadets, or maybe it
(27:54):
was a school trip. Might be the school trip, might
be in the cecredets. But I've got a memory of it.
And I think one of the blokes, one of the kids,
met a girl while he was there, and he was
not in the Cecredets, So I think it was just
(28:16):
a school trip and we went to Yarmouth for some
reason for the day and stuff like that.
Speaker 2 (28:25):
It's brilliant.
Speaker 3 (28:28):
Yeah, probably that's what's a memory I forgot about. Yeah.
Speaker 2 (28:38):
I remember running on the beach.
Speaker 3 (28:44):
And just like the sea coming up and I'm kissing
my girlfriend and she's like, we're upset because she's going back.
She's on holidays, she was going back to Australia and I.
Speaker 1 (29:00):
To go back to school. I wait a minute, as
speakinning of Greece. No, but there's definitely a beach. There
was a beach. I'll tell you another beach, really lovely,
really Lower Stuft, so the East Coast if you ever
do come to if you live up north, or you
(29:21):
live in Scotland or Wales or the middle of the
country Norwige. I mean, if you live in the South area,
you're probably going to know about the East Coast. But
there's some really nice beaches here. Now, I don't think
(29:41):
anyone's going to come from Wales to go visiting beaches
other parts of the UK because Wales has some of
the most beautiful beaches in the world. I think I
covered myself there. Good does Scotland have beaches?
Speaker 3 (30:03):
So I said, do Scotland have Wales? See, I have
been to Scotland, but I was a tiny kid. I
think I lived there for a while. I'd like to go. Well,
do I say Scotland, I'd like to go to Scotland.
I'd like to It's one of those places like I've
been to Wales.
Speaker 2 (30:22):
Multiple times over the years.
Speaker 1 (30:24):
I've been told I live in England, but I've been
to lots and lots of places in England. I lived
in Newcastle, lived in South End, lived in East Anglia,
lived in Essex, lived in London. Yes, I lived in
(30:47):
the Northeast in the South I've been to.
Speaker 3 (30:55):
You know, a lot of the places I've been to Nottingham, Liverpool, Manchester,
Bolton and most of the towns in this on the
east coast area, you know, all those different beccles and
(31:19):
lowest staffed Yarmouth, all those places in Norfolk as well.
I've been to lots of places in Norfolk over the
years in the past, not recently.
Speaker 2 (31:36):
And I just.
Speaker 3 (31:40):
Haven't really as an adult or as a like a
because when I was there, I was too young to
really know where I was.
Speaker 1 (31:49):
When I was in Scotland, that is so my oldest
brother said, we lived in Scotland for a while, but
I don't recollect it. I don't remember it because I
was I might have even been a baby, not a baby,
but like two years old or something, which is still
a baby, isn't it really?
Speaker 2 (32:10):
And I'd like to go.
Speaker 1 (32:17):
To Scotland just to visit and because I would be
a tourist like my dad is literally not literally.
Speaker 2 (32:24):
Because it was a while back, but.
Speaker 3 (32:27):
Probably about two months ago for sus yeah, probably about
two months ago. He was in Scotland on holiday and
he did a little tour of Scotland and I'm not
sure where he went, because I've got family and well,
(32:50):
my ancestry. Although forty eight percent Irish, I am about
two percent Scottish or four percent Scottish, so you know,
my Celtic percentage is quite high Irish and Scottish. And
I don't know if there's any or whales in me now,
(33:16):
I just god, we have visual would you want and
well or whale in you? But yeah, I don't know
if I've got any.
Speaker 4 (33:23):
We're all mixed, and we ultimately there is the idea
that is that there's a pure breed human out there.
Speaker 3 (33:33):
Shut up, shut up, doesn't exist. You're silly, silly person.
Speaker 2 (33:39):
I'm pure me. No you're not. Maybe pure of mind,
I'm a pure breed.
Speaker 3 (33:46):
No, there's no such thing. There's not even such thing
as a pure breed dog, because most dogs have just created.
You know, you've got a dog. And then you say, okay,
I like this. I like this little mixture we've got.
Let's make more of just this mixture and we'll call
it a pure breed, even though the original wasn't a
pure breed. It was just a mixture. No, it's not
(34:09):
how it works.
Speaker 1 (34:11):
So I remembersides saying, oh is it Jack Russell, and
he was the bloke that tried to selling the many
to me. He's a pure breed, you know, I said, okay,
And I did a bit of research and Jack Russell's
were created on purpose by mixing a bunch of dogs
(34:32):
together to create hunters.
Speaker 2 (34:39):
So it's nothing pure a poumped hair.
Speaker 4 (34:44):
It's like, you know, it's weird. There's definitely no pure
breed humans.
Speaker 2 (34:54):
Is that controversal? No, but it's true.
Speaker 8 (35:01):
Ah.
Speaker 3 (35:02):
Yeah, So Scotland, I reckon it would be quite a
nice place to visit.
Speaker 2 (35:11):
Wales.
Speaker 3 (35:12):
I'd like to go back to Wales and visit again. Yeah,
I'd like to see the beaches again, just to see
if they are what I remember. I'm going to be
smaller than I remember, because I was tiny when I
went there, you know, because we used to go camping
in Wales every.
Speaker 2 (35:31):
Year for quite a few years, and.
Speaker 4 (35:41):
I didn't like camping. I'll be honest with you. I
didn't like it. It's just not my.
Speaker 3 (35:51):
I mean, you haven't got to be an adult to
know what you do and don't like, have you. I
mean I knew from the very first time that I
was standing there in the rain.
Speaker 4 (36:05):
Putting a tent up, that I didn't enjoy the process,
and that I didn't really want to do it again,
I would say, the only nice thing.
Speaker 2 (36:20):
And this is going to be weird. Actually there's two things.
The only I didn't mind sleeping in a tent, but
I didn't like it, however, weird. That is.
Speaker 1 (36:36):
What I liked, is laying down in the tent. And
because we're in Wales, there's the obligatory rain has to occur.
I mean this was in the peak of the season,
peak of the summer. Beautiful for pupil are beautiful weather,
but also you know, some rain as well around it,
(36:57):
which is why it's such a luscious country.
Speaker 2 (37:04):
And that sound of the rain.
Speaker 1 (37:08):
On the lid of the tent was just so nice.
Speaker 2 (37:13):
It was.
Speaker 1 (37:15):
I mean, I don't personally, I probably did get tingles.
It was maybe that's my ASMR thing. I just found
it very relaxing. But being inside the tent when it
was happening. I've always enjoyed hearing rain, unless I have
(37:40):
to go out in it, then I don't enjoy it.
Speaker 2 (37:45):
And wind and weather. I like weather. I'm kind of
used to it.
Speaker 3 (37:53):
If you ever lived, if you lived in this country, all.
Speaker 9 (37:57):
We have is weather. It's just continuous. Yes, So I
don't know.
Speaker 1 (38:09):
I think, yeah, laying down, I don't know where everyone
was because there was like what one, two, three, four,
five and myself there was six of us, way too
(38:33):
many people to spend time together. But we did and
you know it was it was what it was.
Speaker 2 (38:45):
Can't change it now. Yeah, parts of it were lovely.
Speaker 1 (38:51):
Is I liked the the sandy beaches. And because in Wales,
like I'm like a tourist guy, don't I If you've
never been to Wales, and if you thought about all
(39:12):
I'll go or not, I'd recommend going, maybe be prepared
to travel around because you know, it's not that Wales
is a huge area. I mean it's not tiny, but
it's still it's there's you know, there's still quite a lot.
(39:33):
There's quite a few beautiful beaches. You've got Snowdonia the mountain,
and I went up there twice, I think maybe three times.
Speaker 3 (39:49):
I think it's twice. Went up by train once and
went up like walked up to the top. So did
the journey. I think it was twice. Train's a lot quicker,
so I wouldn't try and.
Speaker 4 (40:08):
Not in a not even in a no, I wouldn't
try and walk up it now.
Speaker 2 (40:16):
I mean, there are parts of it that.
Speaker 3 (40:18):
He kind of it's an up hill walk, but it's
not steep the whole way. There's parts of it that
feel almost flat, and then it gradually, you know, you
end up and I think you kind of walk around
the thing.
Speaker 2 (40:33):
I think, but.
Speaker 3 (40:37):
In my memory it might not be true. But yeah,
not really, not really for me anymore.
Speaker 2 (40:44):
I would go up by it. I probably. I don't
know if i'd even bother.
Speaker 3 (40:47):
Going up by train, because I've done it. I did
it years ago, I did it when I was a kid.
Wouldn't be that bothered to do it again. But if
you haven't done it, it's definitely worth it, I would say,
because I don't know about your life. But how often
do you get to stand at the top of a mountain?
(41:11):
And some people would, I guess every day if you
live on a mountain, obviously, but.
Speaker 2 (41:19):
I yeah, it's quite not yeah, it's quite.
Speaker 3 (41:24):
Maybe I would do it again, but go by train,
and the trains were old, I really made of wood,
kind of proper old trains, just like that. My dad's
(41:46):
saying to me, Jason, can you stop that? I said,
But it makes fun. It makes it more fun if
I had some sound effects.
Speaker 2 (41:55):
But yeah, I quite liked it. Yeah, that was all right.
Speaker 1 (41:59):
We also went to slate places, so basically just old
minds where they used to dig for slate. We did
also go to a couple of coal.
Speaker 3 (42:12):
Mines, old coal mines, and I think what really surprised me.
Speaker 2 (42:22):
I don't know why.
Speaker 4 (42:23):
I was surprised how big they are like underneath.
Speaker 2 (42:32):
Really.
Speaker 3 (42:35):
I mean, I do kind of think that if you're
going to build a hole like that, you're going to
dig a hole. When you finish, you need to fill
the hole in. That seems to be the obvious thing.
(42:56):
You don't leave a big, massive whole.
Speaker 2 (43:00):
All in the ground.
Speaker 3 (43:02):
I'm not talking about the entrance or the exit. Maybe
U classes the entrance or the exits, probably both, isn't it,
But all of the space inside because that's going sideways,
and you know there's a lot of ground that's basically
(43:27):
underneath the place where people are walkings.
Speaker 4 (43:29):
This big, massive gap of empty space sort of made sense.
Speaker 3 (43:41):
I don't know, to me, do something with that space.
I don't know what build build like a shelter or
some kind.
Speaker 2 (43:58):
Of I don't know. It you know it just so
it's supported.
Speaker 3 (44:07):
So it's really really well supported for the ground.
Speaker 1 (44:11):
And you can tell I know nothing about what I'm
talking about, but doesn't hasn't stopped me before, so why
should they stop me now?
Speaker 2 (44:21):
Why there's no use them? So yeah, I'd like to
go to Scotland.
Speaker 1 (44:35):
I'm not sure where though, because I do I'd like
to go to Ireland again as well. I mean I'm
a sole traveler generally, but if I went to Ireland,
it's I could visit a couple of people that I know,
or three people that I know on the whole of
(44:58):
the island, including a northern Ireland.
Speaker 10 (45:03):
And.
Speaker 3 (45:04):
That with Scotland, i'd quite like to go to, trying
to keep a Scottish place.
Speaker 1 (45:18):
They've got They've got towns in Scotland, haven't they. Do
you have houses there?
Speaker 3 (45:28):
Yeah, I don't know. I just I just like to
visit and just have a look around. Really, there's no.
Speaker 1 (45:37):
Specific place necessarily. I mean, i'd like to go to Edinburgh,
but i'd like to go during the Edinburgh Festival, so
that would be cool.
Speaker 2 (45:55):
And Glasgow is another place i'd like to visit.
Speaker 4 (46:05):
Yeah, outside of that, I can't think of any other
places Edinburgh Glasgow. Hm that probably I'm not saying that's
that's all, but that I guess there are two of
the main places.
Speaker 2 (46:23):
Glasgow. Just I don't know. It's somewhere that I wanted
to visit for a long time, Edinburgh, solely because of the.
Speaker 1 (46:33):
Edinburgh Festival, the Fringe Festival, so where the comedy and
stuff is on a I think it's in August, it's now.
Speaker 3 (46:44):
Actually probably.
Speaker 2 (46:54):
I've not been to.
Speaker 3 (46:55):
The Isle of Wight. I have family on the Eye
of White, not that I know. I just I've got
like distant relatives that live there, as I do on
the Isle of Man. And well, one of my close relatives,
my auntie, used to live on the Isle of Man.
(47:17):
She doesn't anymore, so that's that's not a distant relative
is that she's my auntie, but she's my daddy's sister,
or she's my granny's daughter, so her and her daughter
lived on.
Speaker 2 (47:31):
The Isle of Man.
Speaker 3 (47:33):
The Isla White is more.
Speaker 4 (47:35):
Distant, distant distant relations sort of my NaN's relatives, relatives, And.
Speaker 2 (47:46):
I'd like to visit the Isla White.
Speaker 1 (47:48):
I think it's has to be quite a decent place
to go, quite a nice place so maybe go there
because these are more like closer places, aren't they, rather
than traveling across the world.
Speaker 4 (48:04):
About here, well, all the places that there are to
visit here that I could visit here, Yeah, I don't know.
Just maybe maybe could go and have a look around,
have a little wonder.
Speaker 3 (48:28):
But then you've got lots of islands, haven't you around
the local islands like Bergerac you're there, and is Love
Sheppy is. There's some Scottish islands that I could visit.
And I think there's like one hundred and twenty one
(48:51):
different little islands around the UK. There's a few, anyway,
I don't know if there's that many. I made that up,
but there's a few. There's definitely a few islands with
small amounts of people, you know. So I think it'd
(49:12):
be quite cool to visit some of those places. And
again it's just a ferry, isn't it, and maybe another
boat to take me to the island, as long as
I don't have to get in the water, you know,
if it's a small boat like from a ferry or
(49:33):
a ship, and then a small boat there needs to
be at least a jetty, you know, and someone to
help me off the boat. I don't want to be
like having to jump in the sea and walk up
get all wet.
Speaker 2 (49:49):
No, I don't no, stop asking me to do that.
I don't want to.
Speaker 1 (49:57):
So yeah, so there's lots of places i'd quite like
to visit in the foreseeable kind of surroundings, I suppose,
you know, because none of this is particularly far away.
Speaker 2 (50:21):
It's a few hours. A few hours, I.
Speaker 3 (50:26):
Mean, the Isle of Man is quite on the Isle
of Wight is a fair distance because I don't know
about the Isle of White. But with the Isle of Man,
i'd have to go to Liverpool, I think to get
the ferry.
Speaker 2 (50:40):
From there to the Isle of Man. So Liverpool.
Speaker 3 (50:45):
To get from here to Liverpool is probably about five
hours on a train, if not more, five hours, maybe less,
maybe more, maybe six hours, and then the ferry over.
If I've got a nighttime one, it's going to take
all night to get there.
Speaker 2 (51:07):
Daytime.
Speaker 3 (51:08):
Daytime is usually travel quicker, don't they, But at nighttime,
and I do like a nighttime.
Speaker 2 (51:16):
Journey a nighttime.
Speaker 1 (51:18):
Ferry, but I like a daytime fairy as well.
Speaker 3 (51:25):
I think there's the benefits of a daytime as you
can see, you can go out on the deck and
you can see stuff.
Speaker 2 (51:32):
At night, you can't really see that much, but it.
Speaker 3 (51:39):
Is more slow and more relaxed, and there's less people
the nighttime. In my experience, I've done a few nighttime
ferries over the years, and it's just less people around
in the nighttime. I think that, but I guess in
the majority of people prefer to travel during the day,
(52:03):
especially when it comes to or in the past, going
to Belgium, there was a very popular pastime for people
and they would travel from England to Belgium, or England
to France and basically get off the ferry, go to
(52:31):
the duty duty free place, buy lots of alcohol and
cigarettes and then get on the next ferry, back load
their lorry not the lowry, load their van or their
car with stuff and pretend that it was for personal use,
(52:54):
and then get back and sell it in the pubs.
Speaker 2 (52:58):
Now, that was.
Speaker 3 (52:59):
Something that people would did for years and years and years.
And I mean there was a time we didn't even
need a passport to go to to go abroad. You
could get like a little part like a day a
day passport, a day pass and because I didn't know
I went abroad, oh, I didn't get my first passport
(53:23):
until nineteen ninety four, and so before that time, I
traveled to Belgium multiple times, to France, and I flew
to Spain and I didn't have a passport, just got
(53:45):
a like a I was allowed to go, which is
a bit weird because everywhere I've been since then, they've all.
Speaker 2 (53:54):
Asked to see my passport.
Speaker 3 (53:57):
And this is you know, this is I've well, yeah,
I don't think I've left.
Speaker 2 (54:03):
Have I left the country since?
Speaker 4 (54:06):
Yeah, it's not to do with us leaving Europe because.
Speaker 2 (54:17):
A few years back.
Speaker 4 (54:19):
We basically put our little sales up and we moved
away from Europe.
Speaker 1 (54:26):
We moved the whole country away, floated away, we did.
It's weird, very strange. We can actually see the sun
moving to the side as we moved.
Speaker 2 (54:39):
So yeah, so if you do travel to England, just
be aware that we're not in the same place. Who was.
They haven't changed all the maps because.
Speaker 3 (54:49):
They take ages and it's expensive. So plus England is
such a dot on the map anyway, you almost miss
if it was the scale, so it doesn't really matter
of fact.
Speaker 2 (55:05):
We've moved a few thousand miles. So yeah, well, now
in China. You didn't know that, No, you didn't know
it nowhere near Hong Kong.
Speaker 4 (55:18):
Yeah, so we moved out of Europe a few years
ago and the weather's changed.
Speaker 2 (55:27):
It's a lot warmer now.
Speaker 8 (55:30):
Yeah.
Speaker 2 (55:31):
The thing is the problem is I didn't.
Speaker 3 (55:35):
They didn't plan it very well because they managed to
get it set, but anchorage there wasn't enough. Anchorage didn't
have enough anchors. So we keep kind of just you
wake up. You never know when where you could have
end up. The other day, I was in Spain, woke up,
looked out in Spain.
Speaker 2 (55:55):
Three weeks ago, I was in Somalia. Just you don't,
I don't know. So yeah, and.
Speaker 3 (56:07):
So this is my Sunday afternoon, Sunday afternoon. There was
a time in England where everything was closed on a Sunday.
I'm talking everything. The only thing opened. Two things are
(56:28):
opened as far as for public, okay, other than you know,
going out and stuff. You know, there was still amusements
and all those kinds of things were open on the
weekends for people and maybe a Sunday market.
Speaker 2 (56:47):
But newsagents opened.
Speaker 3 (56:50):
On a Sunday morning and then on a Sunday lunchtime
off license could open for about an hour and a
half then they closed, and then they'd open up. I
think they're allowed to open up in the evening for.
Speaker 1 (57:07):
About an hour and a half then they close, not
one hundred percent sure that's true. And pubs would be
allowed to open up for a short period of time,
probably being between eleven and one or eleven and two.
The pubs would open and then they'd open again in
(57:27):
the evening for about.
Speaker 2 (57:31):
Seven till ten or six till ten.
Speaker 3 (57:35):
They close it they close at ten o'clock. That's what
that's Honestly, that's what Sundays used to be like in
this country. No supermarkets, no anything walking around. It is
just not everyone to be at home, apart from those
that weren't. And it was kind of like an official
(57:59):
day off. I mean, and it's not official, it was
That's the reason, wasn't it so that people can have
the day off working, So probably the majority of people
in the country wouldn't work on a Sunday.
Speaker 11 (58:21):
Yeah, a lot.
Speaker 5 (58:22):
Different back then, and it still was like that when
I'm pretty sure.
Speaker 3 (58:39):
I'm not sure how relaxed things got, but I'm pretty
sure it was still like that when I when I
moved to London, because I lived in a small town
at that time and I moved to London and.
Speaker 4 (58:58):
Things are different because shops were open. Some shops were open.
Speaker 2 (59:05):
All the time, like all.
Speaker 3 (59:08):
The time, and I've never seen that before. Like you
could just get stuff whenever you wanted, at any time
of the day or night.
Speaker 2 (59:19):
Not everywhere, but there were places you could get stuff.
Speaker 3 (59:23):
And there was this when I lived in forest Gate.
There was this little shop right on the corner. Worst
shop in the world. It was on the corner and
you had to ring the doorbell for them to let
you in. So it's basically it's almost like they'd conver
(59:47):
their front room, their living room into a shop and
it's sold groceries, sweets, just bits like that. Yeah, everything
was behind the counter, so you couldn't just take what
you wanted and put it on again. They had to
(01:00:07):
get it for you.
Speaker 1 (01:00:11):
And you had to ring their doorbell and they would
come and open the door. To me, that was someone
that did not want my money. They did not want
to work, they didn't want to be open. So I
just I wouldn't go there. I'd walk, I'd walk two
(01:00:32):
miles away to get stuff. I just refused to go
in there. I was very young. I was very I
was very political back then.
Speaker 2 (01:00:42):
I was very stupid back then.
Speaker 4 (01:00:44):
I just annoyed me because a couple of times I
did try and get in there and they just wouldn't
answer the door.
Speaker 2 (01:00:51):
We're busy, Come on, I just want to cand of coke.
Speaker 8 (01:00:56):
We're busy.
Speaker 2 (01:00:59):
Couldn't you just come? I just want one can of coke?
We're in bed. Really, can't you just give me a
can of coke? It's four in the morning. We're going
to call the police if you don't go away. We
know where you live, Okay, fair enough?
Speaker 3 (01:01:21):
So yeah, I understand they didn't want to open the
door for four in the morning. But it's I remember
when seven eleven opened. Now, that changed the world in
this country because suddenly all they were open, because everything,
(01:01:43):
even during the week everything was closed.
Speaker 2 (01:01:46):
You know. I think the pubs had to be closed
by eleven or half ten. I think.
Speaker 3 (01:01:54):
Maybe they could open a bit later at the weekends.
But the whole kind of being open late late didn't
happen till late nineties, I think maybe two thousands.
Speaker 2 (01:02:09):
Yeah.
Speaker 1 (01:02:10):
Wow, a lot of changes, a lot of changes over
the years. But seven eleven, that was so good and
I don't know why it didn't. I mean it might
still be around parts of the country. I don't know,
(01:02:30):
probably maybe in London, if they're all cities, maybe, but
it didn't last very long there, and I never understood
it because it was the perfect place. They had everything
everything you could possibly want in it of an evening.
I mean, unless you wanted to buy some underpants or something,
then they didn't have that. If you wanted to buy
(01:02:53):
a you know, a game of chess, they didn't have
that either, you know, a packet of screws.
Speaker 2 (01:03:02):
No, didn't have that.
Speaker 3 (01:03:03):
But they had like basic things like biscuits, cakes, drinks, alcohol, cigarettes,
and chocolates. I suppose it like basic. I think they
might have had a few basic groceries also, yeah, they probably, Yeah,
(01:03:26):
they did have basic groceries, so like tins of beans
and coffee, tea, you know, the kind of stuff that
you'd probably find it in any seven eleven around the
world because there's lots of them.
Speaker 2 (01:03:42):
It was brilliant. I loved it now.
Speaker 3 (01:03:47):
I used to go when it first started. I'd go
in there when it first opened. I mean i'd say,
what time are you're closing, Let's say eleven? I mean,
to start with, it was like, oh, eleven o'clock. After
the fifteenth time of going in there, like every day
in a row, they said, it's still eleven o'clock. Then
(01:04:10):
after about three weeks of doing it, they took me
outside and pointed to the sign and what I think
they thought I was making fun of them, but I wasn't,
because I really I grew up seeing everything close early,
like my whole life up to the age of sixteen
(01:04:32):
seventeen or whatever. It was, everything closed early in the
evening on a Sunday, everything, And I just couldn't believe
that something was open late till eleven at night.
Speaker 2 (01:04:49):
It was unheard of.
Speaker 3 (01:04:53):
And I kind of because of the because I was
working in the chip shop at the time, and I
didn't finish work till probably ten half ten sometimes if
it was a really busy lot to do and stuff
ten o'clock, I don't know, and I'd go and check
in that because I wanted to make sure I could
go in and get myself maybe some drinks or some
(01:05:16):
chocolate bars or something. So i'd go in, you know,
like earlier in the day, what time you closing, I'd
I'd try and get at like a different member of staff.
I always get the same answer, eleven o'clock Jason. And
so I thought, well, I'm going to start doing is
(01:05:37):
phoning them.
Speaker 1 (01:05:39):
So I phoned them up. Now, if you go somewhere
regularly and then you start to phone them, it's a.
Speaker 3 (01:05:51):
Good idea to put on a different voice if you can,
because they just knew as me straight away because I
said to Hi, it's Jason from the chip shop. What
time have you closed today? Eleven o'clock? Like every other day,
it's eleven o'clock, seven eleven. It means seven in the
(01:06:12):
morning to eleven at night, you know, and seem to
want to know what time we open.
Speaker 1 (01:06:20):
We open at seven. The clues in the sign, the
clues in the name. Thank you for calling Jason. Now
my problem is I should have put on a different voice. Clearly, Hi,
it's Jason from the chip shop. What time you close
(01:06:42):
in today?
Speaker 2 (01:06:45):
See, I just didn't think on my feet.
Speaker 3 (01:06:50):
It would be a lot easier, but I just thought
it out first, like could do with these recordings. I mean,
you wouldn't believe that I spend probably six seven hours
a day, you know, putting on his script together.
Speaker 1 (01:07:06):
What I'm going to say, and you know, practice in
for a good two hours before I start the recording
and then it sounds so natural.
Speaker 2 (01:07:20):
Wow. Can you imagine if I did that? Well, yeah,
you can imagine, because it'd probably.
Speaker 3 (01:07:25):
Be really well presented instead of this whatever it is
that I do.
Speaker 2 (01:07:33):
But this is what you get. This is me.
Speaker 4 (01:07:38):
My name's Jason La la la la la l L.
Speaker 3 (01:07:46):
So yeah, that's it. Really, it's me talking about Sundays and.
Speaker 2 (01:07:51):
What I had did.
Speaker 3 (01:07:56):
Church used to be open on a Sunday evening, I
think it did. I know it used to be opening
on a Sunday morning because I would often go to
church with my nan, or often, but quite a fair
few times I'd go to church with my nan when
I was a teenager sort of six fifteen, sixteen, seventeen
(01:08:19):
or whatever. And then we'd go and because there'd be
a coffee place, so there'd be a place you could
get some coffee.
Speaker 2 (01:08:30):
Or was that during the week.
Speaker 3 (01:08:31):
That might have been on a Wednesday. Maybe she went
to church on a Wednesday and I'd go to church
with her. Then maybe it was a Sunday, I'm not sure.
Maybe it was a Sunday. We'd go and get a
cup of tea and a cake, and then I think
(01:08:57):
we'd walk back. There wasn't a cute, huge walker. This
is a fair distance, but it wasn't a huge walk.
Speaker 2 (01:09:05):
Or maybe my dad would come and pick her up.
Speaker 3 (01:09:08):
I don't know.
Speaker 4 (01:09:11):
I don't remember exactly how much.
Speaker 2 (01:09:14):
Of this is true. I did used to go to
quite yeah, quite a few times.
Speaker 3 (01:09:26):
I went to midnight Mass with her at midnight, but
then they also had an early midnight Mass for people
that couldn't get there, you know, for midnight, which makes sense.
It doesn't make sense the way I said it, but
some people it wasn't you know, walking around at midnight
(01:09:50):
wasn't really ideal. So they did like an early one
at about seven or eight in the evening, and.
Speaker 2 (01:09:59):
Once one day.
Speaker 3 (01:10:00):
Got a bit older, i'd probably say from yeah, the
last twenty years, No, the last two thousand and four two.
Speaker 2 (01:10:15):
Four, wow, the last ten.
Speaker 3 (01:10:19):
Years, no, because that's the thing, because after two thousand
and four. So I went to midnight Mass with her,
but it was early one. It was about eight o'clock.
I know my auntie was there and she wanted to
(01:10:42):
go to her church because my.
Speaker 4 (01:10:44):
Name's a Catholic and she had our own church that
she wanted to go to, So I'm not sure what
it was that she went to, and she wanted to
go to there as well to do the actual midnight.
Speaker 2 (01:10:58):
Service. And it's still.
Speaker 1 (01:11:03):
One of my favorite Christmas is as an adult two
thousand and four. It's weird, but there's something special about
it to me. And I was staying at my nun's
house in the spare room, the room that I used
to have for myself when I was eight years old.
(01:11:24):
My my own bedroom was brilliant, and I was back
sleeping in there. My aunt and uncle were in the
other room, which was that's where my two brothers used
to sleep in bunk beds. And in my NaN's bedroom
was where my parents used to sleep, so and that's
(01:11:46):
where her and her husband, my granddad, that was their
room from nineteen seventy nine, you know onwards. So I
had that room for about a year, my little room.
But I wasn't there for a year.
Speaker 4 (01:12:04):
Of two thousand and four, just there for one night,
probably two or three nights.
Speaker 2 (01:12:10):
So because I.
Speaker 4 (01:12:11):
Was living in a different town, so I come over
probably Christmas Eve because I was working, Yeah, I was working,
So I come over Christmas Eve.
Speaker 2 (01:12:24):
I go out to.
Speaker 3 (01:12:29):
Go out to church to midnight Mass, but it's early
with my nan because she couldn't have said she couldn't
go to the late one. It was too late for
by that time because she was you know, she had.
Speaker 4 (01:12:45):
Like a disability because of her hip and stuff, so
she needed a walk and stick and stuff, so you know,
walking around at night wasn't really ideal.
Speaker 2 (01:12:54):
Although she would have got a lift, you know. And then.
Speaker 3 (01:13:04):
I say she would have got She did get a lift,
but she would have got a lift back. It was
late anyway, so she got a lift anyway. So we
went up with my aunt and uncle, and then we
came back and my aunt and uncle my Auntie wanted
to go to the other thing, but I don't think
they went in the end, because they spent too much
(01:13:24):
time talking about it and discussed with were not to go.
And by that time it was Boxing day by the
time I finished, and my Auntie did something that I've
never done before, or she sort of introduced a new,
a new Christmas Eve thing. So she went and she
got some presents off the tree and gave me a
(01:13:46):
present Christmas Eve. I said, but Auntie, it's Christmas Eve.
Speaker 2 (01:13:53):
It's not time for presents.
Speaker 3 (01:13:55):
That's supposed to be on Christmas Day.
Speaker 4 (01:13:59):
Sure, she said, no, we give presents Christmas Eve. It's
just one present off the tree. It's just something we
do every year.
Speaker 3 (01:14:09):
But how's father Christmas delivered him?
Speaker 2 (01:14:11):
If he hasn't been yet, She said, you're thirty four
years old. Shut up.
Speaker 4 (01:14:16):
Wow, it's a bit harsh, wasn't it.
Speaker 2 (01:14:19):
And so.
Speaker 3 (01:14:25):
It was just sweets, basically, it was like candy you
would call it maybe if you call it that in
your country. But the thing is, I hadn't had any
chocolate since the summer, so I'd lost a lot of
weight on purpose because I kind of I needed to
(01:14:50):
get fitter. So during the June two thousand and four,
I kind of got myself nice and physically fit.
Speaker 1 (01:14:58):
I was working on the mental fitness as well. And
I hadn't had any chocolate since the summer.
Speaker 3 (01:15:09):
So we're talking what July, August, September, October, November for
at least four or five months. So Christmas Eve, I'm
here with these and it was one of those chocolate
things that sparkle on your tongue, and I was.
Speaker 2 (01:15:28):
Just it was heavenly.
Speaker 4 (01:15:31):
It was a pleasure that I just didn't realize I
needed it was so nice.
Speaker 3 (01:15:41):
Oh and it was like being a kid again.
Speaker 2 (01:15:45):
It was just really because I remember good.
Speaker 3 (01:15:52):
I'll tell you one of the benefits of being of
my childhood is a lot of the nice stuff happened
when I was I know, it's good to have nice
stuff happened when you're young, when you're really young. But
one of the benefits of it happened when it happens
for the first time, when you're kind of seven or eight,
is I can still remember it now. So certain things
(01:16:16):
like chocolate that I'd never eaten before, or riding my
first bike. You know, a lot of kids had their
first bike when they'd I'd had two, three, four, you know,
so my first bike was when I was just four
as what seven I think I was, Yeah, was seven,
So I remember that.
Speaker 2 (01:16:36):
So it's quite nice to have those little memories. Now.
Speaker 1 (01:16:41):
I wasn't four in two thousand and four or seven
in two thousand and four, but.
Speaker 2 (01:16:48):
It was a little bit like that.
Speaker 3 (01:16:50):
It's like, Okay, this is nice, this is like a
It's not that I'd never had it before. It it
was almost like for the first time because I'd gone
five months about.
Speaker 2 (01:17:01):
Any chocolate, and trust.
Speaker 3 (01:17:04):
Me, that was a long time for me back then
to go about chocolate. I've always been a little bit
of a chocolate e person. It's part of the culture
in this country eating chocolate, sugar, all that stuff is
part of the national pastime, part of my national identity.
Speaker 2 (01:17:30):
Stuff myself full of sugar.
Speaker 3 (01:17:37):
So yeah, that was just a really that was a
nice Christmas. Actually, so I got to see my nan,
got to see me uncle an aunt, got to see
me Dad and that side of the family because I
went there for Christmas dinner and then went back to
my NaN's in the evening and then had Boxing.
Speaker 2 (01:17:59):
Day with my nan and Christmas dinner and Boxing Day dinner.
Speaker 3 (01:18:04):
So yeah, it was cool. That was a nice Christmas.
I mean, it's not the only Christmas I spent at
my NaN's, but is the most memorable one. Yeah, there
was another Christmas I spent there in my NaN's brother
was there, Uncle Antony, and he was I think he
(01:18:27):
was a little bit younger than her. He was a
younger brother by probably about four years, three or four years.
Speaker 2 (01:18:35):
And maybe maybe older brother. I don't know.
Speaker 1 (01:18:41):
I think younger brother. I think I might be wrong,
but marginally younger. I think she had about twelve brothers
and sisters my name.
Speaker 8 (01:18:53):
And.
Speaker 2 (01:18:56):
He it was funny.
Speaker 3 (01:19:00):
It was not funny funny, but he'd watched the TV
downstairs and he'd had it.
Speaker 2 (01:19:04):
On so loud.
Speaker 3 (01:19:07):
I literally like was just there all night try I
struggled to sleep because the TV.
Speaker 2 (01:19:13):
Was blaring out. She couldn't hear it.
Speaker 4 (01:19:16):
It's as simple as that wasn't what he wasn't being inconsiderate.
He just couldn't hear the TV, so he had to
turn it up in order to hear it. And I
think my men went down there and told him off
because she was concerned about the neighbors, because she always
had a really good relationship with the next door neighbor,
(01:19:41):
him and his family, or the couple and their family.
And it was still it was the same next door
neighbor they had that we had when we lived there
before they moved in, and we kept I say we,
I and my family was still in contact with that
next door I mean I was still in contact with
(01:20:06):
that family. I was still visiting going around there in
nineteen ninety. In fact, no, I was still going around there. Wow,
I was still going around there in the early nineties.
When I visit, I still go in there because I
was friends with a.
Speaker 3 (01:20:25):
Boy and I really liked the girl. I was friends
with her as well, and I got on well with
the parents because I've known her since I was seven
or eight years old, seven and a half eight, so
they'd known me kind of almost all my life in
a way. You think from seven and a half to
(01:20:48):
twenty twenty one, twenty two whatever, that's a long time.
Speaker 2 (01:20:56):
And they lived there and they loved my well.
Speaker 3 (01:21:00):
I love my nan and granddad, but you know, they
looked out for my name when she lived there on
her own.
Speaker 8 (01:21:06):
And.
Speaker 2 (01:21:10):
Really nice people. It's weird.
Speaker 3 (01:21:14):
It's like, I don't want to sort of say too much,
but I don't even know what this situation is anymore.
But the lady that lived there was a nurse. I'm
not sure what a husband did. I think he might
have worked on the docks. And I was at school
with both the kids. So I was at school with
(01:21:38):
the boy who was the same age as my brother,
my first older brother, and then his sister who was
probably two years younger than me, maybe three years, two
(01:22:01):
years probably, I don't know. I kind of noticed her
when I was twenty I knew, but I kind of
like suddenly.
Speaker 2 (01:22:10):
It was weird because she was very beautiful. That's not
the weird part. But she had.
Speaker 3 (01:22:20):
A birthmark on her face, which did not take away
her beauty, you know what I mean.
Speaker 2 (01:22:26):
She was a very beautiful face.
Speaker 3 (01:22:29):
And I always liked the rifle when I was a
kid because she's, you know, only marginally younger than me.
Speaker 2 (01:22:36):
So I always liked her.
Speaker 3 (01:22:39):
As a because when I was when I was ten,
she was eight, you know. But she had it removed.
She had the birthmark removed, and it was just like
a brown birthmark or something. It changed her personality. So
I'm not saying she's being sweet, because she was a
(01:23:03):
very sweet girl.
Speaker 2 (01:23:03):
She she was.
Speaker 3 (01:23:05):
Still sweet in her own way, but she became very
confident and she enjoyed all the attention that she was
getting from the boys, which is natural. But to me,
she didn't look any different really.
Speaker 2 (01:23:28):
I mean, it's.
Speaker 3 (01:23:28):
Only because she told me that she'd had it removed
that I really noticed it, because, you know, I said,
I've known her for a long long time, a long
long time, and it's weird because I remember.
Speaker 4 (01:23:46):
Her because there was like four years between her and
her oldest brother, she'd her oldest her oldest brother's friends
would come around, and I remember her saying, oh, can
I come with you? Because they'd all go out, and
she said, no, go away, because I didn't want this
little girl coming around. He didn't want her pestuing them.
(01:24:10):
And the other his friends would say go away, go away.
They didn't want a pest in them. And then when
she was about fifteen sixteen, they didn't seem to mind
her hanging around anymore. And I remember when I think
(01:24:30):
she's about seventeen or eighteen, and there was literally a
cue of men or boys.
Speaker 1 (01:24:41):
Trying to win her heart. It was seriously like knocking
on the door and following her around like little puppies.
Speaker 3 (01:24:51):
It was very funny and that booster of confidence. I mean,
that would have been happening anyway.
Speaker 2 (01:25:03):
But I guess the.
Speaker 1 (01:25:08):
That personality change just from having one.
Speaker 3 (01:25:16):
Like Mark removed. One thing changed which made her feel different.
And there's a whole book called Cybernetics. Cybernetics, it's a
very famous book about a plastic surgeon, and he's written
(01:25:37):
by a plastic surgeon and he noticed that the personality
changes in people that had work done and how.
Speaker 2 (01:25:46):
It was he couldn't believe the transformation.
Speaker 3 (01:25:54):
It could have not on someone's appearance, because that wouldn't
surprise him, because that's what he did for that. He
was surprised at the transformation and personality.
Speaker 1 (01:26:06):
And he wrote a whole book about it, Cybernetics, and
I usued to have it. I've read it a few times,
and it's quite a big book in the self help
like literature library thing. It's cybernetics, cyber cybernetics.
Speaker 2 (01:26:23):
Something like that. Yeah, it's a good book.
Speaker 1 (01:26:29):
It's very interesting. I mean, it kind of makes sense,
but at the same time, it's.
Speaker 2 (01:26:34):
Like, really, maybe maybe that's why I should have done.
Speaker 4 (01:26:45):
Maybe if I had a bit of surgery, I could
increase my confidence, have it shortened or something. You know,
it's just too big and I don't know, just to
have my nose. Yeah, but I don't know.
Speaker 2 (01:27:04):
Maybe I don't know what i'd have.
Speaker 4 (01:27:13):
There's a few things I could probably do. In fact,
I'm pretty sure if I went to a plastic surgeon
and said, just list all the things that I need doing,
we'd be there for a while. You'd have to cancel
(01:27:36):
all his clients for about a week, just so he
could list off all the things.
Speaker 3 (01:27:40):
That I needed to do in probably but I won't
be having anything. I don't think i'll have anything done
in the future. I don't know.
Speaker 1 (01:28:00):
I could have done in the past if I wanted to,
didn't really, I guess the way I see it is.
Speaker 2 (01:28:08):
Take me for what I am, take me for how
I am.
Speaker 3 (01:28:14):
And I'm not going to wear, you know, tall shoes
to make myself look taller. I'm not going to dye
my hair to pretend that I'm not going gray. I'm
not going to.
Speaker 4 (01:28:31):
Get a hair transplant in my bald spots.
Speaker 3 (01:28:36):
Not there's anything wrong with doing any of those things,
but I'm just not going to do any of that stuff.
And I'm not going to pretend I'm a different age.
Things I can.
Speaker 2 (01:28:49):
Do, I suppose practical logical things.
Speaker 3 (01:28:56):
Is take better care of myself, eat a better diet,
exercise bare Yeah, those kinds of things. Basic stuff, really,
isn't it. But I found that one way it's shortcut
(01:29:21):
with dieting. Wear bigger clothes.
Speaker 4 (01:29:26):
Seriously, if you wear bigger tops, really like large tops,
extra extra extra large, almost.
Speaker 2 (01:29:33):
Looks like you've lost weight. It works. I do it.
Speaker 3 (01:29:37):
I literally do that now. Although some of my tops
are just a bit bagger because I have actually lost weight,
not recently, but last year I did. I lost the
stone and I haven't put it back on because I
stopped having sugar in my tea and.
Speaker 2 (01:29:57):
I cut down. I stopped having I didn't don't drink
hope anymore.
Speaker 3 (01:30:01):
And I have minimum minimum amount chocolate.
Speaker 2 (01:30:07):
I used to eat chocolate every single day.
Speaker 12 (01:30:11):
So yeah, and that I do believe laddies and gentlemen.
Speaker 2 (01:30:24):
Is the end of this recording.
Speaker 8 (01:30:29):
Me me, me, me me.
Speaker 2 (01:30:32):
So thank you for listening.
Speaker 1 (01:30:34):
Remember to be kind to yourself, because you do deserve
to be happy and be gentle with yourself. You deserve
to feel safe, lots of love.
Speaker 2 (01:30:51):
Bye.
Speaker 3 (01:30:59):
Relax in a more deep and meaningful way, maybe in
a way that can not just allow you to feel
(01:31:20):
calmer now and throughout the time we spend together here,
not just relaxed at the end of the recording when
it's finished and you can enjoy that sense of comfort
(01:31:44):
and peace, But also I think it would be nice
to have those feelings of.
Speaker 1 (01:32:08):
Relaxation continue for longer after the recording has ended, so
that you can still benefit from listening to my voice.
(01:32:38):
Maybe in a few hours time perhaps tomorrow, and then
by listening regularly, especially if you find like some people
do and myself as well, sometimes I find one particular
(01:33:02):
recording that really resonates with me, and I just listen
to it over and over again every morning, every evening.
(01:33:25):
There was this recording from We're going back to about
nineteen ninety nine. It wasn't hypnosis, but it was a
guided visualizations. It kind of was hypnosis, really, and I
managed to find it again and it still has the
(01:33:48):
same effect on me. And part of it was the
person's voice.
Speaker 2 (01:34:01):
Relaxed me.
Speaker 4 (01:34:06):
She just felt so peaceful, and I'd look forward to
listening to her in the morning and in the evening.
Speaker 3 (01:34:25):
And I knew before even pressing the play button, as
since I've done that, pressed the play button.
Speaker 2 (01:34:39):
This was in the days of.
Speaker 3 (01:34:45):
CD players pressed the play button. In fact, it might
have even been a tape tape recorder. I'd lie down
on the bed and then even without necessarily listening to
(01:35:11):
her words because I had them memorized. Really, it was
as if my body knew exactly what to do, and
(01:35:35):
the muscles just almost went into automatic relaxation, and I
(01:35:57):
remember my mind would slow down. Now now I was
listening to this recording in the early days of learning hypnosis,
(01:36:21):
and long before I ever made any videos or audio
recordings myself, because I didn't start doing that till two
thousand and six, I knew, I knew how helpful I
(01:36:53):
found being able to just let go, to have that
trust in the person that I'm listening to, knowing that
(01:37:17):
it's going to be just as relaxing, if not more so.
Each time you hear my voice, you may feel the same.
(01:37:41):
Some people.
Speaker 2 (01:37:44):
Have been listening to me for over a decade.
Speaker 3 (01:37:56):
Maybe not solidly, obviously, not only four hours a day.
Maybe people come back, some people maybe listen every day.
(01:38:20):
There's something that I do which you may not realize
by listening, is.
Speaker 2 (01:38:38):
When I record.
Speaker 1 (01:38:43):
These recordings. Now, for example, I also am affected by
the words VICE say. So, if I set.
Speaker 3 (01:39:09):
To you focus on your feet, notice your feet relaxing.
I will be focusing on my feet. I will be
noticing my feet relaxing. If I said, focus on your hands,
(01:39:48):
and maybe notice the difference between each hand, perhaps noticed
the air in the room, a temperature of the room.
On the backs of your hands, you may start to
(01:40:17):
notice what almost feels like a very light breeze, even
though there may not be any type of breeze at
all where you are right now. And as you become
(01:40:43):
aware of your hands, I'm also aware of how relaxed
my hands our feeling now and when it comes to
(01:41:23):
potentially drifting off to sleep, which may be the reason
you're listening, I also feel drowsy when I make these recordings.
(01:41:50):
I also notice.
Speaker 2 (01:41:54):
My mind.
Speaker 3 (01:41:56):
Drifting. In fact, at times I've actually fallen asleep without
(01:42:16):
even noticing, and then I carry on talking. It's only
when I listen back to do the editing I hear
(01:42:40):
snoring and I think, I don't remember snoring. I remember talking.
There's snoring. Was a pick turned up. That's why I
sound like when I snore. How I get.
Speaker 2 (01:43:07):
Really into a whole experience.
Speaker 3 (01:43:20):
I don't know how you feel. How relaxed do you
feel in your feet, how relaxed you feel in your hands.
(01:43:55):
I have noticed more and more that the more relaxed,
deeper level of comfort you feel, the easier your breathing becomes.
(01:44:31):
It's almost like that additional muscle relaxation. So this allows
you to breathe easier without necessarily focusing on your breath. However,
(01:45:19):
being able to notice the ease.
Speaker 2 (01:45:39):
In which.
Speaker 3 (01:45:47):
You breathe so naturally, You breathe so very easily and smoothly.
(01:46:38):
Whenever I imagine my breathing improving. When I've got my
eyes closed, I tend to visualize a beautiful field with
(01:47:15):
trees and flowers producing all that life giving oxygen. And
(01:47:48):
it feels nice too, if nothing else, h just taking
some time away from everything, enjoying that feeling of peace
(01:48:46):
serenity with a joyful heart. Time seems to just drip
(01:49:31):
by so very slowly, relaxed, so deeply, peaceful, completely unattached
(01:50:25):
to any thoughts whatsoever in this moment, completely free, noticing that.
Speaker 2 (01:51:31):
Your mind.
Speaker 3 (01:51:40):
Slowed down, slowed down because nothing really requires your attention.
(01:52:36):
You can enjoy the physical sensations of allowing the stress
to dip out of your body, to appear out of
(01:53:02):
every part of your body, and being released from your
(01:53:31):
brain change your mind slowly but surely. The muscles in
(01:54:12):
your legs relax ras res so very deep, thing reas
(01:55:03):
so deeply, and the feelings, the pleasant feelings in your
(01:55:29):
arms and shoulders deepening each part of your body further
(01:55:59):
mhmm and deeper and deeper noticine. The feelings in the
(01:56:35):
back of your neck, I feel ends in your wrists, muscles,
(01:57:37):
in the front of your body, I will.
Speaker 2 (01:57:50):
Say, feeling.
Speaker 3 (01:58:05):
Peaceful, deeping. There's a sense of peace spreads through.
Speaker 2 (01:58:40):
Your very cool.
Speaker 3 (01:59:12):
Even when you focus on your mind, her mind becomes
(01:59:39):
be and slowerven deep relaxing, a very slow your stomach.
(02:01:16):
Peace fell in your stomach, held back. Notice. Notice how
(02:01:59):
relaxed you now feel.
Speaker 2 (02:02:15):
In the hole of your back. A spy.
Speaker 3 (02:02:47):
From your brain all the way down the middle of
your back, sending and receiving HM, millions of messages every day, deepcomfort,
(02:03:19):
increasing deeply relaxed, your knees, relax spreading those signals down
(02:04:35):
your spine or cord.
Speaker 2 (02:04:41):
Into air.
Speaker 3 (02:04:42):
Every part of your body sh ends in your calf, muscles,
(02:05:29):
your outbows. Feelings of peace and tranquility spreading through your
(02:05:58):
body m HM. Tips of your toes, to your eyes,
your fingers, all the way till you'll lower back, letting
(02:06:34):
her reating pace, drifting.
Speaker 2 (02:07:29):
Mind.
Speaker 3 (02:07:34):
Just wander in a way, happy to let go, let
go completely, Leckr said, tranquil, whole body enjoying a sensor listinger, Hey,
(02:09:29):
nore ey, enjoy the space, this space of peace and safety,
(02:11:54):
sur ery, letting go. Maybe we can just focus on
(02:13:58):
the different parts of your body, just to notice your
(02:14:32):
forehead and your eyes mutual, so loose, noticing in the
(02:15:35):
sense of complete freedom, absolute freedom, day, pace for energy,
(02:17:43):
pace to breathe so much easier les you may you
(02:18:59):
may not if at tist your mind drifting peaceful ma
(02:19:59):
anyven more deeply.
Speaker 2 (02:20:06):
In the direction of.
Speaker 3 (02:20:13):
Total blissful pace, blissphul pace directed to pace, he said, Colm.
Speaker 8 (02:22:27):
Let him go, peace.
Speaker 3 (02:22:54):
Of mind, relaxed body, cy rex.
Speaker 8 (02:23:37):
C relaxed.
Speaker 3 (02:24:03):
Her body feels almost invisible, so very relaxed.
Speaker 2 (02:24:29):
And peaceful.
Speaker 8 (02:24:36):
So pace m r.
Speaker 13 (02:25:08):
Le s'sor fair.
Speaker 3 (02:25:44):
And you could start to notice that you are feeling
more relaxed, even.
Speaker 2 (02:25:55):
Though I've not.
Speaker 3 (02:25:58):
Purposely focused your mind upon that sense of physical comfort
that is growing within you throughout your body, and your mind.
Speaker 2 (02:26:18):
Starts to slow down.
Speaker 1 (02:26:25):
And that could be almost in recognition of I guess
my speech not being particularly fast, and things just generally
(02:26:46):
feel calmer. Just by listening to my voice, you give
yourself an opportunity to take a break from the day,
(02:27:06):
take a break from your life as it is, and
to give yourself a rest, giving yourself permission to take
some time off and to allow your body to relax
(02:27:29):
and allow your mind to slow down, which in turn
releases the tension any stresses that you had in your body.
(02:27:51):
It's almost as if the parts of your body just
open up, allowing the negativity and at the same time
replacing that negativity with positive healing energy, which then fills
(02:28:19):
your body up and your mind to.
Speaker 2 (02:28:24):
Also starts to.
Speaker 3 (02:28:31):
Appreciate those feelings of increasing confidence and almost uplifting feeling
positive healing, an energy that spreads through your body like
(02:29:02):
a wave of comfort. And all this comes from just
allowing yourself a few minutes, maybe half an hour, however
(02:29:25):
long you want it to be, just rest.
Speaker 2 (02:29:34):
And allow.
Speaker 1 (02:29:37):
Your mind and your body to almost reset itself to
the settings of comfort and relaxation, calmness, which allows more
(02:30:04):
room for feelings of pleasure.
Speaker 2 (02:30:11):
And happiness.
Speaker 3 (02:30:16):
To move around your body and into your mind, almost
as if your mind and your body are sinking together,
almost mirroring each other with that growing positivity and calmness.
Speaker 2 (02:30:49):
And it feels.
Speaker 3 (02:30:50):
Nice, really does feel nice to know that you are
the one that has allowed yourself to feel more comfort
(02:31:12):
and to experience.
Speaker 2 (02:31:16):
More of this.
Speaker 1 (02:31:19):
Deep relaxation spreading throughout your body, and as I focus
on each part of your body, you can notice that.
Speaker 2 (02:31:42):
That part.
Speaker 1 (02:31:47):
Becomes even more relaxed just by focusing on its even
more calm and comfortable.
Speaker 2 (02:32:07):
Just by focusing.
Speaker 3 (02:32:13):
And as I move down your body, starting at your head,
the parts that you have already focused on will continue
to relax deeply, and those parts that have not yet
(02:32:35):
focused on or just automatically release any remain intention in
anticipation of even more comfort about to come. Now, I'm
(02:33:03):
going to start by focusing on your forehead. Just being
aware of the feelings of your forehead and any background
sounds like mister Herbert Opigeon can just allow you to
(02:33:25):
feel even more relaxed. Just means you in the moment,
this isn't this isn't a sterile environment.
Speaker 2 (02:33:40):
This is the world.
Speaker 3 (02:33:45):
I live in the countryside, so there's lots of nature
sounds around. So as you focus on your forehead, just
notice how it becomes even more relaxed as you focus
(02:34:12):
only on my voice and that part of your body.
Moving down to your eyes, focusing on your eyes, noticing
(02:34:32):
how your eyelids feel so heavy yet so light at
the same time, and all the muscles around your eyes relaxing.
Speaker 2 (02:34:51):
Completely. Moving your focus.
Speaker 3 (02:35:00):
Down to your mouth, your lips, your tongue, your teeth,
You comes the whole of your mouth, relaxing, calm and glease.
(02:35:24):
As you focus now on your jaw, just the parts
of your jaw near your mouth and your chin, but
all the way up the size of your face to
your ears, the hole of your jaw, feeding more relaxed.
Speaker 8 (02:36:00):
Calm.
Speaker 3 (02:36:08):
Focusing on your neck, the front of your neck and
your throat relaxing and loose and calm. The sides of
(02:36:30):
your neck, right and left side.
Speaker 2 (02:36:35):
Of your neck.
Speaker 3 (02:36:39):
Relax and lease and calm. And now the back of
your neck, focusing on the back of your neck, letting
(02:37:08):
go of any tension that may have been there before,
and enjoying that sense of increasing comfort and release that
(02:37:28):
you can experience in the back of your neck. Moving
down your back and moving either side of your spine
right from the top of your back all the way
(02:37:52):
down to the bottom of your back, down to your
lower back.
Speaker 1 (02:38:10):
As you move up and down your spine, you can
feel the muscles either side of your spine relaxing even more,
(02:38:33):
and as those muscles relax, that sense of comfort starts
to spread outwards from your spine into both sides of
your back, the top of your back, the middle, and
(02:38:58):
your lower back.
Speaker 2 (02:39:02):
And as you scan gently and slowly.
Speaker 3 (02:39:08):
Up and down your back, there's the muscles in the
top of your back relax and become looser. The muscles
in the middle of your back also seem to just
(02:39:30):
almost divide from each other, separating and almost melting. And
in your lower back there seems to be an extra
(02:39:51):
special feeling of comfort. The spreads into your hips. Sit
down your lower back, into your hips, into the area
(02:40:15):
where your cosix are, and into your.
Speaker 1 (02:40:21):
Buttocks, and all these muscles that spread bring your lower
back into your hip area.
Speaker 3 (02:40:37):
Start to melt, start to reading, let go, and you
know where about to focus on your shoulders. Your back
(02:41:01):
and your spine will continue to let go, continue to
relax so calmly, and then she focus on your shoulders. You
(02:41:28):
may notice they're already feeling really loose, They're.
Speaker 4 (02:41:44):
Already feeding, calm.
Speaker 8 (02:42:00):
And fear.
Speaker 3 (02:42:05):
Those muscles then move from your neck into your shoulders.
Feel so soft and gentle, so smooth.
Speaker 8 (02:42:37):
And calm, and.
Speaker 3 (02:42:50):
The feeling in your shoulders scene to spread deep into
your shoulders a sense of relaxation, not just traveling deeply
(02:43:13):
into your muscles, but also relaxing with the bones and
moving all the way to underneath your arms, relaxing a
(02:43:39):
whole area between the tops of your shoulders and underneath
your arms healing.
Speaker 8 (02:43:55):
You feel so.
Speaker 3 (02:43:57):
Relaxed and comfortable in your shoulders, which sense that's deep
healing message into your arms.
Speaker 2 (02:44:30):
You may feel.
Speaker 3 (02:44:33):
Almost as if your arms are not even there, because
they're so relaxed, so.
Speaker 4 (02:44:45):
Deeply relaxed, so calm.
Speaker 8 (02:45:14):
So.
Speaker 3 (02:45:21):
Loose, that feeling spreading all the way.
Speaker 4 (02:45:35):
Down your arms, two elbows, including.
Speaker 3 (02:45:47):
Your elbows, circumforts spread.
Speaker 8 (02:46:04):
Or away.
Speaker 2 (02:46:08):
Into rests, your forearmens nder.
Speaker 8 (02:46:14):
Wrists so heavy, yet at.
Speaker 2 (02:46:27):
The same time sunlight and gentle.
Speaker 3 (02:47:07):
Frey sent now on your hands, your hands so peaceful
(02:47:48):
in your hands, the sense.
Speaker 8 (02:48:08):
Of real pace.
Speaker 3 (02:48:25):
It just seems to feel so familiar when your hands
relax deeply.
Speaker 11 (02:48:51):
Else things.
Speaker 14 (02:49:42):
Things you think it tips, moving, attention, let front to
(02:50:50):
your body.
Speaker 15 (02:51:03):
Sure counc manue, focuss.
Speaker 2 (02:52:39):
Love my souls and your fives and niece.
Speaker 3 (02:53:05):
I relaxed a calf muscles just shins a puzzie.
Speaker 8 (02:54:01):
It mus.
Speaker 2 (02:55:42):
When the feathing a new Saints so pace on.
Speaker 3 (02:55:56):
Cycl' sait peaceful sircom sir peaceful.
Speaker 2 (02:56:47):
Sycom so.
Speaker 8 (02:56:54):
Peace for.
Speaker 2 (02:57:04):
RelA same.
Speaker 3 (02:57:11):
Peace fall calm, love, that deep relaxation to spread your
(02:57:31):
chest story.
Speaker 2 (02:57:37):
So relax, let me go everything.
Speaker 1 (02:58:03):
So I'm going to start counting down now from twenty
down to one. You can imagine in a way it's
like just walking down some steps and each step or
(02:58:23):
twenty steps, and each step represents a level of comfort.
Each step represents.
Speaker 3 (02:58:38):
A deepening.
Speaker 1 (02:58:40):
Of that comfort, and the furvies you walk down those steps,
the deeper and more relaxed you feel. So starting with
(02:59:04):
number twenty.
Speaker 3 (02:59:17):
Twenty, nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteenhhhhhhhhh.
Speaker 2 (03:02:53):
Three four fi too well.
Speaker 16 (03:06:35):
Usutus ussissi.
Speaker 8 (03:09:37):
Basis eight.
Speaker 3 (03:11:02):
Shhhh six.
Speaker 2 (03:13:55):
Five sis.
Speaker 10 (03:15:03):
Us no.
Speaker 3 (03:19:47):
As you focus on your eyes, I gonna count down
from ten down to one, focusing just on your eyes,
(03:20:15):
your eyelids, the muscles around your eyes, your eye walls themselves,
a whole area.
Speaker 2 (03:20:29):
That makes up your eye.
Speaker 3 (03:20:42):
And as we count down from ten down to one,
whilst focus in on your eyes, your becose twice is
(03:21:03):
relaxed with each number counting down that you may find.
Speaker 2 (03:21:19):
The all you want to do is just.
Speaker 3 (03:21:23):
Drift off to sleep. And if that's what you want,
then just allow yourself to do that. Now, focusing on
(03:21:47):
your eyes, I'm going to begin counting down.
Speaker 2 (03:21:53):
From ten down to one right now, nine.
Speaker 3 (03:23:10):
Eight seven.
Speaker 17 (03:26:07):
Free most.
Speaker 8 (03:30:28):
Us one.
Speaker 3 (03:31:13):
So counting down from ten to one.
Speaker 8 (03:31:25):
Ten nine.
Speaker 2 (03:31:29):
Eight seven six five four three two one.
Speaker 3 (03:31:56):
And maybe that was a bit too quick in order
to relax. Maybe it's a bit too fast for you
to notice the calming of your body, maybe even a
little bit of pressure there, like you're counting down from
(03:32:17):
ten to one.
Speaker 2 (03:32:18):
Would you expect me to do?
Speaker 4 (03:32:20):
Man, expect me just to go with floppy just because
you're counting down. You can try it again, but this
time I'll go a bit slower this time, as you
focus on the whole of your body before we focus
(03:32:45):
on your legs.
Speaker 2 (03:32:48):
Just notice.
Speaker 3 (03:32:50):
How your body does start to feel more relaxed with
every number that I count down ten nine eight seven
(03:33:38):
six five four three.
Speaker 2 (03:34:19):
Two one. I just notice how.
Speaker 3 (03:34:55):
How you feel, generally, how your body feels. It's not
necessarily even about counting down from ten to one. It's
(03:35:16):
that space that you have, that space between being active
physically or mentally to just.
Speaker 2 (03:35:43):
Sitting or lying down just being there, not doing.
Speaker 4 (03:35:48):
Anything, not saying anything, or needing to think about anything.
Speaker 3 (03:35:55):
So it opens up a space, you know, a bit
of a space, a gap. And the more I came
down from ten to one, the bigger that gap becomes.
(03:36:17):
So there's that gap of calmness, of comfort, relaxation.
Speaker 2 (03:36:29):
It's a nice feeling, and it moves.
Speaker 3 (03:36:38):
Those stresses or discomforts physically or emotionally, moves them.
Speaker 2 (03:36:48):
Away, allows you.
Speaker 8 (03:36:59):
To just.
Speaker 2 (03:37:02):
Slow down.
Speaker 3 (03:37:07):
So I'm going to count again from ten down to
one and notice that gap widening, the gap, And as
it widens, it's almost like the stress and attention.
Speaker 2 (03:37:25):
Falls into the gap and gives you that distance, that space.
Speaker 8 (03:37:46):
Now ten.
Speaker 3 (03:37:56):
Nine eight, seven, six, five, four.
Speaker 2 (03:39:05):
Three two.
Speaker 8 (03:39:41):
One.
Speaker 3 (03:39:52):
Now, how did you work? Body feel.
Speaker 8 (03:39:59):
Now?
Speaker 3 (03:40:12):
Can you notice that the feeling calmer, the feeling.
Speaker 2 (03:40:27):
More relaxed.
Speaker 3 (03:40:50):
As we now focus on your legs, just your legs.
(03:41:11):
We're just gonna start with focusing on your thighs. Of course,
(03:41:31):
it's not the most exciting thing to be doing, because.
Speaker 1 (03:41:39):
I'm sure like most of your body is not a
lot going on right now. Just focusing on the whole
of your thighs, the tops of your thigh, the sides
(03:42:01):
of your thighs, the bottoms of your thighs, your outer thighs,
and your inner thighs, basically the whole of your thigh
that leads into your hip.
Speaker 2 (03:42:20):
And it goes down to your knee joint.
Speaker 3 (03:42:30):
Now, this is a big area, it's a very heavy area.
Speaker 1 (03:42:38):
It's very strong, probably the strongest muscles in your body.
Speaker 3 (03:42:45):
Or in your thighs.
Speaker 2 (03:42:56):
But I don't think we.
Speaker 4 (03:42:59):
Perhaps give enough attention to our thighs. Perhaps we don't
acknowledge how important our thighs are to our lives, how
(03:43:34):
much they actually do for us all through our lives.
And it may seem to sound really weird, but.
Speaker 2 (03:43:55):
I think that all of.
Speaker 3 (03:43:57):
Our body parts, especially our thighs, need some TLC, a
bit of love shown, a bit of acknowledgement, thank you,
(03:44:24):
gratitude for our thighs do for us. And I know
this may sound a bit strange. Maybe you think, why
am I? Surely I should be out in the garden
(03:44:46):
hugging a tree or something. Well, it's hard to set
a microphone up on a tree. That's why I'm doing
this indoors. Otherwise I would be outside her in the tree.
I can't see the television.
Speaker 2 (03:45:03):
From the tree.
Speaker 4 (03:45:10):
If you move down to your knees, were gaining such
an important part, And I think we don't necessarily.
Speaker 3 (03:45:23):
I want to speak for myself. I don't necessarily appreciate
all that my needs do for me until I have
a problem with my knee. It's occasionally, if I ever,
maybe i'll bash it, or it's aching for some reason.
(03:45:47):
It's then that I realize how much it does. You know,
the benefit of being able to use my legs without
any kind of physical discomfort.
Speaker 2 (03:46:04):
Is a beautiful thing.
Speaker 3 (03:46:08):
That's possibly not appreciated until it's temporarily removed. You know
that's comfort.
Speaker 4 (03:46:21):
But as you focus on your knees, regardless of how
your knees feel, you can have that sense of gratitude.
Speaker 2 (03:46:34):
And love to your knees for all that they do
for you.
Speaker 3 (03:46:48):
And you can still have that attention on your thighs
and maybe notice how your thighs feel. Maybe you've noticed
that they are are relaxing more deeply as you focus
(03:47:15):
now on the bottoms of your legs, your shins and
your calf muscles and the bones between your knees and
your feet, incorporating of course your ankles.
Speaker 2 (03:47:34):
So important.
Speaker 3 (03:47:40):
You know, anyone that's had even like the slightest sprain
of an ankle knows how how much we take our
ankles for granted. And kind of strange in a way
(03:48:01):
when you think that, you know, logically our wrists are
a lot thinner than the rest of our arms, which
is okay, it doesn't you can't see any problem with
that because we're just picking stuff up by our ankles
(03:48:21):
so much thinner than the rest of our legs, and
from a physics perspective or logical.
Speaker 4 (03:48:35):
Even it doesn't really make sense that all this weight
would ultimately be resting on your ankles then leading to
your feet that thin area, thin bone. Yeah, it does
(03:49:01):
so much great work. Supports us, supports our body for
a lifetime, helps us to balance, It helps you to
(03:49:22):
get around and be mobile. And there's the calf muscles.
Of course, when I was younger, I couldn't see the
point in calf muscles didn't seem to do anything. Okay,
(03:49:45):
if I walked around on tiptoes, then my calf muscles
get some work, But of course that's not true. The
calf muscles are being used whenever we use our legs,
and your shins.
Speaker 3 (03:50:07):
There to protect your lower legs shaped in a way
almost as a protector for the bone, leading of course
(03:50:30):
to your ankles.
Speaker 2 (03:50:34):
And your feet.
Speaker 3 (03:50:40):
But we're not going to focus on your feet. We're
just going to focus on the legs. I realize, and
now that I've mentioned your feet, you'll probably focusing on
them anyway, So maybe I should focus on your feet.
Speaker 4 (03:50:55):
A little bit. You can have them in your awareness
the same as you have your thighs in your awareness.
Speaker 2 (03:51:08):
Even though we haven't.
Speaker 1 (03:51:09):
Been focusing on your thighs for a few minutes and
been focusing on your ankles, there's still that sensation of
comfort in your thighs, and there's that movement.
Speaker 2 (03:51:41):
Of energy.
Speaker 3 (03:51:44):
Because the thighs hold lots of different sensations. Of course,
there's the muscles, the big strong muscles that we have
in our thighs, but the skin on the outside of
(03:52:09):
the thighs, as in the outside of all of our body,
can be very sensitive, sensitive to the touch, sensitive to temperature,
(03:52:34):
and inside your thighs the bones, there's the muscle.
Speaker 4 (03:52:41):
There's the blood, vessels, the ar trees to all this
stuff inside your thighs. And I guess sometimes it'd be
nice if you could actually put your fingers inside your
thighs and a message, so you can message on the outside,
(03:53:06):
of course, but to be able to get deep into
the muscles and to be able to just message inside
your thighs, message in the bones of your leg.
Speaker 3 (03:53:20):
Massage in or the veins, just gently healing your thighs
and you can move down message and inside your knees.
(03:53:40):
Just message in those bones, but with healing.
Speaker 4 (03:53:44):
Fingertips, spreading that healing energy deep into the choice of
your knees.
Speaker 3 (03:53:58):
Of course, there's the back okay, your knee, you know,
the inside crease where your knee is. It's a very
sensitive area. Very it feels very nice when you stroke it.
That might be because it's an area that's not really
(03:54:19):
touched very often. It's almost like a hidden part, that crease.
Speaker 2 (03:54:28):
In your legs. It's almost like a part that.
Speaker 3 (03:54:35):
Has a sensitivity which is a little bit different. Of course,
it's protected by your legs. So you can imagine putting
(03:54:57):
your fingers into that crease your legs fold in between
your legs. You can just message with your fingertips. Imagine
your fingertips going inside message in the muscle tissue. You
(03:55:24):
can cause fielder the bones.
Speaker 4 (03:55:27):
Of your knees, heading through your fingertips, and then if
you go down.
Speaker 3 (03:55:43):
To your calf muscles, and that's the part I'd like
to be able to really put my fingertips deep inside
my calf muscles, the message in every single tissue of
the muscle.
Speaker 8 (03:56:02):
Healing every part.
Speaker 1 (03:56:10):
And then doing the same for my shins, massaging and
generally stroking the bones, generally stroking them, healing in a
loving way, because they deserve to be treated as the
(03:56:31):
precious bones that they are. Because our legs are so
precious as in all the other parts of our body,
the more precious at any chul.
Speaker 3 (03:56:46):
On the planet. When you start to.
Speaker 2 (03:56:57):
Think about your legs in this way, it.
Speaker 3 (03:57:08):
Can change your perspective.
Speaker 2 (03:57:13):
It might sound a bit.
Speaker 3 (03:57:17):
A bit silly to start with the idea of having
love for your legs, showing appreciation for your thighs, wanting
to be able to put your hands in your thighs,
(03:57:39):
massage the muscles and the bones, and to get your
fingers deep in there and releasing all tension, just to.
Speaker 4 (03:57:53):
Show how much you care about your legs, how much
you care for what your legs do for you regularly,
your knees.
Speaker 3 (03:58:12):
Your calves, your ankles. The strength of your ankles, considering
how thin they are compared to the rest of your legs,
especially your thighs. Yeah, they're so strong, so flexible, absolutely
(03:58:44):
amazing things. Your ankles are truly a gift.
Speaker 4 (03:58:55):
Because of what they do for you, supporting all that weight.
Regardless of how what weight you are, even if you
only eat ate stone, there's still a lot of weight
(03:59:16):
for these little ankles. Now I'm a lot heavier than
eight stone.
Speaker 2 (03:59:24):
Double down.
Speaker 3 (03:59:28):
Get my ankles support my body all the time. Whether
they do give off a sigh of relief when I
sit down, that's my whole.
Speaker 2 (03:59:45):
Legs to.
Speaker 3 (03:59:49):
My feet feel also go my toes clap so happy.
(04:00:16):
Your legs really are amazing. And I know that talking
about talking about your legs is probably.
Speaker 4 (04:00:31):
Possibly among the most most boring things I've ever heard
anyone say.
Speaker 3 (04:00:37):
Possibly you're boring or not. Everything I said is true.
Your legs are amazing. Your legs is not just respect.
(04:01:08):
They deserve to relax.
Speaker 2 (04:01:11):
Deeply.
Speaker 3 (04:01:19):
They deserve to take some time out of the day.
Speaker 2 (04:01:24):
To just let go completely relax.
Speaker 3 (04:01:50):
I really can relax. And because the legs are so
such a most you know, very important part of your body.
When you relaction your legs, the rest of your body
(04:02:13):
also naturally follows in that journey of comfort, Like I
feel it in my hips. My hips feel really loose,
(04:02:40):
and also my lower back as well. My lower back
really feels it feels stretched, even though I'm just sitting
in a chair and there's no stretching as far as
I'm aware that I'm doing. But it's almost as if
the lessels are just relaxed so much that there is
(04:03:03):
a natural stretch.
Speaker 2 (04:03:06):
As the tension has reduced.
Speaker 8 (04:03:11):
A lot.
Speaker 3 (04:03:28):
And I'm now going to count down from ten down
to one, and you.
Speaker 2 (04:03:36):
Can continue to feel wonderfully relaxed.
Speaker 8 (04:03:46):
Ten nine.
Speaker 3 (04:03:54):
Eight, seven, six, five, four.
Speaker 2 (04:04:14):
Three two one relax.
Speaker 3 (04:04:37):
So I'm just going to count down for five down
to one, and as a countdown, if you just focus
on the numbers, just the numbers counting down, and notice
how you feel.
Speaker 2 (04:04:59):
In this moment as you hear the numbers counting down,
knowing that those numbers.
Speaker 3 (04:05:10):
Counting down represent you feeling calmer, not just in your body,
but also relaxing your mind.
Speaker 2 (04:05:27):
Just notice how you feel.
Speaker 4 (04:05:30):
There's nothing to do, there's nothing to say, there's nothing
to think about.
Speaker 2 (04:05:39):
Starting with number five.
Speaker 3 (04:05:52):
Four three.
Speaker 2 (04:06:12):
Two one. Now, as you.
Speaker 3 (04:06:29):
Notice the gradual.
Speaker 2 (04:06:37):
Letting go.
Speaker 1 (04:06:40):
Of the tension in your body, you may also begin
to notice and be aware of how your mind is
starting to slow down. This is just a natural thing
(04:07:02):
that happens.
Speaker 3 (04:07:06):
It's not really a special procedure. It's just natural because
as your body relaxes, your mind also starts to relax.
And the more your mind relaxes, the more your body relaxes.
It's just a continuous circle of relaxation. And is that
(04:07:34):
calmness that comes from relative quietness. You know, even even
if this background sounds either your side or mind, it's
still going to be quite calm. You know, you haven't
(04:07:54):
got the television on, there's no music in the background,
unless you're listening to the recording with music. Of course,
you're very likely not going to be sitting in a
room with other people. Of course you might be, but
generally it's more ideal if you can do this on
(04:08:17):
your own, so no distractions, and when you stop thinking
about stuff, relaxation automatically rises. A sense of comfort starts
(04:08:46):
to grow, and.
Speaker 1 (04:08:53):
Without trying to build it up into something fantastical or
something magical, this is just a natural process, something.
Speaker 2 (04:09:10):
That's easy to accomplish. In fact, it's.
Speaker 3 (04:09:18):
Almost you know, the sense of relaxing completely happens really
when you put no effort into it. It's not something
that you can really force. It's something that happens naturally.
(04:09:41):
And part of the process of this recording and others
is simply two allow you to take advantage of this space.
Speaker 2 (04:10:04):
This time, to just.
Speaker 3 (04:10:13):
Let go, to just be here, to be in tune
with how you feel, yet with the intention of wanting
(04:10:36):
to relax deeply and maybe even to fall asleep, depending
on what it is that you wish for yourself in
this moment. As we know, relaxing is the majority of
(04:11:11):
the process of falling asleep. The actual falling asleep part
is the tiny bit at the end. The deeper relaxed
you become, the easier.
Speaker 2 (04:11:33):
You find.
Speaker 1 (04:11:35):
Yourself drifting. But you can also if you choose stay
focused on my voice and really enjoy the process of
(04:12:09):
gradually relaxing each muscle.
Speaker 2 (04:12:27):
In your body.
Speaker 3 (04:12:32):
Effortlessly and just observing the sensation.
Speaker 8 (04:12:53):
Of letting go.
Speaker 2 (04:13:01):
Completely.
Speaker 4 (04:13:08):
This time, I'm going to count from six down to one,
and you can notice your mind.
Speaker 3 (04:13:22):
Calming down more with each number.
Speaker 11 (04:13:29):
That you hear.
Speaker 3 (04:13:30):
Me say.
Speaker 2 (04:13:35):
Naturally feeling.
Speaker 8 (04:13:39):
Calm and slow.
Speaker 2 (04:13:45):
And peaceful.
Speaker 3 (04:13:52):
Sex fivehhhhhhhhhhh, four three two.
Speaker 2 (04:16:18):
One, being aware of how your mind to slowed right down, sinking.
Speaker 3 (04:16:55):
Deeply into real life session. And as you focus on
your mind, you may notice that there are some thoughts
(04:17:25):
still there, maybe some stubborn thoughts that.
Speaker 2 (04:17:33):
For some reason perhaps need your attention. That's what you
can do is.
Speaker 3 (04:17:53):
Send love to those thoughts. Sprinkle those thoughts.
Speaker 8 (04:18:05):
With love.
Speaker 3 (04:18:07):
Like little petals from a flower. Just sprinkle it over them,
petals filled with love towards those thoughts, to let those
thoughts know that you're not abandoned in them.
Speaker 2 (04:18:26):
You just need them. You require them.
Speaker 3 (04:18:32):
To just calm down, slow down, quiet down for now.
(04:18:52):
So as you focus on those remaining thoughts, as we
count down this time from seven down to one. With
each number, just imagine sprinkling those flower petals love, love, kindness,
(04:19:19):
gratitude over those thoughts, which will allow them to just
melt away and relax deeply. With every number, those thoughts
(04:19:47):
will become more and more relaxed. St with number seven, six, five, four.
Speaker 2 (04:21:22):
Three one, how.
Speaker 3 (04:22:31):
As you now notice how relaxed you're feeling in your body,
(04:22:56):
We're going to focus on your hands, because the more
relaxed your hands are, the more relaxed your body and
(04:23:17):
mind are. There you focus on your hands and your fingers.
(04:23:44):
There's nothing needed to be done. There's no clinching the
fists or tents in the fingers or anything like that.
Speaker 4 (04:24:01):
It's just noticing and focusing on your hands, noticing how
they feel.
Speaker 3 (04:24:31):
Because the more relaxed do your hands feel, the calmer
your mind feels, and the more comforts you feel throughout
(04:24:53):
your body.
Speaker 2 (04:24:59):
Ge may.
Speaker 3 (04:25:05):
Have already.
Speaker 2 (04:25:12):
Noticed you.
Speaker 3 (04:25:21):
Mind is starting drift, fixaim just on your hands and fingers,
(04:26:00):
allowing them to experience a real deepening of that relaxation
in your hands and fingers, more and more relaxed. With
(04:26:34):
each number.
Speaker 2 (04:26:42):
From eight down to one, you can almost.
Speaker 3 (04:26:54):
Feel that healing, relaxing energy spreading into your hands and fingers,
becoming more relaxing with each number you hear, going down
(04:27:33):
eight down to one, drifting drifting again starting with.
Speaker 7 (04:27:56):
Number eighth, seven, four, three, just being here now, nothing
(04:31:57):
to think about, nothing to do, nothing to say, and
everything just feels calmer.
Speaker 2 (04:32:15):
And this is your natural state of being.
Speaker 4 (04:32:22):
This is how you just normally feel when you take
away all.
Speaker 3 (04:32:30):
Of that other stuff that we add, you know, things
like stress and worrying and overthinking, anxiety, tension, just generally
(04:32:53):
thinking about stuff. We take that away, which is what
we do.
Speaker 2 (04:33:00):
What we do now.
Speaker 3 (04:33:08):
You're left with.
Speaker 2 (04:33:11):
A real sense of peacefulness.
Speaker 3 (04:33:18):
Which comes to you very quickly because ultimately it's just
a feeling, a feeling of comfort. It's almost as if
(04:33:40):
you've gone inside yourself and you've found a special place
where everything is peaceful, a place where you can film
relaxed and your natural sense and comfort, a place where
(04:34:09):
you can be you, where you can accept yourself and
who you are, the place where you're not trying to
please anybody else ever, a place where you can actually
(04:34:40):
not just love yourself, but in some ways more importantly,
you can like yourself, appreciate.
Speaker 8 (04:34:52):
Who you are.
Speaker 3 (04:35:02):
That sense of gratitude, it's in the air all around you.
That's also a place where you can actually feel the
(04:35:24):
healing energy soaking into your body. Healing energy soaking into
your body.
Speaker 2 (04:35:45):
The healing energy.
Speaker 3 (04:35:47):
Spreads through your veins, traveling to each and every single
part of your body, and you start to realize that
(04:36:08):
actually that healing energy.
Speaker 2 (04:36:13):
It's not just entered into your brain.
Speaker 3 (04:36:18):
It's become part of your brain, and the spinal fluid
is now mixed with healing energy, not just allowing you
(04:36:41):
to feel so much more relaxed and healthy.
Speaker 2 (04:36:48):
In this moment, but also.
Speaker 3 (04:36:58):
You start to realize that actually, what's happening now without healing,
relaxing energy spreading through your body is actually changing your life.
(04:37:22):
It's actually changing the way you're going to feel not
just now, but tomorrow and the next day. As your
health improves, not just your physical health, but your mental health.
(04:37:47):
Things that used to bother you in the past, for
some reason, no longer.
Speaker 2 (04:37:56):
Have the effect that they used to.
Speaker 3 (04:38:01):
Because something has changed.
Speaker 2 (04:38:05):
Deep within you.
Speaker 3 (04:38:11):
Maybe things that used to cause you to feel anger
no longer have that power to control you.
Speaker 2 (04:38:32):
The way they seem to be able to before.
Speaker 1 (04:38:38):
As you realize that you're the one who decides what
affects you, you're the one who decides to feel relaxed
(04:39:01):
and calm when you choose.
Speaker 2 (04:39:09):
To enjoy.
Speaker 3 (04:39:11):
Noticing these natural developments.
Speaker 2 (04:39:19):
Of healing.
Speaker 3 (04:39:22):
Continuing to grow.
Speaker 1 (04:39:27):
And improve your life day by day, including of course,
your ability.
Speaker 3 (04:39:41):
To relax so much easier than sleeping.
Speaker 1 (04:39:55):
It's the most natural thing in the world to you
because Falling asleep is something that you've done so many times.
Speaker 2 (04:40:15):
In your life, and you know that you were born,
as we all.
Speaker 3 (04:40:23):
Were, with the ability to fall asleep naturally. We were
born with that ability.
Speaker 2 (04:40:40):
To just drift off into a deep, healing sleep.
Speaker 3 (04:40:54):
Even when we're kids, sometimes will fall asleep when we
don't even want to.
Speaker 2 (04:41:02):
Try to think of stay awake.
Speaker 3 (04:41:05):
Maybe it's a birthday in the morning, or it's Christmas
or holiday or something we look forward to.
Speaker 2 (04:41:12):
We don't want to go to sleep.
Speaker 4 (04:41:16):
But the more we want to stay awake, the more
we just start to drift. And the more you fight drifting.
We're try to stop yourself.
Speaker 3 (04:41:32):
And drifting asleep, the deeper and strongerout drifting becomes. Because
we're born not just with the need to relax deeply
(04:41:52):
and to naturally fall asleep, but it's our birth right,
it's part of our DNA, and sometimes as we get
(04:42:13):
older in life, perhaps at times we have forgotten.
Speaker 2 (04:42:24):
Relaxing completely.
Speaker 3 (04:42:28):
It's not only a wonderfully pleasant experience, it's also really easy.
Speaker 2 (04:42:53):
It's very very.
Speaker 3 (04:42:55):
Easy to let go because that's all it.
Speaker 8 (04:43:01):
Is, is just.
Speaker 1 (04:43:05):
Deciding to let go. And when you press the play
button on my recordings. You have given permission.
Speaker 2 (04:43:27):
For my voice to elect.
Speaker 4 (04:43:33):
When you press that play button, you have given me
permission for my words.
Speaker 2 (04:43:44):
To effect.
Speaker 3 (04:43:47):
You in a positive, only a positive way, opening up
your mind.
Speaker 2 (04:44:07):
To useful and healing.
Speaker 3 (04:44:16):
Suggestions that can have such an amazing effect on how
you feel right now, as well as those changes that
(04:44:45):
continue long after the recording ends, those changes within you
that continue to flow, wish and grow, transforming your life
(04:45:10):
in a positive, beautiful way, allowing you to move forward
in your life in the direction that you choose for yourself.
(04:45:39):
And this feeling, this feeling that you can experience a safety, comfort, calmness.
Speaker 2 (04:45:58):
This feels so nice.
Speaker 3 (04:46:09):
It's such a healthy place to be, and that positivity
grows within you. Eat and every day moving forward, you're
(04:46:43):
going to find that you're more relaxed physically and in
your mind is more relaxed. And it's not that you're
thinking slower. It's just that your mind will be less
(04:47:09):
clogged up with unnecessary negativity because from now on, your
mind rejects negativity. From now on, you're going to start
(04:47:31):
noticing when negativity arises and you can just say stop, stop,
and that negativity will turn around and leave you alone.
Speaker 2 (04:48:05):
Stop and then negativity.
Speaker 8 (04:48:14):
Would disappear.
Speaker 3 (04:48:23):
And as you notice that you feel way more relaxed
than you probably expected.
Speaker 2 (04:48:39):
You can now.
Speaker 1 (04:48:43):
Congratulate yourself because you're the person that has done this.
You are the one that has opened your mind up
to the simple facts. You can feel more relaxed in
(04:49:05):
your body and in your mind.
Speaker 3 (04:49:14):
You've opened your mind up to the birthright of being.
Speaker 8 (04:49:20):
Able to just.
Speaker 2 (04:49:23):
Fall asleep easily when you choose.
Speaker 3 (04:49:37):
And that's a nice feeling.
Speaker 2 (04:49:40):
Don't you think.
Speaker 3 (04:49:43):
It feels nice?
Speaker 2 (04:49:44):
Doesn't it?
Speaker 3 (04:49:47):
To feel calm? All that healing energy is spreading through
your body in your mind to spend time in a
special place where negativity can no longer enter. Negativity is banned,
(04:50:24):
it's barred, it's not allowed entry. Doesn't it doesn't.
Speaker 2 (04:50:32):
This doesn't deserve to be here.
Speaker 3 (04:50:34):
It doesn't belong here. Negativity has no place in your life,
which makes room for more comfort, more healing, more relaxation,
(04:51:08):
more peace. It feels nice, doesn't it.
Speaker 2 (04:51:29):
Just let go with everything.
Speaker 3 (04:51:51):
I'm gonna count down now from twenty down to one.
You can conte in you to relax. If you choose,
you can.
Speaker 2 (04:52:08):
Drift to sleep with every number.
Speaker 3 (04:52:18):
You hear me say you can fill twice is relaxed
or if you choose you can fill twice sleeping now
(04:52:46):
twenty nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twoeve eleven ten, nine, eight,
(04:54:36):
seven six five.
Speaker 2 (04:55:02):
Oh oh, this is your time.
Speaker 1 (04:55:39):
To just take a break, your time to relax, to
allow your mind to slow down, to give yourself permission.
Speaker 2 (04:56:11):
To take a break.
Speaker 3 (04:56:18):
From everything. Ensure the only person that can make that decision.
You're the only person that can actually tell your mind
(04:56:38):
to just relax, to just take some time off so
(04:57:03):
that you can focus on your body, getting in touch
with how you feel.
Speaker 8 (04:57:12):
Physically.
Speaker 4 (04:57:21):
And in the process of this body scanned where you
focus on different parts of your body, those parts that
you focus on and observe.
Speaker 1 (04:57:44):
Even though you're not purposely requesting for those parts of
your body to relax, it's.
Speaker 2 (04:57:56):
Kind of expected, bect.
Speaker 3 (04:58:01):
When you listen to my voice to feel more relaxed naturally,
because when you're listening to me, your attention is focused
(04:58:25):
on my words, and as my words guide you.
Speaker 2 (04:58:36):
To focus.
Speaker 1 (04:58:41):
On those parts of your body, your focus increases, which
actually can't comes your mind. And when your mind calms down,
(04:59:17):
your body relaxes, and when your body calms down, your
(04:59:39):
mind relaxes. And even though we've not really started to
focus on your body, you can already.
Speaker 3 (05:00:04):
Feel that healing energy spreading through your body, pushing out.
Speaker 4 (05:00:21):
Stress and tension, healing all the parts of your body,
including your skin, your bones, your blood, all of your
(05:00:41):
organs inside your body, all of the muscles, all of
the fat, all.
Speaker 2 (05:00:50):
Of everything, every hair on your body is filled with
that healing energy.
Speaker 3 (05:01:07):
Than when your brain fills without hearing energy. The feeling
of comfort, relaxation.
Speaker 2 (05:01:31):
Increases, deeply, increases in a way that your mind.
Speaker 3 (05:01:56):
Starts to fill perhaps bit drowsing because it's not needed,
and it may.
Speaker 2 (05:02:14):
Start to drift if that's what's needed. So if you're
listening to this and what you need is deep relaxation, that's.
Speaker 8 (05:02:39):
Where you get. If what you need is to fall asleep.
Speaker 3 (05:02:48):
Naturally and easily, that your mind drifts, that's also what happened.
Speaker 2 (05:03:04):
Because by.
Speaker 4 (05:03:07):
Pressing a play button on the podcast and listening to
me give permission.
Speaker 3 (05:03:17):
Your body and your mind. In fact, you give the
command to your body and your mind to relax deeply.
Speaker 2 (05:03:41):
And to drift off to sleep, if that's what you want,
or need them.
Speaker 3 (05:03:58):
As I focus.
Speaker 2 (05:04:01):
On the different.
Speaker 3 (05:04:02):
Parts of your body, you may start to just drift,
and then you come back again and you hear me
talk again, and I'm focusing on a different part of
(05:04:25):
your body.
Speaker 4 (05:04:31):
You may.
Speaker 3 (05:04:34):
Find yourself drifting, be able to realize you're drifting. Until
you stop drifting, you're alert again to my voice. Focusing
on a different part of your body starts to relaxing
(05:04:58):
and deeper, because that drifting is basically here already in
the sleep zone. And the more you drift, the longer
(05:05:20):
you drift, the longer you drift. Eventually, that drifting continues
into sleep, and that's the last you remember until you
(05:05:43):
wake up in your own time, when.
Speaker 4 (05:05:50):
You've experienced the right amount of sleep. Fear because when
you do it, and if you don't fall asleep, it's
extremely pleasant, so relaxing, so deep healing.
Speaker 2 (05:06:20):
Sleep.
Speaker 3 (05:06:31):
I feel so nice to relax into your own body
and mind. If you feel that healing image is spreading
through you, relaxing us so deeply excit sic start to focus.
Speaker 2 (05:07:17):
On your eyes.
Speaker 8 (05:07:26):
Moving down.
Speaker 2 (05:07:30):
To you, jaw.
Speaker 3 (05:07:38):
Down, till lack, your shoulders, arm, fingus, you chest, stom.
Speaker 18 (05:08:35):
You bank, spine, your hips, your legs, your face, your.
Speaker 3 (05:09:19):
Tes, feeding, spreading grin inside your body, feeling you up.
(05:09:54):
Now let's focus again on parts of your body, focusing
this time on your forehead. Now on your mouth, your lips,
(05:10:20):
your tongue, the whole of your mouth. Focusing on your fingers.
Speaker 2 (05:10:46):
Maybe you could.
Speaker 3 (05:10:48):
Move your fingers a little bits. You can focus on
each one individually, both hands.
Speaker 2 (05:11:06):
And even though if you focus on both of your hands.
Speaker 4 (05:11:10):
Now they almost seemed to just melt into one. Where
is your right hand, starting your left hand and almost
as if just mixed together. Now focusing on your knees,
(05:11:45):
just noticing how your knees hell. Now, focusing on your helpers,
(05:12:11):
focusing on both your elbows, just absurd, the feeling.
Speaker 3 (05:12:26):
Of your elbows now, focusing I'm sorry, the back of
(05:12:57):
your neck, energy, the bacon.
Speaker 4 (05:13:45):
Upside echoes. It's a good of sensation, acos.
Speaker 2 (05:15:07):
Can I just say now your ties, but if of
your faint.
Speaker 3 (05:15:26):
Being with how your ties feel right now, ninety cents,
(05:16:22):
how you entire body fails, not to sin, your mind.
Speaker 2 (05:16:48):
Fails.
Speaker 4 (05:16:52):
Now letting go, letting go, letting go everything, letting go,
(05:17:52):
letting go, letting go, h everything, everything.
Speaker 3 (05:18:26):
I'm going to start now, and I'd like you just,
first of all, just to see yourself lying down on
their message table, lying on your front. Your head is supported,
your arms are supported, and you feel comfortable.
Speaker 4 (05:18:50):
And breathing is really easy, and you feel you feel
comfort in how you look as well. So there's none
of that issue of body problems or shyness, because I'm
a professional and this is a therapy session, so none
(05:19:17):
of that stuff matters whatsoever.
Speaker 2 (05:19:23):
This is about you.
Speaker 3 (05:19:27):
This is about how you feel and how you can
enjoy that sense of comfort and relaxation that comes from
letting go and allowing my hands my fingers to relax
(05:19:47):
you by messaging your body. So I want to start off.
I placed in my hands on the back of your head,
just gently, just so you can feel my hands feel
(05:20:11):
like really on you. So you can maybe feel the
warmth of my hands on the back of your head.
Speaker 4 (05:20:24):
With my hands to the side of your head, not pressing,
but just holding there very gently, maybe over your ears,
and a little bit on your face, just so you
can feel my hands.
Speaker 2 (05:20:42):
So you can become accustomed to them.
Speaker 3 (05:20:54):
And now put my hands on the back of your
head again and gently them slide down onto the back
of your neck.
Speaker 4 (05:21:12):
You can feel my hands gently stroking the back of
your neck to start with, just so you can get
used to the feeling of my hands on your skin,
(05:21:34):
get accustomed to realize that you're safe and it's all good, it's.
Speaker 3 (05:21:43):
All fine, and I'm going to start gently messaging the
muscles in the back of your neck with both hands.
(05:22:10):
And this is a very trusting situation really, because our
next is so fragile and to have someone have their
hands around your neck in that way can sometimes be
problematic for people, which is why massages are quite good,
(05:22:32):
because it allows you to relax and get in touch
with trust, to feel peaceful and calm. There's a massage
(05:22:59):
decides of your.
Speaker 2 (05:23:00):
Neck gently.
Speaker 4 (05:23:04):
Moving from the bottom of your neck. It would be
sort of near where your shoulders start, I guess.
Speaker 3 (05:23:13):
All the way up.
Speaker 4 (05:23:16):
To your jaw, your ears, kind of area the side
of your neck. Of course, it's a lot longer than
the front of your neck. And message in the back.
Speaker 3 (05:23:43):
Of your neck, especially that area where perhaps we hold tension,
and there's that area's message. You can actually feel a
sense of release in the back of your neck and
(05:24:08):
maybe you can breathe it out as well. Notice how
it feels, Notice how you feel. And they're moving down
to that area between your neck and your shoulders, that
(05:24:32):
muscle area, starting to massage that area on both sides.
Speaker 4 (05:24:43):
I mean, this would be the area that a lot
of people would message if they were going to give
you like a shoulder message. Even that's not technically the shoulders,
but it's all the muscles that lead to the shoulders.
Speaker 2 (05:24:58):
From the neck.
Speaker 3 (05:25:01):
And again that can hold tension and stress and when
massaged sometimes a nice deep message is useful. And you
decide how deep that message is, and just allow my
(05:25:32):
knuckles just to dig in to get to those muscles
and to really.
Speaker 2 (05:25:42):
Relaxed them.
Speaker 3 (05:25:46):
All the time, and being firm yet gentle with you
and just stroking down the area to your actual shoulders,
(05:26:12):
moving to the muscles of your shoulders, and maybe initially
just pulling up the shoulders a little bit off the
table just to give you a little bit of a stretch,
but very gently. And you've got the muscles at the
(05:26:40):
front of your shoulders, the sides and the back. Again,
this is a part that can really take quite a
bit of pressure, quite a bit of needing. If if
(05:27:04):
you wish to really release the tension.
Speaker 4 (05:27:12):
To really get into those muscles, and you can let
your fingers in there and make you feel really nice.
Sometimes just being stroked gently or being massaged quite strongly
(05:27:35):
can all be beneficial to the reorxation with the muscles
in your shoulders.
Speaker 3 (05:27:56):
Now to move down your arms, were doing one arm
at a time. Starting with your right arm, what I'll
do is I just lift your arm up, just hold
(05:28:20):
it to the side of you, don't words still be attached,
and I just message the tops of your arms all
(05:28:43):
the way down to your forearms into your wrists, gently
massaging that part, the softer part, which is the under
(05:29:14):
part of the arm, which leads to the crease in
your elbow. The inside it's much more sensitive skin. Sometimes
(05:29:35):
just having that stroked feel really nice, pleasurable and relaxing.
Speaker 2 (05:29:55):
Now moving down to your right hand, just holding your hand.
Speaker 4 (05:30:09):
In both of my hands, just pressing gently on the
back of your hand, stretching your fingers.
Speaker 3 (05:30:26):
Ever so lightly, at the same time pressing down and
massaging each finger, and then starting to massage the palms
(05:30:48):
of their hand.
Speaker 2 (05:30:56):
Just turning the hand gently, stretching it gently, and actually.
Speaker 3 (05:31:07):
Have in your handheld can really be an emotional experience
sometimes even if it is a stranger. So when you
don't know very well, like a massage person or a therapist,
maybe because it's intimate, you can feel nice, you can
(05:31:41):
feel safe. As I put that right arm back down
where it was and did the same with your left arm,
(05:32:04):
exactly the same, massaging the muscles.
Speaker 2 (05:32:13):
In your arm all the way down to your.
Speaker 3 (05:32:16):
Wrist, stroking the inside of your arm, just being gentle
or as firm as you require. And then massaging your
(05:32:44):
left hand, stretching the fingers, gently massaging the palm of
your left hand.
Speaker 2 (05:33:13):
You feel so m so relaxing, so comforting, and I'll.
Speaker 3 (05:33:41):
Just rest your left arm back down. The start to
message your back, the biggest part of your body, starting
(05:34:04):
at the top, starting again where he already have been,
the area at the top in between your shoulders, near
your neck. Going back and massage in the area again,
but this time moving downwards, taking it downward. Stroke to
(05:34:36):
the middle of your back, working from the outside inwards.
Speaker 2 (05:34:43):
So massage in that your back, but the.
Speaker 3 (05:34:50):
Outsides of your back, the pads we are arms would
maybe rest against almost the part that connects your front
(05:35:14):
to your back.
Speaker 2 (05:35:24):
Just messaging down.
Speaker 3 (05:35:28):
Firmly but gently as firm as you want, moving down
and moving across a little beard, moving all the way
down again, be very gentle yet firm as you choose.
(05:35:55):
Eventually we get to the spine. We can mess out
just the muscles and either side of your spine.
Speaker 2 (05:36:04):
From the top of your neck all the way down
to your lower back.
Speaker 4 (05:36:17):
We can do that a few times. Sometimes people use
the knuckle or the you know, two fingers and just
go either side of the spine almost just push down,
(05:36:37):
go all the way down to the bottom.
Speaker 3 (05:36:39):
Of the spine, each time releasing tension and opening up
the body, stretching your body so that you feel more
relaxed but at the same time rejuvenated.
Speaker 4 (05:37:14):
And now I'm going to move to one side, to
your right side, and from the bottom of your ribs.
Speaker 3 (05:37:27):
To your pelvis, I'm going to message that area of
your back. I'll stretch over the other.
Speaker 4 (05:37:36):
Side and i will pull the muscles gently and massage
and push from one end that side or the way
to my side in the middle of fact to where
your spine is, massaging that side of your spine the
(05:37:58):
opposite side to where I'm standing. Then it's almost like
kneading bread. There's that big area.
Speaker 2 (05:38:08):
Which is.
Speaker 3 (05:38:10):
Firm yet lots there to message.
Speaker 4 (05:38:19):
Potentially one of the most important places to actually have
a message.
Speaker 3 (05:38:26):
Because you really feel it. You really feel the release
and the pleasure of having your lower back massaged. It
releases so much from your body that's not useful, starting
(05:38:49):
a healing process which will continue long after this recording
is over. The message in this part of your body
not only feels.
Speaker 4 (05:39:09):
Really good for you, it's actually fun to do because
it is, as I said, like kneading bread, it's a
part that you can really get hold of.
Speaker 3 (05:39:24):
And really message deeply. If that's your choice.
Speaker 4 (05:39:37):
They're not going to move over to the other side
of your body and do the same with the opposite
part of your lawer bag.
Speaker 3 (05:39:52):
Kneading and messaging from your sides or way to the
middle of your back where your spine is pressing and
kneading firm and gentle at the same time. It feels
(05:40:20):
so releasing. This mixture of pleasure, comfort, release, calmness, relaxation
or mixed together. Plus there's that feeling from your stomach
(05:40:45):
as it's being stretched. Even though you're in your stomach now,
you can feel it being stretched because that whole area
is connected to your stomach.
Speaker 4 (05:41:04):
Now we're going to move or move further up to
your top of your body, and I'm we do the
same this time, starting with your upper back. Put my
hands forward.
Speaker 3 (05:41:22):
Over and massive massage in that area up to your spine,
from the side of your body up to your spine.
So some of that message area, the muscle tissue or
whatever fatty tissue even will be possibly from your chest
(05:41:47):
because it's all connected, chest and the back connect together.
I'm going to be massaging and just pulling some of
that skin from your side up and message in that
area of your upper back all the way to your spine.
(05:42:18):
And then I'll move down a bit and I'll continue
with the middle of your back doing exactly the same thing.
Speaker 2 (05:42:27):
As gentle, as deep as you choose.
Speaker 4 (05:42:40):
Now I'll move or the other side again and do
the exact same thing with the top of your back
on the other side, from.
Speaker 3 (05:42:56):
Pretty much underneath your arm area really to your spine,
and then continuing that all the way down.
Speaker 4 (05:43:16):
Including your lower your middle of your back. I'm gonna
go to your thighs, the backs of your thighs and
(05:43:40):
the sides of your thighs, starting with your right leg,
Massage in the back and the sides of your thighs
gently and firmly. There's a lot of muscles there. It's
(05:44:06):
an area that can be very tense at times and
maybe needs a little bit more pressure than the rest
of the body that's up to you. You can gently
stroke the back of your legs where you know, opposite
(05:44:29):
your knee joint or underneath your knee joint. It's very sensitive,
gentle area.
Speaker 3 (05:44:44):
And then working down to your calf muscles. Massage in
your calf muscles thoroughly and deeply, if you choose, using
both hands fingers, digging deep to your ankles, in the
(05:45:19):
back of your back of your ankles, just gently message
in that area, maybe lifting the leg and stretching it.
Speaker 2 (05:45:38):
A little bit.
Speaker 3 (05:45:49):
Moving to the right foot, massage in the bottom of
your feet and the sides of your feet gently but
(05:46:19):
firm enough so they don't tickle, and just allow the
pleasure that you get from heaving your feet massaged to
just overtake you. As I continue to message your feet,
(05:46:46):
the bottoms of your feet, the sides your arches, your heel.
You can put a lot of pressure into your heel
and if it was amazing, yet.
Speaker 4 (05:47:03):
The arches need to be a bit more gentle. Stretching
your toes gently and massage in the bottoms of your
toes with my fingers, each one individually.
Speaker 3 (05:47:33):
Moving over to the left leg to do exactly the
same thing. Starting at the top of the thighs. Work
in the back of the thighs and the sides, massaging
deeply and gently.
Speaker 4 (05:47:55):
The whole area, working all the way down. And this
is an area that maybe you could like to spend
(05:48:16):
more time relaxing and massaging. Perhaps, if you wanted, I
could make a future recording. I want to spend more
time on one particular area.
Speaker 2 (05:48:37):
As you moved down.
Speaker 3 (05:48:41):
To your calf muscles, massagy and your calf muscles.
Speaker 2 (05:48:52):
Firmly and gently, moving down.
Speaker 3 (05:49:04):
Your ankle into your feet, Massage in the backs of
your feet, the bottoms of your feet, stretching your toes
and message in each toe individually. And that feeling of
(05:49:27):
pleasure and release. The experience when you're having your feet
massaged feels really good. Now, she turn over in your mind.
(05:49:57):
Laying on your back, I'm just gonna start again.
Speaker 4 (05:50:10):
Your neck area, in your shoulders, just to get back
in touch with that area, and as you move up,
(05:50:42):
I can clean my hands, make them more fresh, because
now I'm gonna message your face simply.
Speaker 2 (05:50:55):
Starting off with your forehead.
Speaker 3 (05:51:04):
Your eyes are closed, I can just stretch your eyes
a little bit, pushing up on your eyebrows, just massaging
around your scalp, massaging down your cheeks, around your ears,
(05:51:37):
into your jaw, shently the side of your neck.
Speaker 8 (05:51:50):
Chin.
Speaker 3 (05:52:02):
They're just moving down.
Speaker 4 (05:52:07):
From your neck down to your chest, starting him by
message in the very top of your chest.
Speaker 2 (05:52:21):
Where the collar bone is.
Speaker 3 (05:52:24):
Give a side of the collarbone, and then just message
in the hole of the chest, moving the chest around.
(05:52:57):
Because it's quite a large area. You can move from
one side to the next, moving my hands underneath pretty
much your arms are stretching up, stretching some of the
(05:53:23):
muscles of your back in the process, moving up over
your chest, and they're moving down again the little laying
(05:53:53):
my hands. They're just massage gently and slide down to
your stomach, starting in the middle of your chest, and
then gradually my head's moving apart and massaging and sliding
(05:54:16):
at the same time, moving down.
Speaker 2 (05:54:23):
To just below your red cage, moving.
Speaker 3 (05:54:35):
Down and then messaging up again, giving your chest all
the attention.
Speaker 2 (05:54:47):
That it needs.
Speaker 3 (05:54:50):
To feel completely relaxed.
Speaker 4 (05:55:01):
Remembering that I'm also going to be focusing on your
sides as well, an area that really doesn't get much
attention but feels really good when it's massaged. Just stroking
(05:55:22):
my hands down the.
Speaker 3 (05:55:24):
Sides of your body, just below your arms all the
way down to your hips. Now moving to your stomach area,
(05:55:47):
I'm going to stand on one side of you like
I did when I did your lower back. I'm gonna
do a similar process of just stretching the muscles from
your side, gently messaging from one side to the next,
(05:56:16):
move in.
Speaker 4 (05:56:19):
The whole area from below your ribs all the way
down to below your belly button, and then move.
Speaker 3 (05:56:34):
Around to the other side of you and repeat that
process of relaxing, deeply, calmly. You feel loose, you feel free.
Speaker 4 (05:57:00):
And it's something about having your stomach massage that's different
from any other part.
Speaker 3 (05:57:09):
Because we do have a tendency of holding a different
kind of stress in your stomach that we may not
be aware of. There's an ol massage your stomach. In
front of your stomach, they can circles around your belly
(05:57:36):
button and then going the other way around. There a
gentleness and a freedom that comes from feeling how you're feeling.
Speaker 2 (05:58:04):
As I now move down.
Speaker 4 (05:58:07):
The tops of your thighs, muscles, massaging them, and I
can do this to your legs at the same time,
pressing down, massaging deeply those muscles in your thighs, the
(05:58:29):
front of your thighs, and moving down to your knees,
gently massaging your knees, sliding down your shins, putting pressure
(05:58:51):
on either side of your shin gently softly but firmly,
moving down to your ankles, stroking the tops of your feet,
(05:59:19):
and then with each foot in each hand, just gently
messaging the whole of the foot, the top, the bottom,
your heel, your ankle, your toes, messaging every part of
(05:59:42):
your feet.
Speaker 3 (05:59:48):
Feels so good, Just to let go and enjoy the process.
Speaker 4 (06:00:00):
Joy feeling so deeply relaxed. So much comfort and so
many feelings become just from touching your skin.
Speaker 2 (06:00:35):
And you can just lie there.
Speaker 4 (06:00:40):
For as long as you choose, enjoying the feeling of
deep comfort.
Speaker 3 (06:00:53):
From being massaged by me, Enjoy.
Speaker 2 (06:01:09):
Fearing deeply, ra And all we're gonna do is blow
(06:01:31):
out some candles in your mind.
Speaker 3 (06:01:46):
There're gonna be a hundred candles, and you're gonna blow
each one out, okay, individually, one by one, starting at
(06:02:07):
one hundred. As I count down.
Speaker 4 (06:02:15):
All the way down to one, and each time I
say a number, you can imagine that candle in front
of you, and I'd like you to actually physically.
Speaker 3 (06:02:42):
Generally blow that candle out, just so it's not big blows,
just a gentle, and that candle will extinguish. And then
(06:03:13):
I'll say the next number.
Speaker 2 (06:03:16):
So we move down. Then you can just.
Speaker 4 (06:03:24):
Blow that one out as well. And as we move
down the numbers, you'll find yourself feeding.
Speaker 3 (06:03:43):
More and more relaxed, and if you need to sleep,
you'll also find yourself becoming incredibly tired and sleepy. In fact,
(06:04:04):
you may struggle to blow.
Speaker 2 (06:04:10):
Out all one hundred of these candles.
Speaker 4 (06:04:22):
As you feel more and more deeply relaxed, more and more.
Speaker 2 (06:04:44):
Deeply tired, and the fur you go down, the more
your mind.
Speaker 3 (06:05:04):
Starts to drift. You may find that you stop listening
to me after a while, and even though there maybe
(06:05:31):
background sounds where you are, you'll be aware of those sounds.
Speaker 2 (06:05:43):
At the moment he may start to just not even
notice them at all.
Speaker 3 (06:06:07):
Because they're unimportant. Where I am, I've got the sounds
of the birds. There's all horrors, the pigeon who likes
(06:06:28):
to say hello. Sometimes there's the odd plane that goes by,
maybe traffic and trains.
Speaker 2 (06:06:43):
In the distance.
Speaker 3 (06:06:50):
But none of that scene is important whatsoever. Or candles
you blow out, the less important.
Speaker 2 (06:07:08):
Anything is.
Speaker 3 (06:07:15):
Or candles you blow out. The furv seemed to.
Speaker 2 (06:07:26):
Move away.
Speaker 4 (06:07:33):
From sounds, from general date days. Stuff seems to just
move away.
Speaker 2 (06:07:53):
On its own. Feel more.
Speaker 3 (06:08:03):
Calmer with every candle you blow out, guiding you.
Speaker 4 (06:08:24):
To the next number. Did you hear me say? And
then you blow that candle out?
Speaker 2 (06:08:40):
Too?
Speaker 3 (06:08:48):
So easy, so simple. I'm gonna start by introducing the
(06:09:12):
first candle. This is a hundred.
Speaker 2 (06:09:24):
First candle, this.
Speaker 3 (06:09:29):
Is one hundred. When you blow that candle out, you'll
find immediately a slight.
Speaker 2 (06:09:53):
Change in how you feel, as well as a real
sense of.
Speaker 3 (06:10:08):
Positivity growing within you, relaxation and sleepiness expanding. Starting with
(06:10:43):
one hundred, blow out that candle now ninety nine candle
(06:11:27):
ninety eight, candle ninety seven, che mid this six candle,
(06:13:05):
ninety five, candle.
Speaker 2 (06:13:27):
Ninety four candle n.
Speaker 3 (06:14:02):
Thorree, I like you too, ninety one candle ninety, can
(06:15:54):
eighty nine, hand eight eight, candle eightis, candle eightius eighty
(06:18:47):
five and cansh.
Speaker 8 (06:19:51):
Can eighty two and two eight two onehhhhhhhh.
Speaker 3 (06:22:26):
Seventy nine, Candle seventy eight, candle seventy seven, candle seventy six,
(06:24:11):
candle seventy five, candle seventy four, candle seventy three, candle
(06:25:16):
seventy two, candle seventy one, candle seventy one, candle seventy
(06:26:33):
and sixty nine, candle sixty eight, candle sixty seven, candle
(06:27:30):
sixty five, candle sixty four, candle sixty four, candle sixty three,
(06:28:42):
candle sixty sixty one, candle sixty, handle fifty nine, candle
(06:30:37):
fifty eight, candle fifty seven, candle fifty six, candle fifty five,
(06:32:14):
handle fifty four, handle fifty three and fifty two cand fifty,
(06:34:08):
candle fifty two, candle fifty one, candle fifty, candle forty nine,
(06:36:16):
came forty eight, forty seven, candle forty six, candle forty five,
(06:38:39):
handle forty two, Can do you candle forty, candle thirty nine, eighth,
(06:42:04):
candle thirty seven, candle thirty five, thirty four candle thirty three,
(06:44:55):
candle zero one, candle thirty candle twenty eighteen nine candle,
(06:47:54):
twenty eight, candle twenty seven, twenty six candle twenty five,
(06:51:00):
two four and twenty thirtyshhhhhh.
Speaker 8 (06:52:23):
Can to.
Speaker 2 (06:52:26):
To te t.
Speaker 8 (06:53:00):
And twenty one.
Speaker 2 (06:53:41):
And waiting.
Speaker 3 (06:54:24):
And don say seventy can.
Speaker 8 (06:56:37):
Six day four twohhhhhhhhhh.
Speaker 2 (07:00:35):
And nine.
Speaker 19 (07:02:51):
Two eight came can dohhhhhhh.
Speaker 2 (07:08:03):
Candle or let go.
Speaker 4 (07:08:19):
Of all of those thoughts, worries, concerns about the past,
thoughts about the future, and even things you've been thinking
about today.
Speaker 2 (07:08:34):
Just let it all go because none of it.
Speaker 1 (07:08:39):
Is useful in this moment. This is your opportunity to
just focus on feeling relaxed, allowing yourself to get in
(07:09:08):
touch with that natural sense of peace.
Speaker 3 (07:09:17):
That we all have within us. It's available for everyone.
It just sometimes takes a little bit of effort to
set up the.
Speaker 2 (07:09:30):
Right time and place.
Speaker 3 (07:09:35):
In order for you to just let go. Because when
you do decide to let go and relax, that's what
your body starts to do because you've chosen You've chosen
(07:09:58):
to just allow your body to unwind and your mind
starts to slow down, and it's a nice feeling It's
a nice feeling at the beginning, just to know that
you have chosen to decide to relax deeply, and because
(07:10:28):
you've made that decision, your body will just follow suit.
Speaker 1 (07:10:36):
Because sometimes all the muscles in your body need is
just permission from you to relax.
Speaker 4 (07:10:49):
Because so often we're busy, we're going from here to there,
we're walking around, and we're doing stuff, and the body
does and have any time or space to really relax deeply.
(07:11:11):
So it kind of waits for you to lead the way, waits.
Speaker 2 (07:11:16):
For your permission. And when you do.
Speaker 3 (07:11:24):
Give your permission, when you give the say so, when
you say okay, it's time.
Speaker 2 (07:11:34):
For your body.
Speaker 4 (07:11:37):
To let go completely and relax totally, your body just follows.
Speaker 2 (07:11:49):
So like a breath of relief. Ah good, I can
now relax.
Speaker 3 (07:11:58):
That feeling at the end of a day of very
physical day that you may experience in the past, where
you get home and you just sit down on a chair,
maybe you kick your shoes off, and.
Speaker 2 (07:12:14):
Feels so nice.
Speaker 3 (07:12:18):
I know that you don't have to get up again
for a little while at least, and if you choose,
you can just sit there for maybe an hour to
feels blissful and just by sitting down like that, your
(07:12:42):
body knows that it's time to relax. Your body has
been given permission from you because it's a mindset.
Speaker 2 (07:12:55):
In your mind head to let go of everything.
Speaker 3 (07:13:06):
And just completely allow all the stress of your body
to evaporate. Any tensions can just gradually.
Speaker 2 (07:13:25):
Vanish.
Speaker 3 (07:13:32):
It's almost like magic, really, because that sense of relaxation
in your body, it's a very natural state. It's not
something unusual. It may feel unusual when you first start
(07:13:55):
to relax. You if you haven't really spent a lot
of time focusing and giving yourself this space to let
go completely and relax, they seem almost alien, but it isn't.
It's actually the most natural thing in the world to
(07:14:19):
let go completely, to relax totally, the most natural thing
in the world to allow yourself to feel really calm
(07:14:42):
in your mind. And it is almost like a literal unwinding.
It's like you press a button.
Speaker 4 (07:14:57):
And all at tension just releases, and it's like a wheel,
like a cog, like the inside of the clock just unwinding.
And he's almost I could see that the little wind
up knob that's used just going the opposite way that
(07:15:18):
you choose to wind it up, and the energy that
frenetic stress for energy gradually winding down, losing its power, losing.
Speaker 8 (07:15:36):
Its strength.
Speaker 3 (07:15:40):
As a sense of relaxation becomes stronger and deeper, and
you may find a The more relaxed you feel, your
mind starts wonder, maybe seem to stop listening to me
(07:16:08):
for a while, Your mind goes somewhere else, and then
you realize you're listening to me again, and now it's
just your mind to drifting to sleep, which is quite natural,
(07:16:31):
because sometimes when we're stressed and tense.
Speaker 4 (07:16:38):
We're not May I actually be aware of what we
need or we physically your emotionally.
Speaker 2 (07:16:47):
Need in this moment.
Speaker 4 (07:16:51):
But when you allow your body and mind to relax completely,
you let go of all.
Speaker 2 (07:17:02):
Thoughts, concerns, worries.
Speaker 8 (07:17:06):
Ideas.
Speaker 2 (07:17:08):
All ngo allow them to drop onto the floor. You
start to.
Speaker 3 (07:17:21):
Get in touch with the feelings of such relaxation. Feelings
so nice to be in touch with the calmness of
the different body parts as they become looser.
Speaker 8 (07:17:49):
And looser.
Speaker 4 (07:17:54):
Even your breathing seems easier than more natural, effortless.
Speaker 3 (07:18:06):
As I call out as through your mouth or nose
into your lungs, breathing in comforts and relaxation and then
just breathing out any excess remain intentional stress from every
(07:18:31):
part of your body.
Speaker 2 (07:18:34):
And mind.
Speaker 3 (07:18:38):
As you start to focus on your mind, maybe you
notice that things have come to a standstill or maybe
just much much lower than before.
Speaker 2 (07:18:59):
Because your mind is not really needed.
Speaker 3 (07:19:05):
When listening to my voice, which allows your mind to
relax just as deep as your body. And that's synchronicity
between the relaxation of your body relaxation of your mind.
Speaker 8 (07:19:36):
Let you know that.
Speaker 2 (07:19:40):
Feeling completely calm, loose, and.
Speaker 3 (07:19:46):
Relaxed really is.
Speaker 2 (07:19:52):
A great healing experience fear and has so many.
Speaker 4 (07:20:07):
Positive benefits for your body, mind, and your life. To
be able to let go.
Speaker 3 (07:20:19):
Everything and to relax completely, you know, all parts of
your body and mind, even your boneses are relaxed, or
(07:20:40):
your muscles are relaxed.
Speaker 4 (07:20:50):
Even the skin that covers your body is relaxed. Every hair.
Speaker 8 (07:21:07):
That you have is also.
Speaker 2 (07:21:12):
Deeply relaxed. And your brain really starts to feel the benefits.
Speaker 8 (07:21:30):
Of this.
Speaker 2 (07:21:32):
Heathing relaxation. Unless you focus.
Speaker 4 (07:21:43):
On the in the side of your scalp where your
brain is, you can start to realize and notice the
benefits of your brain relaxing deepay, initial brain.
Speaker 3 (07:22:07):
Continues to relax sends those messages to the rest of
your body.
Speaker 2 (07:22:21):
And your mind to really relax e.
Speaker 3 (07:22:29):
More deeply, relaxy, more completely, letting go of any remaining
(07:22:52):
thoughts or concerns, allow them just tru up onto the
floor because they're not loen necessary in.
Speaker 2 (07:23:08):
This moment, this moment of deep.
Speaker 4 (07:23:15):
Relaxation and calmness. Feeling your brain.
Speaker 2 (07:23:27):
With deep concentrated.
Speaker 3 (07:23:32):
Heeling, calming, relaxing, every part of your brain.
Speaker 2 (07:23:54):
Feeling so and comfortable, so relaxed.
Speaker 4 (07:24:09):
And be peaceful. Your brain feels so light, that's so healthy.
That sense of deep deep comfort really does allow you.
Speaker 8 (07:24:39):
To enjoy.
Speaker 3 (07:24:42):
Those ever increasing sensations of comfort that are spreading throughout
your body, in each and every muscle of your body.
Speaker 8 (07:25:08):
Eat deeper.
Speaker 4 (07:25:15):
And deeper, much more deeper than before, much more comfort
spreading through your body.
Speaker 8 (07:25:39):
Your mind, be.
Speaker 2 (07:25:45):
So peaceful and calm, so.
Speaker 8 (07:25:54):
Very very.
Speaker 3 (07:25:58):
Peaceful in avery part.
Speaker 2 (07:26:05):
Of your body.
Speaker 8 (07:26:08):
Let you go.
Speaker 4 (07:26:11):
The a everything averything, so peaceful and calm, so relax.
Speaker 2 (07:26:35):
Very second the passes you feel.
Speaker 20 (07:26:45):
Dadpath relaxed, dper.
Speaker 2 (07:26:59):
And deper lest.
Speaker 8 (07:27:06):
Calm, so calm, peace for.
Speaker 4 (07:27:19):
So very peace from your head down to your toils.
Such peace and comfort growing all the time, Such peace
(07:27:46):
and comfort spreading through your body and mind deeper deeper,
such comforts spreading and sinking deeper into a muscle of
(07:28:16):
your body, so that you feel amazing, so relaxed, so piece, so.
Speaker 2 (07:28:38):
So relax.
Speaker 8 (07:28:44):
And peace.
Speaker 2 (07:28:48):
Letting go everything I do you scan.
Speaker 1 (07:29:02):
Focusing on firstly how you feel in your body, not
trying to change how you feel, not trying to relax,
not trying to move away from any discomfort or stress
or tension. Just accepting, observing and accepting how you feel in.
Speaker 2 (07:29:29):
The different parts of your body.
Speaker 3 (07:29:32):
Just allowing yourself to be exactly as you are, to notice,
to get in touch with how you actually feel in
this moment. I'm going to start off by focusing on
(07:30:01):
your hands.
Speaker 4 (07:30:06):
Just be aware of your hands, like you to move
your hands around, just maybe move your.
Speaker 2 (07:30:18):
Fingers a little bit.
Speaker 4 (07:30:22):
I've been enclosing your hands very gently, just so that
you can get in touch with how your hands and
your fingers feel, very very slow movements. Focusing now on
(07:30:57):
your feet, and if you can just do kind of
an equivalent with your.
Speaker 2 (07:31:06):
Feet, is you've just done with your hands.
Speaker 3 (07:31:12):
Maybe turning your ankles, moving your feet around, moving your
toes gently, only very.
Speaker 1 (07:31:28):
Gently and very slowly, noticing how your feet feel.
Speaker 3 (07:31:40):
In this moment. Focusing now on your eyes, I'd like
you to just focus on your eyelids. Maybe you can
(07:32:01):
open and close your eyes a couple of times to
really get in touch with how you feel.
Speaker 2 (07:32:09):
When you do close your eyes.
Speaker 3 (07:32:12):
The muscle changes.
Speaker 4 (07:32:17):
In your eyes when you do close them, maybe raising
your eyebrows.
Speaker 3 (07:32:25):
It stretches the tops of your eyes, perhaps squinting your eyes,
scrunching up your eyes.
Speaker 2 (07:32:39):
Just so you can heally get in touch.
Speaker 3 (07:32:45):
With all aspects of how your eyes feel.
Speaker 2 (07:32:56):
Right now.
Speaker 4 (07:33:05):
Now focusing on your thighs, then you know it just
starts you to gently tense your thighs, just very very gently, just.
Speaker 3 (07:33:22):
Enough so you can become.
Speaker 2 (07:33:28):
More attuned to the physical sensation.
Speaker 3 (07:33:38):
Of your upper legs, the front of your thighs, and
the backs of your thighs, noticing and observing how your
thighs fear right now, moving your focus.
Speaker 2 (07:34:11):
To the back of your neck. Just noticing the.
Speaker 3 (07:34:17):
Back of your neck the muscles, and of course they
lead to the side of your neck. They also lead
to the top of your back, which leads to your shoulders.
So as you focus on the back of your neck,
(07:34:41):
maybe you can move your head gently upwards as if
you're looking up. Maybe moving your head down as if
you're looking down. Perhaps moving your headside to side, right
(07:35:03):
to left, but only.
Speaker 4 (07:35:08):
Very slowly, very gently. I'm not trying to force anything.
Speaker 2 (07:35:20):
It has to be very very gentle, just so you can.
Speaker 8 (07:35:32):
Be more.
Speaker 3 (07:35:35):
In touch with the feelings, with the sensations, the physical
sensations of how the back of your neck.
Speaker 2 (07:35:52):
Feels. Right now, as we now focus.
Speaker 4 (07:36:09):
On the tops of your arms, the parts where your
biceps and your triceps are between your elbow and your shoulders.
So you focus on those parts and tops of your arms,
(07:36:30):
you may like to just tense them, but very.
Speaker 2 (07:36:38):
Very gently and slowly.
Speaker 4 (07:36:44):
See you're not.
Speaker 1 (07:36:45):
Straining or putting any pressure whatsoever.
Speaker 8 (07:36:53):
On your arms.
Speaker 2 (07:36:56):
It's just so you can gain more of a sense
of how your upper arms are feeling in this moment.
Speaker 4 (07:37:18):
Just notice them as you gently, very gently and slowly.
Speaker 3 (07:37:30):
Tighten the muscles and then LEO, notice how the tops
of your arms feel right now, as we now focus
(07:38:00):
on your stomach, the area the lower abdomen area below
your belly button, moving all the way down to your hips,
just above your grind. Maybe you're able to tense these muscles.
Speaker 2 (07:38:32):
In that area very very gently and slowly.
Speaker 3 (07:38:47):
If that's a difficult thing to do, maybe you can
just move.
Speaker 2 (07:38:55):
Your body.
Speaker 3 (07:38:58):
Push in your stomach up, maybe moving a little bit
of a side using your hips, just so.
Speaker 2 (07:39:08):
As you can get more in tune.
Speaker 3 (07:39:15):
With how your lower abdomen area.
Speaker 2 (07:39:23):
Is feeling.
Speaker 8 (07:39:27):
In this moment, just noticing.
Speaker 2 (07:39:37):
The physical sensations or your lower abdomen.
Speaker 8 (07:39:57):
Has.
Speaker 2 (07:39:58):
Move your attention to your mouth, noticing your lips.
Speaker 3 (07:40:13):
And inside your mouth, your teeth, your guns, your tongue,
just noticing how your tongue and your mouth feels. It
(07:40:40):
may help by.
Speaker 4 (07:40:43):
Moving your tongue around your mouth, moving it to your left,
maybe pressing it gently against the side of your mouth,
and then to the right, gently to the side of
(07:41:04):
your mouth, perhaps pressing up against the top of your mouth,
and then down gently against the bottom of your mouth,
always very slowly.
Speaker 2 (07:41:28):
And a very very gentle.
Speaker 8 (07:41:38):
So that you can.
Speaker 4 (07:41:42):
Be aware of how you feel in your mouth area.
(07:42:06):
Now I got to focus.
Speaker 2 (07:42:14):
On your wrists and don't I'll ask you to maybe
just routine.
Speaker 3 (07:42:32):
Your wrists by moving your hands in a circular motion
very gently and slowly, just soly can feel the sensations
(07:43:06):
that you are currently.
Speaker 4 (07:43:10):
Experiencing in your risks. Perhaps move in your hands.
Speaker 2 (07:43:25):
Up and down.
Speaker 3 (07:43:29):
Again very very champlain and slowly, very chancel and slowing
(07:44:10):
the start to observe your lower back.
Speaker 2 (07:44:26):
The bad part is just above your hips where your
coxis are.
Speaker 3 (07:44:45):
A whole area which also really does include the signs
of your body because those muscles are very much connected.
There's those muscles also move.
Speaker 4 (07:45:06):
Into your hyperia, connect into your buttocks the side of
your hips, and if you're physically able to do so,
(07:45:32):
maybe you can very gently just move your body.
Speaker 2 (07:45:42):
Eviss slightly, very slowly, some side to side, just enough.
Speaker 8 (07:45:58):
For you to gauge how you feel.
Speaker 4 (07:46:11):
Your lawer back, perhaps sickly even move your hips gently.
Speaker 2 (07:46:29):
Up and down.
Speaker 4 (07:46:34):
Gently slowly, in order to.
Speaker 2 (07:46:45):
Be in touch with the physical sensations of your lawer back.
(07:47:12):
As we know, your attention to your jaw an area
from your chin all the way up to near your
(07:47:34):
ears are.
Speaker 4 (07:47:37):
Oh your jaw, and you can, just if it's okay
to do same, gently open your mouth nor wide, nice stretching,
(07:48:05):
just very gently and slowly opening your mouth and closing
your mouth very gently and slowly.
Speaker 2 (07:48:36):
So you can be in touch.
Speaker 4 (07:48:48):
With how your jaw feels now to sit down your
(07:49:25):
chest area. You don't need to do anything to move
your chest because it moves every time you breathe. It
(07:49:52):
moves very gently.
Speaker 8 (07:49:56):
And slowly.
Speaker 2 (07:50:00):
Automatically with each breath you take. As you focus on
your chest fils when you breathe, move in your.
Speaker 3 (07:51:02):
Focus to your forearms, your elbows.
Speaker 2 (07:51:15):
Maybe you're able to very gently.
Speaker 8 (07:51:23):
And slowly.
Speaker 4 (07:51:27):
Dense the muscles in your forearms, and when you do that,
you can feel.
Speaker 2 (07:51:40):
Your elbows as well, very gently.
Speaker 8 (07:51:57):
And slow.
Speaker 3 (07:52:08):
Gently and softly observing your forums delpas. No focus.
Speaker 2 (07:52:56):
The rest of go back your upper back.
Speaker 3 (07:53:07):
In the middle, the middle of your back. Again, this
part of your body moves also every time you breed.
Speaker 8 (07:53:40):
You may not notice that.
Speaker 4 (07:53:44):
Usually mace you observe your upper back in the middle
of your back. It can really fail.
Speaker 8 (07:54:07):
Hitt.
Speaker 2 (07:54:56):
Maybe your focus to your hip area, your butt as.
Speaker 4 (07:55:09):
A brain, there's muscles and those bones in your midsection.
Speaker 2 (07:55:46):
Just noticing.
Speaker 4 (07:55:49):
How your hips feel right now, you can very very
(07:56:10):
gently move your hips.
Speaker 3 (07:56:20):
Maybe side to side very gently and.
Speaker 2 (07:56:28):
Sor yeah, very gently softly.
Speaker 10 (07:57:07):
Mm.
Speaker 4 (07:57:14):
Everything starts to slow down, including the thoughts in your mind,
and your mind.
Speaker 1 (07:57:34):
Itself just starts to gradually. It doesn't have to be instant,
but just gradually starting too. It's almost like time is
storing chin It's a slower path to maybe what you're
(07:58:04):
used to in your day to day life.
Speaker 4 (07:58:11):
It's a slower movement of energy, very small movements which
(07:58:38):
make up the larger movements, which is always the case.
Now when you move your hand, it might seem like
it's one movement, but it's lots of minute different muscles moving.
Speaker 3 (07:58:59):
In a audience with each other. And what happens in
this space that we're sharing is we move from.
Speaker 2 (07:59:22):
That big.
Speaker 4 (07:59:29):
Movement into those smaller movements. Starting to focus on.
Speaker 2 (07:59:46):
How your body feels, not just as a whole, not
just oh, i'm feel in this way.
Speaker 4 (07:59:55):
I'm feeling stressed or tense, or I'm feeling laxed and calm,
I'm feeling this way, I'm feeling that way.
Speaker 3 (08:00:08):
Starting to notice that your body begins to present to
you small feelings around your body, small physical sensations.
Speaker 4 (08:00:37):
In your legs, whether pleasurable or not. Maybe resisting the
temptation to label them.
Speaker 2 (08:00:57):
Or to judge them.
Speaker 4 (08:01:00):
Those feelings, just thinking them, thinking about them is just
being neutral, just feelings, not being particularly concerned, just noticing
(08:01:25):
what your body is telling you. Feelings in your arms
instead of feeling the whole of the arm. Maybe notice those.
Speaker 1 (08:01:49):
Individual feelings, all those different muscles.
Speaker 8 (08:01:55):
And skin in.
Speaker 2 (08:02:03):
The hairs of your arms.
Speaker 4 (08:02:07):
All the internal parts of your arms, the veins, the bones,
just being aware of maybe your elbow on your right
(08:02:30):
arm has a certain feeling. Maybe your left wrist.
Speaker 2 (08:02:40):
Also has.
Speaker 4 (08:02:44):
Its own individual physical sensation. What about your forearm on
(08:03:05):
your right arm, you're right forearm. There may not be
any particular feeling that you could even give a name to,
(08:03:29):
may not feel like anything other than just a feeling. Yeah,
it's there. The feelings in your shoulders, perhaps your shoulders
when you think about them, kind of almost like they're
(08:03:51):
the same, you know, the same feeling, almost like both
of your shoulders are just one thing.
Speaker 2 (08:04:02):
Of course they're not.
Speaker 4 (08:04:12):
And when you focus on your left shoulder and then
on your right shoulder, maybe find that you move the
muscles a little bit, maybe tense the muscles gently, noticing
(08:04:36):
the difference in each shoulder. Your lower back, the left
(08:05:07):
side of your lower back and the right side of
your lower back.
Speaker 3 (08:05:20):
Of course, that connection to your buttocks and to your hips,
and also moving up into the middle of your back,
(08:05:46):
and sometimes like right now, actually, when I focus on
their part, When I focused on my buttocks.
Speaker 2 (08:05:56):
And then I focused on.
Speaker 4 (08:05:58):
The middle of my back, I almost felt like the
muscles in my lower back were being stretched very gently,
just stretched a little bit. Even though I wasn't doing
anything to try to stretch.
Speaker 3 (08:06:23):
Your lower back, it just seemed to happen.
Speaker 2 (08:06:27):
The feeling of.
Speaker 4 (08:06:30):
Very gently stretching your lower back comes along.
Speaker 2 (08:06:48):
I have feeling.
Speaker 3 (08:06:55):
In your chest, just.
Speaker 4 (08:07:04):
Noticing what sensations you are experiencing in your chest right now.
(08:07:30):
And there's so much of the chest. Of course, there's
the collar bone leading to the chest. You've got the
chest bone, You've got the muscles in your chest.
Speaker 2 (08:07:49):
Of course.
Speaker 4 (08:07:49):
If you're female, there's possibly the breasts. If you're male,
you've got the different well my not that different these days,
but there may be more muscles at the top of
(08:08:11):
the chest, but at the side underneath, it's pretty much
the same.
Speaker 3 (08:08:20):
Whether you're a man or a woman. There's muscles there, muscles.
Speaker 4 (08:08:25):
That stretch out to your back as well as breast
tissue stretches and moves into your back to just being
aware of your chest, being with whatever feeling there is
(08:09:00):
in your chest. And when I noticed that, I focus
on my chest. I feel it in my back, my
(08:09:26):
upper back. I mean, I guess the obvious reason would
be because you know I'll.
Speaker 3 (08:09:32):
Grieve in.
Speaker 2 (08:09:37):
In then it stretches my chest and my back at
the same time. It feels.
Speaker 3 (08:09:56):
It feels okay, doesn't feel.
Speaker 2 (08:10:07):
I got a little bit of pain in my right.
Speaker 3 (08:10:11):
Chest, a little bit, not pain, but little discomfort, maybe
stiffness possibly, I don't know. I notice my shoulders are also.
Speaker 2 (08:10:29):
Wanting to flex for some reason.
Speaker 3 (08:10:35):
I think that's probably part of my upper back, that
connection between my shoulders and my upper back, because I
can move my shoulders and stretch the muscles in my back,
(08:10:55):
moving the shoulders backwards or up, which then moves I
think it's the scapulous.
Speaker 2 (08:11:06):
In your back.
Speaker 4 (08:11:16):
It feels quite nice. Actually, A good thing about this
is you can, if you want to, you can just
flex or stimulate the various muscles in your body gently
(08:11:46):
in order to get more of a sense of how
they feel.
Speaker 3 (08:11:57):
And when you're relaxing, when you do tense and muscle
and you let it go and you let it relax.
It relaxes.
Speaker 2 (08:12:14):
Way more than it would normally. But you have to feel.
Speaker 4 (08:12:27):
That you're able to do that.
Speaker 2 (08:12:29):
There's no point in doing it if.
Speaker 3 (08:12:31):
There's an issue with the per part of your body.
You need to be gentle with yourself at all times
when relaxing deeply. It's important to be kind to yourself
(08:13:08):
as you notice your mind. How much has your mind
slowed down since we started this recording, How came and peaceful.
Speaker 2 (08:13:47):
Is your mind right now?
Speaker 3 (08:13:55):
We have nothing to think about, and you my voice
to listen to, because you know the intention behind this
recording is relaxation. At the very least, for you to
(08:14:20):
feel more relaxed at the end of the recording than.
Speaker 4 (08:14:25):
You did at the beginning. At the very least, for
your mind to slow down as your body.
Speaker 2 (08:14:45):
Continues to relax, because that's what you.
Speaker 4 (08:14:58):
Want to happen. That's what you expect to happen, for relaxation.
Speaker 2 (08:15:22):
To fill.
Speaker 4 (08:15:25):
Your body, maybe calm in your mind to the point
of boredom. When you start maybe to drift away, drift
(08:16:12):
in it's almost as if you're moving further away from
(08:16:35):
your body and your mind just leaving that there, kind
of liking it an escape pod in a spaceship a movie,
a space movie. You know, when they get into a
(08:16:57):
little part in it sends the man far away from
the spaceship, safe.
Speaker 2 (08:17:16):
To dream.
Speaker 4 (08:17:25):
And continued to relax, to drift in slow and peace,
(08:18:43):
so rare and peace, and focusing on.
Speaker 2 (08:19:21):
That feeling.
Speaker 3 (08:19:29):
Of those individual parts of your body, that relaxing.
Speaker 2 (08:19:42):
One by one.
Speaker 4 (08:19:50):
You may.
Speaker 2 (08:19:52):
Find that every now and then.
Speaker 3 (08:20:02):
You realize that you weren't listening.
Speaker 2 (08:20:09):
To my voice because your mind started to imagine something different,
maybe started to.
Speaker 3 (08:20:27):
Almost move into.
Speaker 4 (08:20:30):
Some kind of a dreamy state, and then you become
aware of my voice again. And even though you may
want to focus on my voice, you may also wish
(08:20:54):
to allow your mind to just drift naturally into that
space of comfort and safety.
Speaker 2 (08:21:19):
As you feel warm comfort.
Speaker 4 (08:21:31):
Spreading through your body like a warm blanket.
Speaker 2 (08:21:42):
Covering you chently, keeping your body it just.
Speaker 4 (08:21:54):
The perfect temperature, and even if you can hear background sounds,
(08:22:17):
they just don't seem to matter anymore.
Speaker 2 (08:22:28):
There's that sense of.
Speaker 3 (08:22:32):
Peace spreads through your mind like a gentle breeze, yet
strong enough to blow away.
Speaker 4 (08:22:55):
All negativity, strong enoughter remove from your mind any anxiety
or stress that was there before, and blow away any
(08:23:26):
other thoughts.
Speaker 2 (08:23:29):
Or feelings that just don't fit with the sense.
Speaker 3 (08:23:49):
Relaxation that is feeling.
Speaker 2 (08:24:00):
Your body and your mind.
Speaker 4 (08:24:21):
And as you focus on your mind and count down
from ten down to one, and with each number you hear,
your mind will become slightly more.
Speaker 3 (08:24:56):
Relaxed, just just slightly, from ten down to nine, just
a slight movement, from nine down to eight, just another.
Speaker 4 (08:25:17):
Small change in how you feel. Eight down to seven.
That feeling is a gap, almost like a gap that
(08:25:40):
starts to get wider, the gap between those feelings that
you used to have in your mind compared to the
feelings you have, the growing now feelings of comfort and
(08:26:05):
security and confidence, and the gap becomes wider. Eight down
to seven, seven down to six, And when you get
to five, the mind will start to have a certain
(08:26:32):
physical sensation, most like there's a magnet outside of your
head sucking the tension and the stress and any remaining
feelings that you don't want, sucking them out through your skull.
Speaker 2 (08:27:04):
And then down to four you could start to really
experience that sense of.
Speaker 4 (08:27:14):
Not just emptiness, but space, a place full of fresh air,
place where.
Speaker 2 (08:27:30):
You can stretch.
Speaker 4 (08:27:35):
It's almost as if as you go down to four
and three, your mind is expanding, with this sense of peace.
Speaker 2 (08:27:50):
And tranquility growing.
Speaker 4 (08:27:55):
As it moves down to When you get to one,
in mind just feels exactly how you want to feel,
almost perfect feeling, maybe a sensation that.
Speaker 2 (08:28:32):
You'd like to keep a place that's safe, where nothing
can affect you at all.
Speaker 21 (08:28:59):
And you can in that.
Speaker 3 (08:29:02):
Space of comfort and confidence, confident in your own ability
to create this space and this feeling of comfort within
your own mind.
Speaker 2 (08:29:22):
Just by counting ten.
Speaker 4 (08:29:26):
Down to one.
Speaker 2 (08:29:31):
And this is something that you can do yourself when
you're on your own.
Speaker 4 (08:29:41):
A time when you can maybe sit down, maybe just
for a few minutes, close your eyes, just counts slowly
from ten.
Speaker 2 (08:30:02):
Down to one.
Speaker 3 (08:30:07):
And re experience these feelings in your mind. And when
you feel that way in your mind, your body copies
(08:30:29):
your mind, and that feeling is spread through your spine
and your nervous system into every part of your body,
travels through your blood stream, healing and relaxing every article
(08:31:03):
of your existence.
Speaker 4 (08:31:17):
And we can we can practice this a few times
before the end of the recording, and then you can
practice on your own, and each time you count from
ten down to one.
Speaker 2 (08:31:43):
The feelings of comfort, calmness, and deep.
Speaker 4 (08:31:51):
Deep relaxation becomes stronger and deeper. Feeling your mind and
your brain with these positive chemicals that spread through your body,
(08:32:19):
relaxing you so quickly, relaxing your whole body and mind.
Speaker 2 (08:32:31):
So very very easily, just by counting for ten down
to one.
Speaker 4 (08:32:50):
So we're going to do now, I'm going to count
from ten down to one. I'd like you to repeat
the number after me. So when I say ten, you
can just repeat to yourself ten. Just notice, be aware
(08:33:18):
of how you feel in your mind and your body,
and when I say nine, you can repeat.
Speaker 3 (08:33:35):
To yourself.
Speaker 8 (08:33:39):
Nine.
Speaker 2 (08:33:43):
We gain noticing the increase.
Speaker 3 (08:33:49):
In comfort and calmness in your mind and in your body.
The same want to say eight.
Speaker 4 (08:34:08):
When I say seven, six, I want to say five, four,
when I say three, two, and lastly when I say one,
(08:34:38):
you can beat that number.
Speaker 8 (08:34:48):
Now.
Speaker 2 (08:34:48):
Of course, when you do this on your own.
Speaker 4 (08:34:53):
Without listening to me, you can say the numbers or
whatever speed that you feel is necessary for you, so
you can adapt. So you feel you want to say
(08:35:15):
the numbers ten down to one faster than I do.
Then you go ahead and do that, or if you
feel when you do it yourself that you'd like to
have more more space between the numbers, maybe take a
(08:35:38):
lot longer to get from ten.
Speaker 2 (08:35:43):
All the way down to one. That's your choice also
to do. So I'm gonna count from ten down to one.
(08:36:10):
I want to get to one. That will be the
end of this recording. The let's of course, you're listening
to music, and the music will continue.
Speaker 3 (08:36:31):
Ten nine, five, twenty, nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twelve.
Speaker 8 (08:41:48):
Eleven, ten.
Speaker 3 (08:41:58):
Nine, eight, seven, six, five, four, three.
Speaker 2 (08:42:33):
Two one. Now open your eyes, noticing.
Speaker 3 (08:42:56):
How you physically feel having counted out from twenty to one,
allowing stress and tension to leave through your fingertips and
your tastes. And as you focus on your fingertips.
Speaker 4 (08:43:15):
Maybe they feel a little bit tingling, which is I
suppose quite understanding, considering the tension has been exiting your
body through your fingertips.
Speaker 2 (08:43:35):
So now I'm going to count from twenty down to
one again.
Speaker 11 (08:43:38):
This time.
Speaker 1 (08:43:43):
You're to feel relief of tension and stress, any anxiety.
Speaker 21 (08:43:49):
That you may have.
Speaker 4 (08:43:55):
Leaving through your stomach, just leaving through your stomach, almost
as if it's just releasing.
Speaker 22 (08:44:08):
The whole of your stomach, your navel to just above
your chest or below your chest, rather so surrounding your
belly by an.
Speaker 2 (08:44:18):
Area, the whole area.
Speaker 4 (08:44:21):
You can feel the tension of your body where there's left,
just releasing from that area, and you may notice that
your stomach will become very relaxed.
Speaker 2 (08:44:35):
As I countdown from twenty down to one now twenty.
Speaker 3 (08:44:50):
Nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirty, twelve, eleven, ten, nine, eight, seven, six, five.
Speaker 8 (08:46:02):
Oh three.
Speaker 21 (08:46:11):
Two what.
Speaker 4 (08:46:22):
You can open your eyes again if you cheers, or
you can just keep them closed because it feels relaxing.
Speaker 3 (08:46:30):
Just notice saying your stomach feels Notice as your focus,
just do a little scan of your body, notice saying
your body feels focusing upper body, back, chest, stomach, les, arms, hands, feet,
(08:46:57):
just noticing, and you know you may start to feel
more a sense of tiredness, which may be the reason
listening to this recording, because you're like to.
Speaker 2 (08:47:18):
Let go completely of everything and drift.
Speaker 3 (08:47:25):
Off into a nice, natural, calm, relaxing sleep.
Speaker 2 (08:47:40):
So now the.
Speaker 4 (08:47:41):
Focus on your forehead, and if you choose, you can
incorporate your eyes in this focus as well, with your
forehead and your eyes whole area. Basically almost as if
(08:48:03):
you were wearing a mask, you know, like a batman
mask or something.
Speaker 23 (08:48:10):
Or.
Speaker 4 (08:48:13):
I'm trying to sorrow or something, you know, the kind
of mask that covers your eyes but also covers quite
a lot of the forehead. Focusing on that area because
that's the area that we're now going to release tension,
stress from your mind, your brain, from your mind, and
(08:48:35):
any tension that you may have remain in your face,
in your neck, your jaw, your eyes, and your forehead
or your scalp.
Speaker 3 (08:48:49):
So basically any intension within your head area, including your
mind and your brain that's going to be released through
your fullhead in your eyes. As I count down again
(08:49:10):
from twenty down to one now twenty nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twelve, eleven, ten, nine, eight, seven, six.
Speaker 2 (08:50:35):
Five, four, three, one, noticing.
Speaker 4 (08:51:06):
As you scared your face with jaw, your eyes of
cheap bads, your ears, your forehead.
Speaker 2 (08:51:19):
Your scalp, your neck, back of your neck, front of
your neck.
Speaker 4 (08:51:27):
The size of your neck, and your throat. Noticing being
aware of the comfort.
Speaker 2 (08:51:41):
Increased in.
Speaker 4 (08:51:46):
Relaxation, not just in your head and neck and mind,
will say the rest of your body.
Speaker 3 (08:52:00):
Just note sound loose.
Speaker 2 (08:52:03):
And calm you felt. How easily.
Speaker 21 (08:52:09):
It is to just let go.
Speaker 2 (08:52:13):
Completely, they go completely?
Speaker 4 (08:52:28):
How easy?
Speaker 21 (08:52:37):
So I need to do bow is.
Speaker 2 (08:52:40):
To focus on the top of your head and we
can allowed every last piece of tension or.
Speaker 3 (08:52:56):
Stress the way be lingery hiding in your body, your mind,
on my head.
Speaker 21 (08:53:06):
Just be sucked down on the top of your head
at least.
Speaker 4 (08:53:18):
Yeahs sack down into the clouds. Magine a big cloud
of put the head almost like a whirlpool.
Speaker 21 (08:53:31):
It's is gonna.
Speaker 4 (08:53:32):
Suck that tension.
Speaker 21 (08:53:35):
Out the top of your head.
Speaker 4 (08:53:39):
Just take away, good.
Speaker 2 (08:53:46):
You focus.
Speaker 4 (08:53:47):
Imagine an opening on top of your head without tension
stressed in remaining issues maybe worries of the sad st
u st Now you will all be sucked down. Lad,
I've taken away. As I count down again, twenty down
(08:54:13):
to one now twenty nineteen, eighteen, seventy sixteen fifty.
Speaker 21 (08:54:59):
Four tea too well.
Speaker 2 (08:55:19):
Even day nine eight.
Speaker 3 (08:55:46):
Seven six.
Speaker 21 (08:55:56):
Boy ooh.
Speaker 2 (08:56:06):
Three wa. Pray you notice it how you feel.
Speaker 4 (08:56:40):
How relaxed and calm you physically and mentally feel.
Speaker 2 (08:56:49):
Right now, help peaceful.
Speaker 4 (08:56:59):
You might feels.
Speaker 3 (08:57:03):
It feels so nice to just let go, to give
yourself some space to breathe easily, to think calmly.
Speaker 4 (08:57:22):
Just to take a break from all that pointless worry
concerns about things that you don't need to think about
right now, because.
Speaker 21 (08:57:42):
This is your time to let go.
Speaker 2 (08:57:45):
This is your space to enjoy.
Speaker 4 (08:57:49):
Feeling deeply relaxed, peaceful in your mind, relaxed in your body.
You can feel so good, so nice to just not
(08:58:11):
have to do anything, to be able to really enjoy
that serenity that comes of letting go completely, that peacefulness that.
Speaker 8 (08:58:31):
Comes with.
Speaker 21 (08:58:38):
Being in this.
Speaker 3 (08:58:41):
Peaceful space. And you can keep this sense of calmness
for as long as you choose. If you choose to
(08:59:04):
drift off into a deep, healing, natural sleep, then you
can do that. It's completely up to you, and you
can keep this feeling of calmness physically and in your mind.
Speaker 2 (08:59:29):
It's long as you choose to feel.
Speaker 4 (08:59:33):
Completely relaxed, completely relaxed, and I'd like you to make
up your mind, then you got to relax. I want
(09:00:03):
to explore that with you, what it feels like when
you actually decide that you're going to relax not forcing yourself,
but giving yourself that.
Speaker 2 (09:00:20):
Yes, it is a command, really, isn't it When.
Speaker 4 (09:00:22):
You're telling yourself relax in a gentle but firm way,
that only you.
Speaker 21 (09:00:33):
Can really.
Speaker 2 (09:00:35):
Tell yourself in that way.
Speaker 4 (09:00:38):
You can't really have someone.
Speaker 2 (09:00:39):
Else saying to you and now it relax, relax.
Speaker 4 (09:00:43):
You know.
Speaker 21 (09:00:45):
It needs to be.
Speaker 4 (09:00:46):
Gentle, but you can't. Someone else can't really have the
same the same kind of influence or power that you
have over your own physicality, over how you feel, because
(09:01:12):
when you say it to yourself, it means more.
Speaker 2 (09:01:18):
It's personal, and.
Speaker 4 (09:01:21):
Your brain and your unconscious mind and your body listens
to what you say. So for example, we'll test it
out and do a little test if you little tests
along the way, and you can get more of an
idea of the force, a positive force that you can
(09:01:46):
have in creating a sense of comfort and relaxation.
Speaker 2 (09:01:53):
In your body and your mind quite quickly.
Speaker 3 (09:01:59):
Just buying you telling yourself.
Speaker 2 (09:02:03):
To relax.
Speaker 4 (09:02:09):
So I'm going to start by it's focus on your hands.
Speaker 2 (09:02:16):
So focus on your hands and just tell your hands
to relax, and just say relax.
Speaker 4 (09:02:23):
As you focus on your hands, you could say my
hands are relaxed, or I want my hands to relax.
Speaker 2 (09:02:35):
I think if you actually do it.
Speaker 4 (09:02:36):
Directly by focusing and imagining that your hands.
Speaker 2 (09:02:44):
Can hear what you're saying.
Speaker 21 (09:02:46):
You know, they've got little ears, you see a little weird.
Speaker 4 (09:02:51):
So talking to your hands and just say relax, nodicine
how your hands start to relax. Now, focus on your
(09:03:24):
eyes and tell your eyes to relax. If you just
say in the same word relax and find the right
tone for you. You know, I might say relax, but
you you might say relax or relax. You know, you
(09:03:49):
might say it differently to yourself, and that's important for
you to gauge what feels right for you. To just
tell your.
Speaker 2 (09:04:02):
Eyes to relax, whilst focusing.
Speaker 4 (09:04:06):
On your eyes, your eyelids, the muscles around your eyes,
your eyebrows, and just tell your eyes directly relax now. Now,
(09:04:47):
I just did that myself, And sometimes you may feel that.
Speaker 21 (09:04:58):
You need a bit more time.
Speaker 4 (09:05:02):
Or the different parts to relax, you know, because I
started talking again and maybe that part hasn't relaxed fully.
But what happened is that we just continue to relax
even don't talking, And that's happened with my eyes.
Speaker 3 (09:05:21):
Something else I noticed is.
Speaker 2 (09:05:24):
When I started focusing on my eyes.
Speaker 4 (09:05:27):
That actually almost became they got worse before they got
better in a way. So I felt a degree of
tension growing in my eyes and then disappearing. So I
think what that was really it was just me becoming more.
Speaker 2 (09:05:43):
Aware of the tension that was already.
Speaker 4 (09:05:48):
There, but I wasn't I wasn't focused on it before,
so I wasn't really acknowledging it or really conscious to
those feelings. Yeah, my eyes is still continuing to relax,
(09:06:16):
as well as my hands. Actually, my hands have got
a certain kind of energy, like not buzzing, but I
can kind of feel a degree of energy in my hands.
(09:06:36):
Maybe that's where the tension is being released. Maybe that's
causing that.
Speaker 2 (09:06:49):
The next part, I think we should focus on the
back of the neck.
Speaker 21 (09:06:52):
That's the part is quite often.
Speaker 2 (09:06:56):
Well for me, holds tension.
Speaker 4 (09:06:57):
I don't know about it for yourself, that I think
is quite a standard place where attention is sometimes held. So,
and I'm doing it exactly what you're doing as you
do it as well, so I'm telling my body parts
to relax as well.
Speaker 21 (09:07:17):
So if you tell your neck the back of your neck.
Speaker 2 (09:07:20):
Focus on the back of your neck and just say.
Speaker 4 (09:07:25):
Relax in your own words, in your own tone, in
your own voice. You can say out loud, or you
can just say it to yourself internally. But you're focusing
and you're saying it literally to the back of your neck,
as if the back of your neck can actually hear
(09:07:46):
what you're seeing. So do that now, Just say relax
to the back of your neck, and I'll do the same.
(09:08:35):
Then what I noticed, and you may have had similar
thing is even though I was focusing on the back
of the neck, other parts started to I don't know
showed themselves to me or maybe because they want to
(09:08:58):
be relaxed as well. But I started noticing the feelings
in my shoulders, at tension in my shoulders and in
my upper back. Whether that was because my back of
my neck was saying I'm pretty much okay. It's the
(09:09:19):
other parts that need attention, but my low of my
back of my neck is still relaxing.
Speaker 2 (09:09:31):
But I just became more aware of other parts that
needed attention.
Speaker 21 (09:09:38):
Now, this might happen, and it's not.
Speaker 4 (09:09:42):
It doesn't mean that it's going wrong. It just means
you're being notified of more places but also want to
feel relaxed.
Speaker 2 (09:09:56):
So I'm going to focus on.
Speaker 21 (09:09:58):
My upper back, so you can do the same, even
if you don't have any.
Speaker 4 (09:10:06):
Feelings of tension that are obvious in your other back.
Speaker 2 (09:10:12):
You just focus on your back the whole area from
the shoulder blades.
Speaker 21 (09:10:18):
Down to the middle of your back, and.
Speaker 2 (09:10:22):
Your spine needs more, the shoulder blades more.
Speaker 21 (09:10:32):
Yeah, that's the parts they're really sort of given me.
Speaker 3 (09:10:39):
That, not.
Speaker 2 (09:10:41):
That it needs relaxing.
Speaker 21 (09:10:43):
The sounds gonna ask that much to relax, and you
can do the same.
Speaker 2 (09:10:47):
Now, relax up. There's something strange happened there.
Speaker 8 (09:11:14):
And this.
Speaker 4 (09:11:16):
Often happens.
Speaker 2 (09:11:17):
I've been doing this.
Speaker 4 (09:11:20):
For sixteen years or something, and often I'm one surprised
but amazed.
Speaker 21 (09:11:29):
Really bad.
Speaker 4 (09:11:32):
It can be a feeling. So when I was focusing
on the back of my neck, the back was starting
to feel quite stressed and in need of attention. As
soon as I started talking to you about.
Speaker 21 (09:11:50):
My upper back and talking.
Speaker 4 (09:11:53):
About, you know, getting ready to ask the upper back
to relax, like the back, he started to relax. It's
almost as if it doesn't need to hear the words,
just needs intention, just needs to be noticed. That is
(09:12:26):
something that often happens in this.
Speaker 2 (09:12:30):
Type of situation.
Speaker 4 (09:12:33):
Is when you start to relax a couple of parts
of your body, as we've done with our hands, our
eyes and eyelids, and now.
Speaker 21 (09:12:49):
Back of the neck, top of the back, up the bank.
Speaker 4 (09:12:58):
The rest of the body seems to just take notice.
Speaker 2 (09:13:04):
And decide in its own way to start relaxing.
Speaker 21 (09:13:12):
Other plants of your body.
Speaker 4 (09:13:14):
Start to just.
Speaker 21 (09:13:17):
Become loser.
Speaker 4 (09:13:23):
I suppose it's kind of like a bit of an avalanche,
you know, the little ball starts rolling before you know it.
The whole of your body is completely relaxed and cold.
(09:13:43):
And if you focus on your face, you focus on
your eyes, the eyelids, your eyebrows, and the muscles around
your eyes. Maybe you start to notice that your forehead
(09:14:09):
is more relaxed.
Speaker 23 (09:14:10):
Than it was.
Speaker 4 (09:14:13):
Maybe your face is more relaxed.
Speaker 21 (09:14:18):
I would say my entire face is a lot more
relaxed than it was.
Speaker 4 (09:14:34):
So I'm going to focus now on your shoulders again,
just like before.
Speaker 21 (09:14:42):
Just tell your.
Speaker 4 (09:14:43):
Shoulders and you can do them individually. You can do
right shoulder and left shoulder. I just didn't do both
at the same time. Just tell your shoulders as you
focus on them in your mind some heavy film, maybe
(09:15:03):
you can see them in your mindside. Just tell your shoulders.
Speaker 2 (09:15:14):
To relax.
Speaker 21 (09:15:52):
It's nice as they relax.
Speaker 4 (09:16:04):
But didn't notice. I mean, especially with my back, is
the connection between the different parts the back and shoulders,
the neck being more connected and being such a large.
Speaker 21 (09:16:29):
Part of your body, it's always hard to.
Speaker 4 (09:16:34):
Separate them from each other. My lower back is starting
to relax on the.
Speaker 21 (09:16:44):
Same Maybe I'm going too.
Speaker 4 (09:16:51):
Slow and that could be an issue because we will
go at different speeds.
Speaker 2 (09:17:01):
And the idea of giving that this recording.
Speaker 4 (09:17:05):
Was for you to be able to just say to yourself,
relax without focusing on any particular part of your body.
(09:17:26):
Because when you know that, turning your hands.
Speaker 21 (09:17:32):
To relax and your hand relax, you tell.
Speaker 4 (09:17:41):
Your eyelids, your eyes and muscles around your eyes and
your eyebrows to relax, and they relax.
Speaker 2 (09:18:03):
Until the back of your neck.
Speaker 4 (09:18:08):
Relax, relaxes, until you're up the back legs differ, relaxes.
Speaker 2 (09:18:50):
You tell your shoulders.
Speaker 4 (09:18:54):
To relax, they relaxed. You told your hands to relax,
(09:19:32):
They relaxed, and they continued to relax. You told your eyelids,
the muscles around your eyes, your eyebrows to relax.
Speaker 2 (09:19:54):
They relaxed.
Speaker 21 (09:19:58):
And conte h to relax.
Speaker 23 (09:20:08):
And you told the back of your neck, on the
back of your neck.
Speaker 21 (09:20:16):
And told it to relax.
Speaker 2 (09:20:22):
And relaxed.
Speaker 21 (09:20:25):
And continued to relax. And you told you are welcome back.
Speaker 4 (09:20:42):
To relax, be relaxed, and continued to relax.
Speaker 21 (09:20:58):
That's what your shoulders.
Speaker 4 (09:21:02):
Told your shoulders to relax, and your shoulders relaxed, tens
to relax.
Speaker 8 (09:21:22):
And it's not just that, it's.
Speaker 4 (09:21:30):
But the rest of your body is also been listening.
The relaxation has been spreading.
Speaker 11 (09:21:41):
So from your.
Speaker 4 (09:21:41):
Eyes, the relaxation spread to your forehead, round your face.
Speaker 21 (09:21:49):
Into your skin, intouture.
Speaker 4 (09:22:02):
To the fronts and sides of the baby, my dad,
chest and stom.
Speaker 2 (09:22:15):
Relaxed hands and shoulders.
Speaker 21 (09:22:19):
Meets up through your arms, relaxing from arms too, upper arms,
no birds, your wrists. Let's go back hips, but exploy.
(09:22:52):
Just start to relax and tea comforts spreading through your eggs,
poor way down your ankles, the tops of your feet,
(09:23:17):
the sight of your feet, the bottoms of your feet, relaxing,
der toes to lexicles, and it's.
Speaker 2 (09:23:58):
Your body relaxing.
Speaker 4 (09:24:00):
Want your mind comes slower, peaceful.
Speaker 21 (09:24:23):
It's a point where, if you choose, it's a fool asleep.
He can easily do that easy drift the way because
(09:24:53):
it's nothing you have only your mind right, it is
peaceful your body. You teens two lines that you picture
(09:25:42):
between the body and relaxing. The word you say to
yourself lights mean steppy day eat, the focus on just
(09:26:03):
one part. You can just focus on your retire body.
Say aboutful word, that's it's uh, that's sensations of elephants
(09:26:46):
spading throughout the body. You say, easing every moment to
be by rest.
Speaker 8 (09:27:30):
So what you need to do for now, just.
Speaker 11 (09:27:36):
Tell him something.
Speaker 21 (09:27:40):
Nice being beaten, starting down becomper tighty ninety eighteen seventy
(09:28:59):
six fifty four eight zero.
Speaker 23 (09:32:28):
Yes, yes.
Speaker 21 (09:33:56):
U ss ss m.
Speaker 23 (09:39:10):
M m m so.
Speaker 21 (09:42:20):
Capta down ten to one.
Speaker 23 (09:42:23):
Ten nine.
Speaker 21 (09:42:27):
Eight seven.
Speaker 23 (09:42:33):
Six five.
Speaker 4 (09:42:38):
Four three.
Speaker 21 (09:42:44):
Two one. And maybe that was a little too quick
in order to lace you go too fast to this
(09:43:05):
calm of the body. Maybe even.
Speaker 23 (09:43:14):
You're count down things one escape man, it's certainly just
the do.
Speaker 11 (09:43:22):
It just because you're count down.
Speaker 21 (09:43:30):
Fine, it's time, bus line, it's time you focus.
Speaker 23 (09:43:39):
On your body before.
Speaker 21 (09:43:46):
Just wights.
Speaker 2 (09:43:49):
And your body does.
Speaker 21 (09:43:52):
Start right eight seven
Speaker 13 (09:44:36):
Six as
Hello, and welcome to Jasonnewland dot com. My name is
Jason Newland and this is let Me pull you to sleep.
Please only listen when you can safely close your eyes.
Speaker 2 (00:27):
Blah blah blah.
Speaker 1 (00:31):
So yeah, it's Sunday, the seventeenth of August two thousand
and twenty five.
Speaker 2 (00:50):
Yeah, it's been.
Speaker 1 (00:53):
I mean, technically it's been quite a busy week, but
really just because of all the recordings I made, but
I only made like since Monday, I've only made to
(01:15):
let Me boy you to sleep recordings. I didn't do
a Q and A Friday this week because or last
week where if you want to call it, you know,
this previous Friday because I got one question.
Speaker 3 (01:35):
I know, perhaps I left it a little bit late
to post on the Facebook group.
Speaker 1 (01:41):
You know, any questions, But maybe I should just stop
doing the Q and A Friday if no one's if
there's no more questions, then there's no more answers. I
can't answer questions that are not asked. So yeah, if
you want me to continue to do the Q and
A Friday, then please, I mean, you can send a
(02:07):
question in via my website if you want, and I'll
just add it to a list of questions. Just let
me know it's for this coming Q and A Friday,
and I'll add it because there's a contact form on
my website, or you can you know, when I post
(02:30):
any Q and A questions for Q and a Friday
on my Facebook group, which is Jason Newland's Boring Group,
you can maybe leave a question there as well, or
instead of you know whatever.
Speaker 2 (02:49):
But yeah, I can't.
Speaker 1 (02:53):
I'm not going to do it if there's no questions,
because it seems a little bit I mean, there was
one question. I mean, in all fairness, I probably could
have made that one question last for a bad an hour.
But the question really was.
Speaker 3 (03:10):
Whether or not I preferred personal questions or non personal questions?
And has there been any times that I haven't answered
a question because it was too personal?
Speaker 1 (03:28):
So I can kind of answer that here in a
sense of generally, I'm open to most questions. If it's
a question that I don't really want to answer, then
I will be purposefully vague, I suppose, or I will
(03:52):
distract myself and move on to something else.
Speaker 3 (03:56):
I don't know, it's I'm not I'm not great with
family questions because that is personal. But also I don't
really have much in a way of family to talk about. Really, Yeah,
(04:16):
as long as it's about me, it's fine. I'm okay.
You know, I talk about myself. That's the only thing
I've really got any right to talk about, really, isn't
it in a sense? I mean, you know, I've done
a few done some podcasts about step moms and stuff,
but that was all nice things that I talked about.
(04:41):
So yeah, generally, if it's about me, that's kind of
what the the Q and a Friday's for. But it
can be about you as well. It can be like
you could ask my opinion on something. You could ask me.
Speaker 1 (05:00):
Because I've been in life for so long. You can
ask me about world events maybe that's happened during my lifetime.
Asked me about English culture. If you live in another country, you.
Speaker 2 (05:21):
Could ask me.
Speaker 1 (05:27):
Jobs, places I've lived, girlfriends, hobbies, interests, TV programs I liked, music,
movies I've seen.
Speaker 2 (05:56):
Yeah, really, it's.
Speaker 3 (06:00):
I think sometimes I'm better at some of the older
stuff because if something because let's.
Speaker 2 (06:09):
Say, if I went to.
Speaker 3 (06:12):
Someone slamming the doors downstairs like constantly, and I really
don't know why they've been doing it for about twenty minutes,
just slamming it. Well, let it slam over and over
and over again, which is very sor I never got
a dog dog barking. That's why these recordings are so
(06:36):
much better than hypnosis recordings, because I can't I have
to stop talking. If a dog barks in the background.
With these recordings, all sounds are fine. I mean, maybe
not for you.
Speaker 1 (06:52):
But generally it's in a distance, it's in the background,
and it's either make a recording or don't make a recording.
(07:12):
One of the things that starts that dog off and
also starts venning off, and also starts another dog around
the corner off or across the road off is this cat.
So this lady that lives in a building opposite, she's
put bells on her cat's collars. Now, I thought she
(07:36):
did it just to annoy the docks, but she didn't.
She did it to warn birds. So actually she's done
it for a really nice reason. But the side effect
of this particular medication is dogs hear it. I mean
(07:58):
he can hear it in the middle of the night
and he starts barking sometimes or growling. And I know what,
I'll look out the window.
Speaker 3 (08:08):
I can just make out the cat, and the cat's
just standing in the garden staring up.
Speaker 2 (08:16):
At the window.
Speaker 1 (08:18):
Proper wind up merchant that one. So it's weird, isn't it.
Speaker 4 (08:24):
It's what she's doing is a really good thing to have,
because I really love birds.
Speaker 3 (08:37):
But there's always there's a it seems to be a
what do they call that thing? Not a brush off,
a playoff the downside, I don't know.
Speaker 1 (08:55):
Yeah, it's not a win win situation. It's a win
win situation for the birds, which I'm really pleased about.
It's not a win win situation for the cat. So
the cat doesn't get to catch.
Speaker 3 (09:13):
Birds, which is good, but a cat does get to
get some pleasure from annoying the dogs, which I imagine is
quite pleasant for it. Now, it's not a win situation
for the dogs, unless, of course, the dogs.
Speaker 2 (09:30):
Getting excited.
Speaker 1 (09:30):
So Vinnie might actually be enjoying barking when he hears
the cat. It's more excitement than anger or anything, so.
Speaker 2 (09:44):
Bless him.
Speaker 3 (09:47):
Yeah, so Uncle's sausages. The funeral has been changed. It
was on the toy. It's supposed to be on the
twenty first of August, but they haven't got the birth
the death certificate yet. So it's been put off till
(10:07):
another week.
Speaker 2 (10:11):
So that was that's weird.
Speaker 1 (10:14):
The I had to get the counseling for the mouse
exterminator people. I'm not sure what you call them, animal
prevention unit. I don't know, vermin control, something like that.
(10:38):
And they came in last Friday and they put down bait,
and they came back this Friday and said there's nothing
in there. There's no They put stuff in the into
the lofts and everything, and there's nothing, no sign, not
(10:59):
a single sausage, excuse the pun.
Speaker 3 (11:04):
And it's all the residue, all the leftovers from the
previous mister that.
Speaker 2 (11:13):
So it's not.
Speaker 3 (11:14):
Yeah, it's old historic, he said, which is good. It's
not good in a sense, but it's good obviously for
the rest of the building because we don't want those
things running around. But it's not it's like he was
living with all that stuff around. He didn't even know it.
Speaker 2 (11:40):
So the.
Speaker 1 (11:43):
I'm thinking that the council are going to come in
and start emptying his place, probably in the next week
or so. So I've still got his key to let
them in, and then that'll be the whole process coming
and emptying it and painting and all that stuff and
(12:09):
getting a place ready for the next tenant and a
new a new adventure begins, hopefully a quiet adventure.
Speaker 2 (12:18):
But we'll see.
Speaker 1 (12:22):
Yeah, I could, really, I really don't need a new
neighbor opposite me.
Speaker 2 (12:28):
You know.
Speaker 3 (12:28):
It's the noisy ones, the ones downstairs, and then there's
a couple. Well one's moved out now, but there was
a couple that slammed the door continuously downstairs. Now it
shakes the building. It's really loud. It echoes through the
hallway and stuff.
Speaker 1 (12:47):
And it's one thing downstairs, but here, if I had
the same thing happening opposite me, it's going to be
I think it will be disturbable, disturbable, disturbably loud, And
(13:08):
I don't know, I'm not looking forward to that because.
Speaker 3 (13:12):
There seems to be two types of people in this world,
those that know how to close doors and those that
don't know how to close doors. I didn't think it'd
be too complicated, you know, and so considerate people and
inconsiderate people. But I also realized as I got older, that.
Speaker 1 (13:37):
Inconsiderate people aren't actually quite often doing it to be
harmful to other people. They're just not thinking they're just
they're just going about their business, going about their life.
They're not even noticing the doors slamming when they leave,
(13:59):
and perhaps not noticing they've got loud music at night,
or you know, they're just they're not doing it purposefully
to cause problems.
Speaker 2 (14:10):
I think some people.
Speaker 3 (14:11):
Just they're just not aware of or not aware but
not aware that other people are around they can hear.
Maybe they assume that they're everything they can hear is
just for their ears and no one else can hear it.
(14:35):
Have you ever seen someone on public transport talking about
someone else and they're literally like ten foot away, but
that person can hear you.
Speaker 2 (14:49):
I can hear you, and I'm in the next town.
It seems to Yes, it's kind of weird. One no
one can hear me. Yeah, they can hear.
Speaker 1 (15:03):
You, you know, when we're not not everybody.
Speaker 2 (15:09):
But so that would be interesting.
Speaker 1 (15:14):
I mean, I hope it will take a while before
they get anyone in there, and I hope when they do,
it's not going to be.
Speaker 3 (15:28):
You know, it's going to be Yeah, well I hope
it's going to be a nice person, that's all.
Speaker 2 (15:35):
Someone that's.
Speaker 1 (15:37):
Idea is someone that's older, someone that's maybe but I
don't think it really matters about agees that they're nice,
nice and quiet.
Speaker 5 (15:49):
That would be nice, Yeah, I think quiet.
Speaker 1 (15:55):
How many people have I had lived here, not in
my flat, but live in this building since I've been
here for ten years.
Speaker 2 (16:05):
Ten and a half years now.
Speaker 6 (16:09):
Oh so when I moved in, we had her him, him, him.
Speaker 1 (16:21):
So there was someone when I moved in, there was
Uncle's Sausages. He's been here the whole he was here
the whole time until recently.
Speaker 3 (16:39):
And then next to him there was someone that was
there for a while and then he moved out, and
then someone else moved in. I didn't realize it was
a different person. But he's been in there for a
long time, and I'll get on really well with him
as well, So he's cool. He's about eighty. And then
(17:08):
so this has kind of been the same for a
long time, the last probably eight years. This has pretty
much been the same upstairs until now. Downstairs there's someone
that's been there the whole time as well as she
(17:29):
was here when I moved in, not below me, but
one of the flats downstairs. And then in the other
flat next to the one I was just talking about downstairs,
that was where my friend Luke lived, and.
Speaker 7 (17:51):
He was.
Speaker 3 (17:54):
I think he's been there for like two, two or
three years before I moved in, at least a couple
of years before I moved in.
Speaker 8 (18:05):
So.
Speaker 2 (18:07):
And he was here until.
Speaker 1 (18:12):
What month is it now, August, September, October, November, so
it'll be two years in November that he left.
Speaker 8 (18:25):
Let me dark shut up.
Speaker 1 (18:31):
I do wonder if she just the owner of that
doctor's prods it to make it bark.
Speaker 2 (18:37):
Because it's too quiet and we need noise. Bark. That's good.
I haven't got to think now, just make lot noise.
We need noise.
Speaker 1 (18:51):
So when he left, the counsel came and did their
thing and all that stuff.
Speaker 2 (19:01):
But it did take.
Speaker 1 (19:04):
Quite a long time before anyone moved in, so it
was a good.
Speaker 3 (19:23):
I don't know if I just got a feeling it
was last summer, but maybe kind of April May time,
so December, January, February, March April, so at least five
or six months before someone moved in there. Yeah, so
(19:43):
it wasn't it might have been March April.
Speaker 2 (19:47):
It was all I know.
Speaker 1 (19:48):
It's very very sunny, so maybe four five months, so
it's quite it's quite a long time. I mean the
longer the better. The longer it takes, the better.
Speaker 2 (20:03):
I think.
Speaker 3 (20:04):
Not for people that are waiting for housing, obviously it's
not good for them, just for the tenants, you know,
just have that little break. That's I don't know, a
bit selfish, isn't I suppose. Sorry, I give myself permission
(20:27):
to be selfish once a day, and that was my
little selfish moment. So and then so soone moved in
there into to loose flat about.
Speaker 2 (20:46):
I don't know.
Speaker 1 (20:48):
I'm sure it's about May, but there might have been earlier.
Speaker 2 (20:54):
And then.
Speaker 3 (21:01):
She's moved out already as far as I know, she's
moved out a couple of weeks ago. So that tenant's gone.
So there's now another flat.
Speaker 2 (21:13):
Empty, but the council haven't come.
Speaker 1 (21:15):
In to refurbish it. So I'm not sure what's going on.
All I know is she moved I've been told that
she's moved out.
Speaker 2 (21:32):
And then.
Speaker 1 (21:34):
Downstairs, so we've got two flats empty at the moment,
but both kind of just been lived in it as
it were, you know, so they need to be what
the counse would normally do, you know, if there's stuff
in there like there was still some stuff in there
(21:55):
with Luke. They come in and they take all the
stuff out and they put it to the back of
a like a lorry van thing, you know, those cage vans.
And I don't know obviously where you live, I'm not
(22:16):
sure what it's like, but they kind of they use
quite often for cutting, like you know, the grass cutters
are doing parks and stuff, and they chuck stuff in
the back there. So it's got a cage. It's not
it's not got a top on it, but it's got
a cage at the side, so then it doesn't you know,
and they can open it at the back and put
(22:37):
stuff on and wheel stuff into it. I mean, it's
probably used in building sites that kind of things. Well,
I don't know, but I imagine, well they use that's
what they generally seem to use, so they chuck stuff
on there. Then there's a while because I guess the
(23:01):
process depends well how quick the process is depends on
how many flats need to be done, because they've got
limited workers to do it, I imagine. So you know,
if suddenly one hundred flats become available, a hundred properties
(23:25):
become available in one month, they're going to struggle to
do that many they're going it's gonna take a while,
I guess, but there I don't be honest, I don't
really know what the council actually do.
Speaker 2 (23:42):
To the property.
Speaker 3 (23:44):
I mean, once they take everything out, which they I know,
they take the carpet out as well. The only way
you get to have a carpet is if you do
a council swap with someone else. So, for example, I'd
love to live in Talkie. It's a long way away,
(24:08):
but I just think it's beautiful place or maybe something
like Cornwall or you know, somewhere that's just nice visually
nice with a beach.
Speaker 1 (24:23):
And yeah, I'm not, I'm not. I mean, this is
okay as a base, but it's not. I'm very secluded
here and I do like beaches and I've lived on
(24:44):
a well, I've lived in towns with beaches three times,
including Buttlings. I mean technically, well was not. Technically there
was a beach there, but I think I only went
to it twice and it was winter, so it wasn't.
(25:06):
Really I'm pretty sure the beach was. I think that
part of the beach might have been private just for no,
it wouldn't have been private with it.
Speaker 2 (25:21):
I don't know anyway.
Speaker 3 (25:24):
I remember I did go there a couple of times
at late at night, and it's very windy, very cold,
very rainy.
Speaker 2 (25:36):
Yeah, I do quite like beaches.
Speaker 3 (25:37):
I lived in South End when I was a little kid,
and back then South End was a very popular place
for holiday goes, and I mean it probably I think
Blackpool was always the most popular. I think, but I
(26:02):
think what happened and I might be I'm partly making
this up, is depending on where you lived in the country,
when it came to a holiday, you'd go to the
popular place that's in that part of the country. So
(26:24):
if you lived in I suppose Liverpool or Manchester and
stuff like that, you perhaps traveled to Blackpool. If you
lived in London, perhaps you travel to South End or
to Clacton. And if you're in Essex, maybe Clacton or
(26:48):
South End because both of those are in South End.
So and it's probably the same in other places, you
know where you'd go to a place where.
Speaker 1 (27:03):
There's I'm trying to think the East Coast Yarmouth. Yarmouth
was a very popular place. Yarmouth Beach is one of
the nicest beaches I ever went to in this country.
It was a long time ago. I went on a
school trip. Was there a school trip?
Speaker 8 (27:26):
Wow?
Speaker 2 (27:26):
Why I've always gone squeaky?
Speaker 1 (27:31):
Why did I go to Yarmouth? I went on a
trip with someone, but I don't know why I went.
Maybe it was with the see Cadets, or maybe it
(27:54):
was a school trip. Might be the school trip, might
be in the cecredets. But I've got a memory of it.
And I think one of the blokes, one of the kids,
met a girl while he was there, and he was
not in the Cecredets, So I think it was just
(28:16):
a school trip and we went to Yarmouth for some
reason for the day and stuff like that.
Speaker 2 (28:25):
It's brilliant.
Speaker 3 (28:28):
Yeah, probably that's what's a memory I forgot about. Yeah.
Speaker 2 (28:38):
I remember running on the beach.
Speaker 3 (28:44):
And just like the sea coming up and I'm kissing
my girlfriend and she's like, we're upset because she's going back.
She's on holidays, she was going back to Australia and I.
Speaker 1 (29:00):
To go back to school. I wait a minute, as
speakinning of Greece. No, but there's definitely a beach. There
was a beach. I'll tell you another beach, really lovely,
really Lower Stuft, so the East Coast if you ever
do come to if you live up north, or you
(29:21):
live in Scotland or Wales or the middle of the
country Norwige. I mean, if you live in the South area,
you're probably going to know about the East Coast. But
there's some really nice beaches here. Now, I don't think
(29:41):
anyone's going to come from Wales to go visiting beaches
other parts of the UK because Wales has some of
the most beautiful beaches in the world. I think I
covered myself there. Good does Scotland have beaches?
Speaker 3 (30:03):
So I said, do Scotland have Wales? See, I have
been to Scotland, but I was a tiny kid. I
think I lived there for a while. I'd like to go. Well,
do I say Scotland, I'd like to go to Scotland.
I'd like to It's one of those places like I've
been to Wales.
Speaker 2 (30:22):
Multiple times over the years.
Speaker 1 (30:24):
I've been told I live in England, but I've been
to lots and lots of places in England. I lived
in Newcastle, lived in South End, lived in East Anglia,
lived in Essex, lived in London. Yes, I lived in
(30:47):
the Northeast in the South I've been to.
Speaker 3 (30:55):
You know, a lot of the places I've been to Nottingham, Liverpool, Manchester,
Bolton and most of the towns in this on the
east coast area, you know, all those different beccles and
(31:19):
lowest staffed Yarmouth, all those places in Norfolk as well.
I've been to lots of places in Norfolk over the
years in the past, not recently.
Speaker 2 (31:36):
And I just.
Speaker 3 (31:40):
Haven't really as an adult or as a like a
because when I was there, I was too young to
really know where I was.
Speaker 1 (31:49):
When I was in Scotland, that is so my oldest
brother said, we lived in Scotland for a while, but
I don't recollect it. I don't remember it because I
was I might have even been a baby, not a baby,
but like two years old or something, which is still
a baby, isn't it really?
Speaker 2 (32:10):
And I'd like to go.
Speaker 1 (32:17):
To Scotland just to visit and because I would be
a tourist like my dad is literally not literally.
Speaker 2 (32:24):
Because it was a while back, but.
Speaker 3 (32:27):
Probably about two months ago for sus yeah, probably about
two months ago. He was in Scotland on holiday and
he did a little tour of Scotland and I'm not
sure where he went, because I've got family and well,
(32:50):
my ancestry. Although forty eight percent Irish, I am about
two percent Scottish or four percent Scottish, so you know,
my Celtic percentage is quite high Irish and Scottish. And
I don't know if there's any or whales in me now,
(33:16):
I just god, we have visual would you want and
well or whale in you? But yeah, I don't know
if I've got any.
Speaker 4 (33:23):
We're all mixed, and we ultimately there is the idea
that is that there's a pure breed human out there.
Speaker 3 (33:33):
Shut up, shut up, doesn't exist. You're silly, silly person.
Speaker 2 (33:39):
I'm pure me. No you're not. Maybe pure of mind,
I'm a pure breed.
Speaker 3 (33:46):
No, there's no such thing. There's not even such thing
as a pure breed dog, because most dogs have just created.
You know, you've got a dog. And then you say, okay,
I like this. I like this little mixture we've got.
Let's make more of just this mixture and we'll call
it a pure breed, even though the original wasn't a
pure breed. It was just a mixture. No, it's not
(34:09):
how it works.
Speaker 1 (34:11):
So I remembersides saying, oh is it Jack Russell, and
he was the bloke that tried to selling the many
to me. He's a pure breed, you know, I said, okay,
And I did a bit of research and Jack Russell's
were created on purpose by mixing a bunch of dogs
(34:32):
together to create hunters.
Speaker 2 (34:39):
So it's nothing pure a poumped hair.
Speaker 4 (34:44):
It's like, you know, it's weird. There's definitely no pure
breed humans.
Speaker 2 (34:54):
Is that controversal? No, but it's true.
Speaker 8 (35:01):
Ah.
Speaker 3 (35:02):
Yeah, So Scotland, I reckon it would be quite a
nice place to visit.
Speaker 2 (35:11):
Wales.
Speaker 3 (35:12):
I'd like to go back to Wales and visit again. Yeah,
I'd like to see the beaches again, just to see
if they are what I remember. I'm going to be
smaller than I remember, because I was tiny when I
went there, you know, because we used to go camping
in Wales every.
Speaker 2 (35:31):
Year for quite a few years, and.
Speaker 4 (35:41):
I didn't like camping. I'll be honest with you. I
didn't like it. It's just not my.
Speaker 3 (35:51):
I mean, you haven't got to be an adult to
know what you do and don't like, have you. I
mean I knew from the very first time that I
was standing there in the rain.
Speaker 4 (36:05):
Putting a tent up, that I didn't enjoy the process,
and that I didn't really want to do it again,
I would say, the only nice thing.
Speaker 2 (36:20):
And this is going to be weird. Actually there's two things.
The only I didn't mind sleeping in a tent, but
I didn't like it, however, weird. That is.
Speaker 1 (36:36):
What I liked, is laying down in the tent. And
because we're in Wales, there's the obligatory rain has to occur.
I mean this was in the peak of the season,
peak of the summer. Beautiful for pupil are beautiful weather,
but also you know, some rain as well around it,
(36:57):
which is why it's such a luscious country.
Speaker 2 (37:04):
And that sound of the rain.
Speaker 1 (37:08):
On the lid of the tent was just so nice.
Speaker 2 (37:13):
It was.
Speaker 1 (37:15):
I mean, I don't personally, I probably did get tingles.
It was maybe that's my ASMR thing. I just found
it very relaxing. But being inside the tent when it
was happening. I've always enjoyed hearing rain, unless I have
(37:40):
to go out in it, then I don't enjoy it.
Speaker 2 (37:45):
And wind and weather. I like weather. I'm kind of
used to it.
Speaker 3 (37:53):
If you ever lived, if you lived in this country, all.
Speaker 9 (37:57):
We have is weather. It's just continuous. Yes, So I
don't know.
Speaker 1 (38:09):
I think, yeah, laying down, I don't know where everyone
was because there was like what one, two, three, four,
five and myself there was six of us, way too
(38:33):
many people to spend time together. But we did and
you know it was it was what it was.
Speaker 2 (38:45):
Can't change it now. Yeah, parts of it were lovely.
Speaker 1 (38:51):
Is I liked the the sandy beaches. And because in Wales,
like I'm like a tourist guy, don't I If you've
never been to Wales, and if you thought about all
(39:12):
I'll go or not, I'd recommend going, maybe be prepared
to travel around because you know, it's not that Wales
is a huge area. I mean it's not tiny, but
it's still it's there's you know, there's still quite a lot.
(39:33):
There's quite a few beautiful beaches. You've got Snowdonia the mountain,
and I went up there twice, I think maybe three times.
Speaker 3 (39:49):
I think it's twice. Went up by train once and
went up like walked up to the top. So did
the journey. I think it was twice. Train's a lot quicker,
so I wouldn't try and.
Speaker 4 (40:08):
Not in a not even in a no, I wouldn't
try and walk up it now.
Speaker 2 (40:16):
I mean, there are parts of it that.
Speaker 3 (40:18):
He kind of it's an up hill walk, but it's
not steep the whole way. There's parts of it that
feel almost flat, and then it gradually, you know, you
end up and I think you kind of walk around
the thing.
Speaker 2 (40:33):
I think, but.
Speaker 3 (40:37):
In my memory it might not be true. But yeah,
not really, not really for me anymore.
Speaker 2 (40:44):
I would go up by it. I probably. I don't
know if i'd even bother.
Speaker 3 (40:47):
Going up by train, because I've done it. I did
it years ago, I did it when I was a kid.
Wouldn't be that bothered to do it again. But if
you haven't done it, it's definitely worth it, I would say,
because I don't know about your life. But how often
do you get to stand at the top of a mountain?
(41:11):
And some people would, I guess every day if you
live on a mountain, obviously, but.
Speaker 2 (41:19):
I yeah, it's quite not yeah, it's quite.
Speaker 3 (41:24):
Maybe I would do it again, but go by train,
and the trains were old, I really made of wood,
kind of proper old trains, just like that. My dad's
(41:46):
saying to me, Jason, can you stop that? I said,
But it makes fun. It makes it more fun if
I had some sound effects.
Speaker 2 (41:55):
But yeah, I quite liked it. Yeah, that was all right.
Speaker 1 (41:59):
We also went to slate places, so basically just old
minds where they used to dig for slate. We did
also go to a couple of coal.
Speaker 3 (42:12):
Mines, old coal mines, and I think what really surprised me.
Speaker 2 (42:22):
I don't know why.
Speaker 4 (42:23):
I was surprised how big they are like underneath.
Speaker 2 (42:32):
Really.
Speaker 3 (42:35):
I mean, I do kind of think that if you're
going to build a hole like that, you're going to
dig a hole. When you finish, you need to fill
the hole in. That seems to be the obvious thing.
(42:56):
You don't leave a big, massive whole.
Speaker 2 (43:00):
All in the ground.
Speaker 3 (43:02):
I'm not talking about the entrance or the exit. Maybe
U classes the entrance or the exits, probably both, isn't it,
But all of the space inside because that's going sideways,
and you know there's a lot of ground that's basically
(43:27):
underneath the place where people are walkings.
Speaker 4 (43:29):
This big, massive gap of empty space sort of made sense.
Speaker 3 (43:41):
I don't know, to me, do something with that space.
I don't know what build build like a shelter or
some kind.
Speaker 2 (43:58):
Of I don't know. It you know it just so
it's supported.
Speaker 3 (44:07):
So it's really really well supported for the ground.
Speaker 1 (44:11):
And you can tell I know nothing about what I'm
talking about, but doesn't hasn't stopped me before, so why
should they stop me now?
Speaker 2 (44:21):
Why there's no use them? So yeah, I'd like to
go to Scotland.
Speaker 1 (44:35):
I'm not sure where though, because I do I'd like
to go to Ireland again as well. I mean I'm
a sole traveler generally, but if I went to Ireland,
it's I could visit a couple of people that I know,
or three people that I know on the whole of
(44:58):
the island, including a northern Ireland.
Speaker 10 (45:03):
And.
Speaker 3 (45:04):
That with Scotland, i'd quite like to go to, trying
to keep a Scottish place.
Speaker 1 (45:18):
They've got They've got towns in Scotland, haven't they. Do
you have houses there?
Speaker 3 (45:28):
Yeah, I don't know. I just I just like to
visit and just have a look around. Really, there's no.
Speaker 1 (45:37):
Specific place necessarily. I mean, i'd like to go to Edinburgh,
but i'd like to go during the Edinburgh Festival, so
that would be cool.
Speaker 2 (45:55):
And Glasgow is another place i'd like to visit.
Speaker 4 (46:05):
Yeah, outside of that, I can't think of any other
places Edinburgh Glasgow. Hm that probably I'm not saying that's
that's all, but that I guess there are two of
the main places.
Speaker 2 (46:23):
Glasgow. Just I don't know. It's somewhere that I wanted
to visit for a long time, Edinburgh, solely because of the.
Speaker 1 (46:33):
Edinburgh Festival, the Fringe Festival, so where the comedy and
stuff is on a I think it's in August, it's now.
Speaker 3 (46:44):
Actually probably.
Speaker 2 (46:54):
I've not been to.
Speaker 3 (46:55):
The Isle of Wight. I have family on the Eye
of White, not that I know. I just I've got
like distant relatives that live there, as I do on
the Isle of Man. And well, one of my close relatives,
my auntie, used to live on the Isle of Man.
(47:17):
She doesn't anymore, so that's that's not a distant relative
is that she's my auntie, but she's my daddy's sister,
or she's my granny's daughter, so her and her daughter
lived on.
Speaker 2 (47:31):
The Isle of Man.
Speaker 3 (47:33):
The Isla White is more.
Speaker 4 (47:35):
Distant, distant distant relations sort of my NaN's relatives, relatives, And.
Speaker 2 (47:46):
I'd like to visit the Isla White.
Speaker 1 (47:48):
I think it's has to be quite a decent place
to go, quite a nice place so maybe go there
because these are more like closer places, aren't they, rather
than traveling across the world.
Speaker 4 (48:04):
About here, well, all the places that there are to
visit here that I could visit here, Yeah, I don't know.
Just maybe maybe could go and have a look around,
have a little wonder.
Speaker 3 (48:28):
But then you've got lots of islands, haven't you around
the local islands like Bergerac you're there, and is Love
Sheppy is. There's some Scottish islands that I could visit.
And I think there's like one hundred and twenty one
(48:51):
different little islands around the UK. There's a few, anyway,
I don't know if there's that many. I made that up,
but there's a few. There's definitely a few islands with
small amounts of people, you know. So I think it'd
(49:12):
be quite cool to visit some of those places. And
again it's just a ferry, isn't it, and maybe another
boat to take me to the island, as long as
I don't have to get in the water, you know,
if it's a small boat like from a ferry or
(49:33):
a ship, and then a small boat there needs to
be at least a jetty, you know, and someone to
help me off the boat. I don't want to be
like having to jump in the sea and walk up
get all wet.
Speaker 2 (49:49):
No, I don't no, stop asking me to do that.
I don't want to.
Speaker 1 (49:57):
So yeah, so there's lots of places i'd quite like
to visit in the foreseeable kind of surroundings, I suppose,
you know, because none of this is particularly far away.
Speaker 2 (50:21):
It's a few hours. A few hours, I.
Speaker 3 (50:26):
Mean, the Isle of Man is quite on the Isle
of Wight is a fair distance because I don't know
about the Isle of White. But with the Isle of Man,
i'd have to go to Liverpool, I think to get
the ferry.
Speaker 2 (50:40):
From there to the Isle of Man. So Liverpool.
Speaker 3 (50:45):
To get from here to Liverpool is probably about five
hours on a train, if not more, five hours, maybe less,
maybe more, maybe six hours, and then the ferry over.
If I've got a nighttime one, it's going to take
all night to get there.
Speaker 2 (51:07):
Daytime.
Speaker 3 (51:08):
Daytime is usually travel quicker, don't they, But at nighttime,
and I do like a nighttime.
Speaker 2 (51:16):
Journey a nighttime.
Speaker 1 (51:18):
Ferry, but I like a daytime fairy as well.
Speaker 3 (51:25):
I think there's the benefits of a daytime as you
can see, you can go out on the deck and
you can see stuff.
Speaker 2 (51:32):
At night, you can't really see that much, but it.
Speaker 3 (51:39):
Is more slow and more relaxed, and there's less people
the nighttime. In my experience, I've done a few nighttime
ferries over the years, and it's just less people around
in the nighttime. I think that, but I guess in
the majority of people prefer to travel during the day,
(52:03):
especially when it comes to or in the past, going
to Belgium, there was a very popular pastime for people
and they would travel from England to Belgium, or England
to France and basically get off the ferry, go to
(52:31):
the duty duty free place, buy lots of alcohol and
cigarettes and then get on the next ferry, back load
their lorry not the lowry, load their van or their
car with stuff and pretend that it was for personal use,
(52:54):
and then get back and sell it in the pubs.
Speaker 2 (52:58):
Now, that was.
Speaker 3 (52:59):
Something that people would did for years and years and years.
And I mean there was a time we didn't even
need a passport to go to to go abroad. You
could get like a little part like a day a
day passport, a day pass and because I didn't know
I went abroad, oh, I didn't get my first passport
(53:23):
until nineteen ninety four, and so before that time, I
traveled to Belgium multiple times, to France, and I flew
to Spain and I didn't have a passport, just got
(53:45):
a like a I was allowed to go, which is
a bit weird because everywhere I've been since then, they've all.
Speaker 2 (53:54):
Asked to see my passport.
Speaker 3 (53:57):
And this is you know, this is I've well, yeah,
I don't think I've left.
Speaker 2 (54:03):
Have I left the country since?
Speaker 4 (54:06):
Yeah, it's not to do with us leaving Europe because.
Speaker 2 (54:17):
A few years back.
Speaker 4 (54:19):
We basically put our little sales up and we moved
away from Europe.
Speaker 1 (54:26):
We moved the whole country away, floated away, we did.
It's weird, very strange. We can actually see the sun
moving to the side as we moved.
Speaker 2 (54:39):
So yeah, so if you do travel to England, just
be aware that we're not in the same place. Who was.
They haven't changed all the maps because.
Speaker 3 (54:49):
They take ages and it's expensive. So plus England is
such a dot on the map anyway, you almost miss
if it was the scale, so it doesn't really matter
of fact.
Speaker 2 (55:05):
We've moved a few thousand miles. So yeah, well, now
in China. You didn't know that, No, you didn't know
it nowhere near Hong Kong.
Speaker 4 (55:18):
Yeah, so we moved out of Europe a few years
ago and the weather's changed.
Speaker 2 (55:27):
It's a lot warmer now.
Speaker 8 (55:30):
Yeah.
Speaker 2 (55:31):
The thing is the problem is I didn't.
Speaker 3 (55:35):
They didn't plan it very well because they managed to
get it set, but anchorage there wasn't enough. Anchorage didn't
have enough anchors. So we keep kind of just you
wake up. You never know when where you could have
end up. The other day, I was in Spain, woke up,
looked out in Spain.
Speaker 2 (55:55):
Three weeks ago, I was in Somalia. Just you don't,
I don't know. So yeah, and.
Speaker 3 (56:07):
So this is my Sunday afternoon, Sunday afternoon. There was
a time in England where everything was closed on a Sunday.
I'm talking everything. The only thing opened. Two things are
(56:28):
opened as far as for public, okay, other than you know,
going out and stuff. You know, there was still amusements
and all those kinds of things were open on the
weekends for people and maybe a Sunday market.
Speaker 2 (56:47):
But newsagents opened.
Speaker 3 (56:50):
On a Sunday morning and then on a Sunday lunchtime
off license could open for about an hour and a
half then they closed, and then they'd open up. I
think they're allowed to open up in the evening for.
Speaker 1 (57:07):
About an hour and a half then they close, not
one hundred percent sure that's true. And pubs would be
allowed to open up for a short period of time,
probably being between eleven and one or eleven and two.
The pubs would open and then they'd open again in
(57:27):
the evening for about.
Speaker 2 (57:31):
Seven till ten or six till ten.
Speaker 3 (57:35):
They close it they close at ten o'clock. That's what
that's Honestly, that's what Sundays used to be like in
this country. No supermarkets, no anything walking around. It is
just not everyone to be at home, apart from those
that weren't. And it was kind of like an official
(57:59):
day off. I mean, and it's not official, it was
That's the reason, wasn't it so that people can have
the day off working, So probably the majority of people
in the country wouldn't work on a Sunday.
Speaker 11 (58:21):
Yeah, a lot.
Speaker 5 (58:22):
Different back then, and it still was like that when
I'm pretty sure.
Speaker 3 (58:39):
I'm not sure how relaxed things got, but I'm pretty
sure it was still like that when I when I
moved to London, because I lived in a small town
at that time and I moved to London and.
Speaker 4 (58:58):
Things are different because shops were open. Some shops were open.
Speaker 2 (59:05):
All the time, like all.
Speaker 3 (59:08):
The time, and I've never seen that before. Like you
could just get stuff whenever you wanted, at any time
of the day or night.
Speaker 2 (59:19):
Not everywhere, but there were places you could get stuff.
Speaker 3 (59:23):
And there was this when I lived in forest Gate.
There was this little shop right on the corner. Worst
shop in the world. It was on the corner and
you had to ring the doorbell for them to let
you in. So it's basically it's almost like they'd conver
(59:47):
their front room, their living room into a shop and
it's sold groceries, sweets, just bits like that. Yeah, everything
was behind the counter, so you couldn't just take what
you wanted and put it on again. They had to
(01:00:07):
get it for you.
Speaker 1 (01:00:11):
And you had to ring their doorbell and they would
come and open the door. To me, that was someone
that did not want my money. They did not want
to work, they didn't want to be open. So I
just I wouldn't go there. I'd walk, I'd walk two
(01:00:32):
miles away to get stuff. I just refused to go
in there. I was very young. I was very I
was very political back then.
Speaker 2 (01:00:42):
I was very stupid back then.
Speaker 4 (01:00:44):
I just annoyed me because a couple of times I
did try and get in there and they just wouldn't
answer the door.
Speaker 2 (01:00:51):
We're busy, Come on, I just want to cand of coke.
Speaker 8 (01:00:56):
We're busy.
Speaker 2 (01:00:59):
Couldn't you just come? I just want one can of coke?
We're in bed. Really, can't you just give me a
can of coke? It's four in the morning. We're going
to call the police if you don't go away. We
know where you live, Okay, fair enough?
Speaker 3 (01:01:21):
So yeah, I understand they didn't want to open the
door for four in the morning. But it's I remember
when seven eleven opened. Now, that changed the world in
this country because suddenly all they were open, because everything,
(01:01:43):
even during the week everything was closed.
Speaker 2 (01:01:46):
You know. I think the pubs had to be closed
by eleven or half ten. I think.
Speaker 3 (01:01:54):
Maybe they could open a bit later at the weekends.
But the whole kind of being open late late didn't
happen till late nineties, I think maybe two thousands.
Speaker 2 (01:02:09):
Yeah.
Speaker 1 (01:02:10):
Wow, a lot of changes, a lot of changes over
the years. But seven eleven, that was so good and
I don't know why it didn't. I mean it might
still be around parts of the country. I don't know,
(01:02:30):
probably maybe in London, if they're all cities, maybe, but
it didn't last very long there, and I never understood
it because it was the perfect place. They had everything
everything you could possibly want in it of an evening.
I mean, unless you wanted to buy some underpants or something,
then they didn't have that. If you wanted to buy
(01:02:53):
a you know, a game of chess, they didn't have
that either, you know, a packet of screws.
Speaker 2 (01:03:02):
No, didn't have that.
Speaker 3 (01:03:03):
But they had like basic things like biscuits, cakes, drinks, alcohol, cigarettes,
and chocolates. I suppose it like basic. I think they
might have had a few basic groceries also, yeah, they probably, Yeah,
(01:03:26):
they did have basic groceries, so like tins of beans
and coffee, tea, you know, the kind of stuff that
you'd probably find it in any seven eleven around the
world because there's lots of them.
Speaker 2 (01:03:42):
It was brilliant. I loved it now.
Speaker 3 (01:03:47):
I used to go when it first started. I'd go
in there when it first opened. I mean i'd say,
what time are you're closing, Let's say eleven? I mean,
to start with, it was like, oh, eleven o'clock. After
the fifteenth time of going in there, like every day
in a row, they said, it's still eleven o'clock. Then
(01:04:10):
after about three weeks of doing it, they took me
outside and pointed to the sign and what I think
they thought I was making fun of them, but I wasn't,
because I really I grew up seeing everything close early,
like my whole life up to the age of sixteen
(01:04:32):
seventeen or whatever. It was, everything closed early in the
evening on a Sunday, everything, And I just couldn't believe
that something was open late till eleven at night.
Speaker 2 (01:04:49):
It was unheard of.
Speaker 3 (01:04:53):
And I kind of because of the because I was
working in the chip shop at the time, and I
didn't finish work till probably ten half ten sometimes if
it was a really busy lot to do and stuff
ten o'clock, I don't know, and I'd go and check
in that because I wanted to make sure I could
go in and get myself maybe some drinks or some
(01:05:16):
chocolate bars or something. So i'd go in, you know,
like earlier in the day, what time you closing, I'd
I'd try and get at like a different member of staff.
I always get the same answer, eleven o'clock Jason. And
so I thought, well, I'm going to start doing is
(01:05:37):
phoning them.
Speaker 1 (01:05:39):
So I phoned them up. Now, if you go somewhere
regularly and then you start to phone them, it's a.
Speaker 3 (01:05:51):
Good idea to put on a different voice if you can,
because they just knew as me straight away because I
said to Hi, it's Jason from the chip shop. What
time have you closed today? Eleven o'clock? Like every other day,
it's eleven o'clock, seven eleven. It means seven in the
(01:06:12):
morning to eleven at night, you know, and seem to
want to know what time we open.
Speaker 1 (01:06:20):
We open at seven. The clues in the sign, the
clues in the name. Thank you for calling Jason. Now
my problem is I should have put on a different voice. Clearly, Hi,
it's Jason from the chip shop. What time you close
(01:06:42):
in today?
Speaker 2 (01:06:45):
See, I just didn't think on my feet.
Speaker 3 (01:06:50):
It would be a lot easier, but I just thought
it out first, like could do with these recordings. I mean,
you wouldn't believe that I spend probably six seven hours
a day, you know, putting on his script together.
Speaker 1 (01:07:06):
What I'm going to say, and you know, practice in
for a good two hours before I start the recording
and then it sounds so natural.
Speaker 2 (01:07:20):
Wow. Can you imagine if I did that? Well, yeah,
you can imagine, because it'd probably.
Speaker 3 (01:07:25):
Be really well presented instead of this whatever it is
that I do.
Speaker 2 (01:07:33):
But this is what you get. This is me.
Speaker 4 (01:07:38):
My name's Jason La la la la la l L.
Speaker 3 (01:07:46):
So yeah, that's it. Really, it's me talking about Sundays and.
Speaker 2 (01:07:51):
What I had did.
Speaker 3 (01:07:56):
Church used to be open on a Sunday evening, I
think it did. I know it used to be opening
on a Sunday morning because I would often go to
church with my nan, or often, but quite a fair
few times I'd go to church with my nan when
I was a teenager sort of six fifteen, sixteen, seventeen
(01:08:19):
or whatever. And then we'd go and because there'd be
a coffee place, so there'd be a place you could
get some coffee.
Speaker 2 (01:08:30):
Or was that during the week.
Speaker 3 (01:08:31):
That might have been on a Wednesday. Maybe she went
to church on a Wednesday and I'd go to church
with her. Then maybe it was a Sunday, I'm not sure.
Maybe it was a Sunday. We'd go and get a
cup of tea and a cake, and then I think
(01:08:57):
we'd walk back. There wasn't a cute, huge walker. This
is a fair distance, but it wasn't a huge walk.
Speaker 2 (01:09:05):
Or maybe my dad would come and pick her up.
Speaker 3 (01:09:08):
I don't know.
Speaker 4 (01:09:11):
I don't remember exactly how much.
Speaker 2 (01:09:14):
Of this is true. I did used to go to
quite yeah, quite a few times.
Speaker 3 (01:09:26):
I went to midnight Mass with her at midnight, but
then they also had an early midnight Mass for people
that couldn't get there, you know, for midnight, which makes sense.
It doesn't make sense the way I said it, but
some people it wasn't you know, walking around at midnight
(01:09:50):
wasn't really ideal. So they did like an early one
at about seven or eight in the evening, and.
Speaker 2 (01:09:59):
Once one day.
Speaker 3 (01:10:00):
Got a bit older, i'd probably say from yeah, the
last twenty years, No, the last two thousand and four two.
Speaker 2 (01:10:15):
Four, wow, the last ten.
Speaker 3 (01:10:19):
Years, no, because that's the thing, because after two thousand
and four. So I went to midnight Mass with her,
but it was early one. It was about eight o'clock.
I know my auntie was there and she wanted to
(01:10:42):
go to her church because my.
Speaker 4 (01:10:44):
Name's a Catholic and she had our own church that
she wanted to go to, So I'm not sure what
it was that she went to, and she wanted to
go to there as well to do the actual midnight.
Speaker 2 (01:10:58):
Service. And it's still.
Speaker 1 (01:11:03):
One of my favorite Christmas is as an adult two
thousand and four. It's weird, but there's something special about
it to me. And I was staying at my nun's
house in the spare room, the room that I used
to have for myself when I was eight years old.
(01:11:24):
My my own bedroom was brilliant, and I was back
sleeping in there. My aunt and uncle were in the
other room, which was that's where my two brothers used
to sleep in bunk beds. And in my NaN's bedroom
was where my parents used to sleep, so and that's
(01:11:46):
where her and her husband, my granddad, that was their
room from nineteen seventy nine, you know onwards. So I
had that room for about a year, my little room.
But I wasn't there for a year.
Speaker 4 (01:12:04):
Of two thousand and four, just there for one night,
probably two or three nights.
Speaker 2 (01:12:10):
So because I.
Speaker 4 (01:12:11):
Was living in a different town, so I come over
probably Christmas Eve because I was working, Yeah, I was working,
So I come over Christmas Eve.
Speaker 2 (01:12:24):
I go out to.
Speaker 3 (01:12:29):
Go out to church to midnight Mass, but it's early
with my nan because she couldn't have said she couldn't
go to the late one. It was too late for
by that time because she was you know, she had.
Speaker 4 (01:12:45):
Like a disability because of her hip and stuff, so
she needed a walk and stick and stuff, so you know,
walking around at night wasn't really ideal.
Speaker 2 (01:12:54):
Although she would have got a lift, you know. And then.
Speaker 3 (01:13:04):
I say she would have got She did get a lift,
but she would have got a lift back. It was
late anyway, so she got a lift anyway. So we
went up with my aunt and uncle, and then we
came back and my aunt and uncle my Auntie wanted
to go to the other thing, but I don't think
they went in the end, because they spent too much
(01:13:24):
time talking about it and discussed with were not to go.
And by that time it was Boxing day by the
time I finished, and my Auntie did something that I've
never done before, or she sort of introduced a new,
a new Christmas Eve thing. So she went and she
got some presents off the tree and gave me a
(01:13:46):
present Christmas Eve. I said, but Auntie, it's Christmas Eve.
Speaker 2 (01:13:53):
It's not time for presents.
Speaker 3 (01:13:55):
That's supposed to be on Christmas Day.
Speaker 4 (01:13:59):
Sure, she said, no, we give presents Christmas Eve. It's
just one present off the tree. It's just something we
do every year.
Speaker 3 (01:14:09):
But how's father Christmas delivered him?
Speaker 2 (01:14:11):
If he hasn't been yet, She said, you're thirty four
years old. Shut up.
Speaker 4 (01:14:16):
Wow, it's a bit harsh, wasn't it.
Speaker 2 (01:14:19):
And so.
Speaker 3 (01:14:25):
It was just sweets, basically, it was like candy you
would call it maybe if you call it that in
your country. But the thing is, I hadn't had any
chocolate since the summer, so I'd lost a lot of
weight on purpose because I kind of I needed to
(01:14:50):
get fitter. So during the June two thousand and four,
I kind of got myself nice and physically fit.
Speaker 1 (01:14:58):
I was working on the mental fitness as well. And
I hadn't had any chocolate since the summer.
Speaker 3 (01:15:09):
So we're talking what July, August, September, October, November for
at least four or five months. So Christmas Eve, I'm
here with these and it was one of those chocolate
things that sparkle on your tongue, and I was.
Speaker 2 (01:15:28):
Just it was heavenly.
Speaker 4 (01:15:31):
It was a pleasure that I just didn't realize I
needed it was so nice.
Speaker 3 (01:15:41):
Oh and it was like being a kid again.
Speaker 2 (01:15:45):
It was just really because I remember good.
Speaker 3 (01:15:52):
I'll tell you one of the benefits of being of
my childhood is a lot of the nice stuff happened
when I was I know, it's good to have nice
stuff happened when you're young, when you're really young. But
one of the benefits of it happened when it happens
for the first time, when you're kind of seven or eight,
is I can still remember it now. So certain things
(01:16:16):
like chocolate that I'd never eaten before, or riding my
first bike. You know, a lot of kids had their
first bike when they'd I'd had two, three, four, you know,
so my first bike was when I was just four
as what seven I think I was, Yeah, was seven,
So I remember that.
Speaker 2 (01:16:36):
So it's quite nice to have those little memories. Now.
Speaker 1 (01:16:41):
I wasn't four in two thousand and four or seven
in two thousand and four, but.
Speaker 2 (01:16:48):
It was a little bit like that.
Speaker 3 (01:16:50):
It's like, Okay, this is nice, this is like a
It's not that I'd never had it before. It it
was almost like for the first time because I'd gone
five months about.
Speaker 2 (01:17:01):
Any chocolate, and trust.
Speaker 3 (01:17:04):
Me, that was a long time for me back then
to go about chocolate. I've always been a little bit
of a chocolate e person. It's part of the culture
in this country eating chocolate, sugar, all that stuff is
part of the national pastime, part of my national identity.
Speaker 2 (01:17:30):
Stuff myself full of sugar.
Speaker 3 (01:17:37):
So yeah, that was just a really that was a
nice Christmas. Actually, so I got to see my nan,
got to see me uncle an aunt, got to see
me Dad and that side of the family because I
went there for Christmas dinner and then went back to
my NaN's in the evening and then had Boxing.
Speaker 2 (01:17:59):
Day with my nan and Christmas dinner and Boxing Day dinner.
Speaker 3 (01:18:04):
So yeah, it was cool. That was a nice Christmas.
I mean, it's not the only Christmas I spent at
my NaN's, but is the most memorable one. Yeah, there
was another Christmas I spent there in my NaN's brother
was there, Uncle Antony, and he was I think he
(01:18:27):
was a little bit younger than her. He was a
younger brother by probably about four years, three or four years.
Speaker 2 (01:18:35):
And maybe maybe older brother. I don't know.
Speaker 1 (01:18:41):
I think younger brother. I think I might be wrong,
but marginally younger. I think she had about twelve brothers
and sisters my name.
Speaker 8 (01:18:53):
And.
Speaker 2 (01:18:56):
He it was funny.
Speaker 3 (01:19:00):
It was not funny funny, but he'd watched the TV
downstairs and he'd had it.
Speaker 2 (01:19:04):
On so loud.
Speaker 3 (01:19:07):
I literally like was just there all night try I
struggled to sleep because the TV.
Speaker 2 (01:19:13):
Was blaring out. She couldn't hear it.
Speaker 4 (01:19:16):
It's as simple as that wasn't what he wasn't being inconsiderate.
He just couldn't hear the TV, so he had to
turn it up in order to hear it. And I
think my men went down there and told him off
because she was concerned about the neighbors, because she always
had a really good relationship with the next door neighbor,
(01:19:41):
him and his family, or the couple and their family.
And it was still it was the same next door
neighbor they had that we had when we lived there
before they moved in, and we kept I say we,
I and my family was still in contact with that
next door I mean I was still in contact with
(01:20:06):
that family. I was still visiting going around there in
nineteen ninety. In fact, no, I was still going around there. Wow,
I was still going around there in the early nineties.
When I visit, I still go in there because I
was friends with a.
Speaker 3 (01:20:25):
Boy and I really liked the girl. I was friends
with her as well, and I got on well with
the parents because I've known her since I was seven
or eight years old, seven and a half eight, so
they'd known me kind of almost all my life in
a way. You think from seven and a half to
(01:20:48):
twenty twenty one, twenty two whatever, that's a long time.
Speaker 2 (01:20:56):
And they lived there and they loved my well.
Speaker 3 (01:21:00):
I love my nan and granddad, but you know, they
looked out for my name when she lived there on
her own.
Speaker 8 (01:21:06):
And.
Speaker 2 (01:21:10):
Really nice people. It's weird.
Speaker 3 (01:21:14):
It's like, I don't want to sort of say too much,
but I don't even know what this situation is anymore.
But the lady that lived there was a nurse. I'm
not sure what a husband did. I think he might
have worked on the docks. And I was at school
with both the kids. So I was at school with
(01:21:38):
the boy who was the same age as my brother,
my first older brother, and then his sister who was
probably two years younger than me, maybe three years, two
(01:22:01):
years probably, I don't know. I kind of noticed her
when I was twenty I knew, but I kind of
like suddenly.
Speaker 2 (01:22:10):
It was weird because she was very beautiful. That's not
the weird part. But she had.
Speaker 3 (01:22:20):
A birthmark on her face, which did not take away
her beauty, you know what I mean.
Speaker 2 (01:22:26):
She was a very beautiful face.
Speaker 3 (01:22:29):
And I always liked the rifle when I was a
kid because she's, you know, only marginally younger than me.
Speaker 2 (01:22:36):
So I always liked her.
Speaker 3 (01:22:39):
As a because when I was when I was ten,
she was eight, you know. But she had it removed.
She had the birthmark removed, and it was just like
a brown birthmark or something. It changed her personality. So
I'm not saying she's being sweet, because she was a
(01:23:03):
very sweet girl.
Speaker 2 (01:23:03):
She she was.
Speaker 3 (01:23:05):
Still sweet in her own way, but she became very
confident and she enjoyed all the attention that she was
getting from the boys, which is natural. But to me,
she didn't look any different really.
Speaker 2 (01:23:28):
I mean, it's.
Speaker 3 (01:23:28):
Only because she told me that she'd had it removed
that I really noticed it, because, you know, I said,
I've known her for a long long time, a long
long time, and it's weird because I remember.
Speaker 4 (01:23:46):
Her because there was like four years between her and
her oldest brother, she'd her oldest her oldest brother's friends
would come around, and I remember her saying, oh, can
I come with you? Because they'd all go out, and
she said, no, go away, because I didn't want this
little girl coming around. He didn't want her pestuing them.
(01:24:10):
And the other his friends would say go away, go away.
They didn't want a pest in them. And then when
she was about fifteen sixteen, they didn't seem to mind
her hanging around anymore. And I remember when I think
(01:24:30):
she's about seventeen or eighteen, and there was literally a
cue of men or boys.
Speaker 1 (01:24:41):
Trying to win her heart. It was seriously like knocking
on the door and following her around like little puppies.
Speaker 3 (01:24:51):
It was very funny and that booster of confidence. I mean,
that would have been happening anyway.
Speaker 2 (01:25:03):
But I guess the.
Speaker 1 (01:25:08):
That personality change just from having one.
Speaker 3 (01:25:16):
Like Mark removed. One thing changed which made her feel different.
And there's a whole book called Cybernetics. Cybernetics, it's a
very famous book about a plastic surgeon, and he's written
(01:25:37):
by a plastic surgeon and he noticed that the personality
changes in people that had work done and how.
Speaker 2 (01:25:46):
It was he couldn't believe the transformation.
Speaker 3 (01:25:54):
It could have not on someone's appearance, because that wouldn't
surprise him, because that's what he did for that. He
was surprised at the transformation and personality.
Speaker 1 (01:26:06):
And he wrote a whole book about it, Cybernetics, and
I usued to have it. I've read it a few times,
and it's quite a big book in the self help
like literature library thing. It's cybernetics, cyber cybernetics.
Speaker 2 (01:26:23):
Something like that. Yeah, it's a good book.
Speaker 1 (01:26:29):
It's very interesting. I mean, it kind of makes sense,
but at the same time, it's.
Speaker 2 (01:26:34):
Like, really, maybe maybe that's why I should have done.
Speaker 4 (01:26:45):
Maybe if I had a bit of surgery, I could
increase my confidence, have it shortened or something. You know,
it's just too big and I don't know, just to
have my nose. Yeah, but I don't know.
Speaker 2 (01:27:04):
Maybe I don't know what i'd have.
Speaker 4 (01:27:13):
There's a few things I could probably do. In fact,
I'm pretty sure if I went to a plastic surgeon
and said, just list all the things that I need doing,
we'd be there for a while. You'd have to cancel
(01:27:36):
all his clients for about a week, just so he
could list off all the things.
Speaker 3 (01:27:40):
That I needed to do in probably but I won't
be having anything. I don't think i'll have anything done
in the future. I don't know.
Speaker 1 (01:28:00):
I could have done in the past if I wanted to,
didn't really, I guess the way I see it is.
Speaker 2 (01:28:08):
Take me for what I am, take me for how
I am.
Speaker 3 (01:28:14):
And I'm not going to wear, you know, tall shoes
to make myself look taller. I'm not going to dye
my hair to pretend that I'm not going gray. I'm
not going to.
Speaker 4 (01:28:31):
Get a hair transplant in my bald spots.
Speaker 3 (01:28:36):
Not there's anything wrong with doing any of those things,
but I'm just not going to do any of that stuff.
And I'm not going to pretend I'm a different age.
Things I can.
Speaker 2 (01:28:49):
Do, I suppose practical logical things.
Speaker 3 (01:28:56):
Is take better care of myself, eat a better diet,
exercise bare Yeah, those kinds of things. Basic stuff, really,
isn't it. But I found that one way it's shortcut
(01:29:21):
with dieting. Wear bigger clothes.
Speaker 4 (01:29:26):
Seriously, if you wear bigger tops, really like large tops,
extra extra extra large, almost.
Speaker 2 (01:29:33):
Looks like you've lost weight. It works. I do it.
Speaker 3 (01:29:37):
I literally do that now. Although some of my tops
are just a bit bagger because I have actually lost weight,
not recently, but last year I did. I lost the
stone and I haven't put it back on because I
stopped having sugar in my tea and.
Speaker 2 (01:29:57):
I cut down. I stopped having I didn't don't drink
hope anymore.
Speaker 3 (01:30:01):
And I have minimum minimum amount chocolate.
Speaker 2 (01:30:07):
I used to eat chocolate every single day.
Speaker 12 (01:30:11):
So yeah, and that I do believe laddies and gentlemen.
Speaker 2 (01:30:24):
Is the end of this recording.
Speaker 8 (01:30:29):
Me me, me, me me.
Speaker 2 (01:30:32):
So thank you for listening.
Speaker 1 (01:30:34):
Remember to be kind to yourself, because you do deserve
to be happy and be gentle with yourself. You deserve
to feel safe, lots of love.
Speaker 2 (01:30:51):
Bye.
Speaker 3 (01:30:59):
Relax in a more deep and meaningful way, maybe in
a way that can not just allow you to feel
(01:31:20):
calmer now and throughout the time we spend together here,
not just relaxed at the end of the recording when
it's finished and you can enjoy that sense of comfort
(01:31:44):
and peace, But also I think it would be nice
to have those feelings of.
Speaker 1 (01:32:08):
Relaxation continue for longer after the recording has ended, so
that you can still benefit from listening to my voice.
(01:32:38):
Maybe in a few hours time perhaps tomorrow, and then
by listening regularly, especially if you find like some people
do and myself as well, sometimes I find one particular
(01:33:02):
recording that really resonates with me, and I just listen
to it over and over again every morning, every evening.
(01:33:25):
There was this recording from We're going back to about
nineteen ninety nine. It wasn't hypnosis, but it was a
guided visualizations. It kind of was hypnosis, really, and I
managed to find it again and it still has the
(01:33:48):
same effect on me. And part of it was the
person's voice.
Speaker 2 (01:34:01):
Relaxed me.
Speaker 4 (01:34:06):
She just felt so peaceful, and I'd look forward to
listening to her in the morning and in the evening.
Speaker 3 (01:34:25):
And I knew before even pressing the play button, as
since I've done that, pressed the play button.
Speaker 2 (01:34:39):
This was in the days of.
Speaker 3 (01:34:45):
CD players pressed the play button. In fact, it might
have even been a tape tape recorder. I'd lie down
on the bed and then even without necessarily listening to
(01:35:11):
her words because I had them memorized. Really, it was
as if my body knew exactly what to do, and
(01:35:35):
the muscles just almost went into automatic relaxation, and I
(01:35:57):
remember my mind would slow down. Now now I was
listening to this recording in the early days of learning hypnosis,
(01:36:21):
and long before I ever made any videos or audio
recordings myself, because I didn't start doing that till two
thousand and six, I knew, I knew how helpful I
(01:36:53):
found being able to just let go, to have that
trust in the person that I'm listening to, knowing that
(01:37:17):
it's going to be just as relaxing, if not more so.
Each time you hear my voice, you may feel the same.
(01:37:41):
Some people.
Speaker 2 (01:37:44):
Have been listening to me for over a decade.
Speaker 3 (01:37:56):
Maybe not solidly, obviously, not only four hours a day.
Maybe people come back, some people maybe listen every day.
(01:38:20):
There's something that I do which you may not realize
by listening, is.
Speaker 2 (01:38:38):
When I record.
Speaker 1 (01:38:43):
These recordings. Now, for example, I also am affected by
the words VICE say. So, if I set.
Speaker 3 (01:39:09):
To you focus on your feet, notice your feet relaxing.
I will be focusing on my feet. I will be
noticing my feet relaxing. If I said, focus on your hands,
(01:39:48):
and maybe notice the difference between each hand, perhaps noticed
the air in the room, a temperature of the room.
On the backs of your hands, you may start to
(01:40:17):
notice what almost feels like a very light breeze, even
though there may not be any type of breeze at
all where you are right now. And as you become
(01:40:43):
aware of your hands, I'm also aware of how relaxed
my hands our feeling now and when it comes to
(01:41:23):
potentially drifting off to sleep, which may be the reason
you're listening, I also feel drowsy when I make these recordings.
(01:41:50):
I also notice.
Speaker 2 (01:41:54):
My mind.
Speaker 3 (01:41:56):
Drifting. In fact, at times I've actually fallen asleep without
(01:42:16):
even noticing, and then I carry on talking. It's only
when I listen back to do the editing I hear
(01:42:40):
snoring and I think, I don't remember snoring. I remember talking.
There's snoring. Was a pick turned up. That's why I
sound like when I snore. How I get.
Speaker 2 (01:43:07):
Really into a whole experience.
Speaker 3 (01:43:20):
I don't know how you feel. How relaxed do you
feel in your feet, how relaxed you feel in your hands.
(01:43:55):
I have noticed more and more that the more relaxed,
deeper level of comfort you feel, the easier your breathing becomes.
(01:44:31):
It's almost like that additional muscle relaxation. So this allows
you to breathe easier without necessarily focusing on your breath. However,
(01:45:19):
being able to notice the ease.
Speaker 2 (01:45:39):
In which.
Speaker 3 (01:45:47):
You breathe so naturally, You breathe so very easily and smoothly.
(01:46:38):
Whenever I imagine my breathing improving. When I've got my
eyes closed, I tend to visualize a beautiful field with
(01:47:15):
trees and flowers producing all that life giving oxygen. And
(01:47:48):
it feels nice too, if nothing else, h just taking
some time away from everything, enjoying that feeling of peace
(01:48:46):
serenity with a joyful heart. Time seems to just drip
(01:49:31):
by so very slowly, relaxed, so deeply, peaceful, completely unattached
(01:50:25):
to any thoughts whatsoever in this moment, completely free, noticing that.
Speaker 2 (01:51:31):
Your mind.
Speaker 3 (01:51:40):
Slowed down, slowed down because nothing really requires your attention.
(01:52:36):
You can enjoy the physical sensations of allowing the stress
to dip out of your body, to appear out of
(01:53:02):
every part of your body, and being released from your
(01:53:31):
brain change your mind slowly but surely. The muscles in
(01:54:12):
your legs relax ras res so very deep, thing reas
(01:55:03):
so deeply, and the feelings, the pleasant feelings in your
(01:55:29):
arms and shoulders deepening each part of your body further
(01:55:59):
mhmm and deeper and deeper noticine. The feelings in the
(01:56:35):
back of your neck, I feel ends in your wrists, muscles,
(01:57:37):
in the front of your body, I will.
Speaker 2 (01:57:50):
Say, feeling.
Speaker 3 (01:58:05):
Peaceful, deeping. There's a sense of peace spreads through.
Speaker 2 (01:58:40):
Your very cool.
Speaker 3 (01:59:12):
Even when you focus on your mind, her mind becomes
(01:59:39):
be and slowerven deep relaxing, a very slow your stomach.
(02:01:16):
Peace fell in your stomach, held back. Notice. Notice how
(02:01:59):
relaxed you now feel.
Speaker 2 (02:02:15):
In the hole of your back. A spy.
Speaker 3 (02:02:47):
From your brain all the way down the middle of
your back, sending and receiving HM, millions of messages every day, deepcomfort,
(02:03:19):
increasing deeply relaxed, your knees, relax spreading those signals down
(02:04:35):
your spine or cord.
Speaker 2 (02:04:41):
Into air.
Speaker 3 (02:04:42):
Every part of your body sh ends in your calf, muscles,
(02:05:29):
your outbows. Feelings of peace and tranquility spreading through your
(02:05:58):
body m HM. Tips of your toes, to your eyes,
your fingers, all the way till you'll lower back, letting
(02:06:34):
her reating pace, drifting.
Speaker 2 (02:07:29):
Mind.
Speaker 3 (02:07:34):
Just wander in a way, happy to let go, let
go completely, Leckr said, tranquil, whole body enjoying a sensor listinger, Hey,
(02:09:29):
nore ey, enjoy the space, this space of peace and safety,
(02:11:54):
sur ery, letting go. Maybe we can just focus on
(02:13:58):
the different parts of your body, just to notice your
(02:14:32):
forehead and your eyes mutual, so loose, noticing in the
(02:15:35):
sense of complete freedom, absolute freedom, day, pace for energy,
(02:17:43):
pace to breathe so much easier les you may you
(02:18:59):
may not if at tist your mind drifting peaceful ma
(02:19:59):
anyven more deeply.
Speaker 2 (02:20:06):
In the direction of.
Speaker 3 (02:20:13):
Total blissful pace, blissphul pace directed to pace, he said, Colm.
Speaker 8 (02:22:27):
Let him go, peace.
Speaker 3 (02:22:54):
Of mind, relaxed body, cy rex.
Speaker 8 (02:23:37):
C relaxed.
Speaker 3 (02:24:03):
Her body feels almost invisible, so very relaxed.
Speaker 2 (02:24:29):
And peaceful.
Speaker 8 (02:24:36):
So pace m r.
Speaker 13 (02:25:08):
Le s'sor fair.
Speaker 3 (02:25:44):
And you could start to notice that you are feeling
more relaxed, even.
Speaker 2 (02:25:55):
Though I've not.
Speaker 3 (02:25:58):
Purposely focused your mind upon that sense of physical comfort
that is growing within you throughout your body, and your mind.
Speaker 2 (02:26:18):
Starts to slow down.
Speaker 1 (02:26:25):
And that could be almost in recognition of I guess
my speech not being particularly fast, and things just generally
(02:26:46):
feel calmer. Just by listening to my voice, you give
yourself an opportunity to take a break from the day,
(02:27:06):
take a break from your life as it is, and
to give yourself a rest, giving yourself permission to take
some time off and to allow your body to relax
(02:27:29):
and allow your mind to slow down, which in turn
releases the tension any stresses that you had in your body.
(02:27:51):
It's almost as if the parts of your body just
open up, allowing the negativity and at the same time
replacing that negativity with positive healing energy, which then fills
(02:28:19):
your body up and your mind to.
Speaker 2 (02:28:24):
Also starts to.
Speaker 3 (02:28:31):
Appreciate those feelings of increasing confidence and almost uplifting feeling
positive healing, an energy that spreads through your body like
(02:29:02):
a wave of comfort. And all this comes from just
allowing yourself a few minutes, maybe half an hour, however
(02:29:25):
long you want it to be, just rest.
Speaker 2 (02:29:34):
And allow.
Speaker 1 (02:29:37):
Your mind and your body to almost reset itself to
the settings of comfort and relaxation, calmness, which allows more
(02:30:04):
room for feelings of pleasure.
Speaker 2 (02:30:11):
And happiness.
Speaker 3 (02:30:16):
To move around your body and into your mind, almost
as if your mind and your body are sinking together,
almost mirroring each other with that growing positivity and calmness.
Speaker 2 (02:30:49):
And it feels.
Speaker 3 (02:30:50):
Nice, really does feel nice to know that you are
the one that has allowed yourself to feel more comfort
(02:31:12):
and to experience.
Speaker 2 (02:31:16):
More of this.
Speaker 1 (02:31:19):
Deep relaxation spreading throughout your body, and as I focus
on each part of your body, you can notice that.
Speaker 2 (02:31:42):
That part.
Speaker 1 (02:31:47):
Becomes even more relaxed just by focusing on its even
more calm and comfortable.
Speaker 2 (02:32:07):
Just by focusing.
Speaker 3 (02:32:13):
And as I move down your body, starting at your head,
the parts that you have already focused on will continue
to relax deeply, and those parts that have not yet
(02:32:35):
focused on or just automatically release any remain intention in
anticipation of even more comfort about to come. Now, I'm
(02:33:03):
going to start by focusing on your forehead. Just being
aware of the feelings of your forehead and any background
sounds like mister Herbert Opigeon can just allow you to
(02:33:25):
feel even more relaxed. Just means you in the moment,
this isn't this isn't a sterile environment.
Speaker 2 (02:33:40):
This is the world.
Speaker 3 (02:33:45):
I live in the countryside, so there's lots of nature
sounds around. So as you focus on your forehead, just
notice how it becomes even more relaxed as you focus
(02:34:12):
only on my voice and that part of your body.
Moving down to your eyes, focusing on your eyes, noticing
(02:34:32):
how your eyelids feel so heavy yet so light at
the same time, and all the muscles around your eyes relaxing.
Speaker 2 (02:34:51):
Completely. Moving your focus.
Speaker 3 (02:35:00):
Down to your mouth, your lips, your tongue, your teeth,
You comes the whole of your mouth, relaxing, calm and glease.
(02:35:24):
As you focus now on your jaw, just the parts
of your jaw near your mouth and your chin, but
all the way up the size of your face to
your ears, the hole of your jaw, feeding more relaxed.
Speaker 8 (02:36:00):
Calm.
Speaker 3 (02:36:08):
Focusing on your neck, the front of your neck and
your throat relaxing and loose and calm. The sides of
(02:36:30):
your neck, right and left side.
Speaker 2 (02:36:35):
Of your neck.
Speaker 3 (02:36:39):
Relax and lease and calm. And now the back of
your neck, focusing on the back of your neck, letting
(02:37:08):
go of any tension that may have been there before,
and enjoying that sense of increasing comfort and release that
(02:37:28):
you can experience in the back of your neck. Moving
down your back and moving either side of your spine
right from the top of your back all the way
(02:37:52):
down to the bottom of your back, down to your
lower back.
Speaker 1 (02:38:10):
As you move up and down your spine, you can
feel the muscles either side of your spine relaxing even more,
(02:38:33):
and as those muscles relax, that sense of comfort starts
to spread outwards from your spine into both sides of
your back, the top of your back, the middle, and
(02:38:58):
your lower back.
Speaker 2 (02:39:02):
And as you scan gently and slowly.
Speaker 3 (02:39:08):
Up and down your back, there's the muscles in the
top of your back relax and become looser. The muscles
in the middle of your back also seem to just
(02:39:30):
almost divide from each other, separating and almost melting. And
in your lower back there seems to be an extra
(02:39:51):
special feeling of comfort. The spreads into your hips. Sit
down your lower back, into your hips, into the area
(02:40:15):
where your cosix are, and into your.
Speaker 1 (02:40:21):
Buttocks, and all these muscles that spread bring your lower
back into your hip area.
Speaker 3 (02:40:37):
Start to melt, start to reading, let go, and you
know where about to focus on your shoulders. Your back
(02:41:01):
and your spine will continue to let go, continue to
relax so calmly, and then she focus on your shoulders. You
(02:41:28):
may notice they're already feeling really loose, They're.
Speaker 4 (02:41:44):
Already feeding, calm.
Speaker 8 (02:42:00):
And fear.
Speaker 3 (02:42:05):
Those muscles then move from your neck into your shoulders.
Feel so soft and gentle, so smooth.
Speaker 8 (02:42:37):
And calm, and.
Speaker 3 (02:42:50):
The feeling in your shoulders scene to spread deep into
your shoulders a sense of relaxation, not just traveling deeply
(02:43:13):
into your muscles, but also relaxing with the bones and
moving all the way to underneath your arms, relaxing a
(02:43:39):
whole area between the tops of your shoulders and underneath
your arms healing.
Speaker 8 (02:43:55):
You feel so.
Speaker 3 (02:43:57):
Relaxed and comfortable in your shoulders, which sense that's deep
healing message into your arms.
Speaker 2 (02:44:30):
You may feel.
Speaker 3 (02:44:33):
Almost as if your arms are not even there, because
they're so relaxed, so.
Speaker 4 (02:44:45):
Deeply relaxed, so calm.
Speaker 8 (02:45:14):
So.
Speaker 3 (02:45:21):
Loose, that feeling spreading all the way.
Speaker 4 (02:45:35):
Down your arms, two elbows, including.
Speaker 3 (02:45:47):
Your elbows, circumforts spread.
Speaker 8 (02:46:04):
Or away.
Speaker 2 (02:46:08):
Into rests, your forearmens nder.
Speaker 8 (02:46:14):
Wrists so heavy, yet at.
Speaker 2 (02:46:27):
The same time sunlight and gentle.
Speaker 3 (02:47:07):
Frey sent now on your hands, your hands so peaceful
(02:47:48):
in your hands, the sense.
Speaker 8 (02:48:08):
Of real pace.
Speaker 3 (02:48:25):
It just seems to feel so familiar when your hands
relax deeply.
Speaker 11 (02:48:51):
Else things.
Speaker 14 (02:49:42):
Things you think it tips, moving, attention, let front to
(02:50:50):
your body.
Speaker 15 (02:51:03):
Sure counc manue, focuss.
Speaker 2 (02:52:39):
Love my souls and your fives and niece.
Speaker 3 (02:53:05):
I relaxed a calf muscles just shins a puzzie.
Speaker 8 (02:54:01):
It mus.
Speaker 2 (02:55:42):
When the feathing a new Saints so pace on.
Speaker 3 (02:55:56):
Cycl' sait peaceful sircom sir peaceful.
Speaker 2 (02:56:47):
Sycom so.
Speaker 8 (02:56:54):
Peace for.
Speaker 2 (02:57:04):
RelA same.
Speaker 3 (02:57:11):
Peace fall calm, love, that deep relaxation to spread your
(02:57:31):
chest story.
Speaker 2 (02:57:37):
So relax, let me go everything.
Speaker 1 (02:58:03):
So I'm going to start counting down now from twenty
down to one. You can imagine in a way it's
like just walking down some steps and each step or
(02:58:23):
twenty steps, and each step represents a level of comfort.
Each step represents.
Speaker 3 (02:58:38):
A deepening.
Speaker 1 (02:58:40):
Of that comfort, and the furvies you walk down those steps,
the deeper and more relaxed you feel. So starting with
(02:59:04):
number twenty.
Speaker 3 (02:59:17):
Twenty, nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteenhhhhhhhhh.
Speaker 2 (03:02:53):
Three four fi too well.
Speaker 16 (03:06:35):
Usutus ussissi.
Speaker 8 (03:09:37):
Basis eight.
Speaker 3 (03:11:02):
Shhhh six.
Speaker 2 (03:13:55):
Five sis.
Speaker 10 (03:15:03):
Us no.
Speaker 3 (03:19:47):
As you focus on your eyes, I gonna count down
from ten down to one, focusing just on your eyes,
(03:20:15):
your eyelids, the muscles around your eyes, your eye walls themselves,
a whole area.
Speaker 2 (03:20:29):
That makes up your eye.
Speaker 3 (03:20:42):
And as we count down from ten down to one,
whilst focus in on your eyes, your becose twice is
(03:21:03):
relaxed with each number counting down that you may find.
Speaker 2 (03:21:19):
The all you want to do is just.
Speaker 3 (03:21:23):
Drift off to sleep. And if that's what you want,
then just allow yourself to do that. Now, focusing on
(03:21:47):
your eyes, I'm going to begin counting down.
Speaker 2 (03:21:53):
From ten down to one right now, nine.
Speaker 3 (03:23:10):
Eight seven.
Speaker 17 (03:26:07):
Free most.
Speaker 8 (03:30:28):
Us one.
Speaker 3 (03:31:13):
So counting down from ten to one.
Speaker 8 (03:31:25):
Ten nine.
Speaker 2 (03:31:29):
Eight seven six five four three two one.
Speaker 3 (03:31:56):
And maybe that was a bit too quick in order
to relax. Maybe it's a bit too fast for you
to notice the calming of your body, maybe even a
little bit of pressure there, like you're counting down from
(03:32:17):
ten to one.
Speaker 2 (03:32:18):
Would you expect me to do?
Speaker 4 (03:32:20):
Man, expect me just to go with floppy just because
you're counting down. You can try it again, but this
time I'll go a bit slower this time, as you
focus on the whole of your body before we focus
(03:32:45):
on your legs.
Speaker 2 (03:32:48):
Just notice.
Speaker 3 (03:32:50):
How your body does start to feel more relaxed with
every number that I count down ten nine eight seven
(03:33:38):
six five four three.
Speaker 2 (03:34:19):
Two one. I just notice how.
Speaker 3 (03:34:55):
How you feel, generally, how your body feels. It's not
necessarily even about counting down from ten to one. It's
(03:35:16):
that space that you have, that space between being active
physically or mentally to just.
Speaker 2 (03:35:43):
Sitting or lying down just being there, not doing.
Speaker 4 (03:35:48):
Anything, not saying anything, or needing to think about anything.
Speaker 3 (03:35:55):
So it opens up a space, you know, a bit
of a space, a gap. And the more I came
down from ten to one, the bigger that gap becomes.
(03:36:17):
So there's that gap of calmness, of comfort, relaxation.
Speaker 2 (03:36:29):
It's a nice feeling, and it moves.
Speaker 3 (03:36:38):
Those stresses or discomforts physically or emotionally, moves them.
Speaker 2 (03:36:48):
Away, allows you.
Speaker 8 (03:36:59):
To just.
Speaker 2 (03:37:02):
Slow down.
Speaker 3 (03:37:07):
So I'm going to count again from ten down to
one and notice that gap widening, the gap, And as
it widens, it's almost like the stress and attention.
Speaker 2 (03:37:25):
Falls into the gap and gives you that distance, that space.
Speaker 8 (03:37:46):
Now ten.
Speaker 3 (03:37:56):
Nine eight, seven, six, five, four.
Speaker 2 (03:39:05):
Three two.
Speaker 8 (03:39:41):
One.
Speaker 3 (03:39:52):
Now, how did you work? Body feel.
Speaker 8 (03:39:59):
Now?
Speaker 3 (03:40:12):
Can you notice that the feeling calmer, the feeling.
Speaker 2 (03:40:27):
More relaxed.
Speaker 3 (03:40:50):
As we now focus on your legs, just your legs.
(03:41:11):
We're just gonna start with focusing on your thighs. Of course,
(03:41:31):
it's not the most exciting thing to be doing, because.
Speaker 1 (03:41:39):
I'm sure like most of your body is not a
lot going on right now. Just focusing on the whole
of your thighs, the tops of your thigh, the sides
(03:42:01):
of your thighs, the bottoms of your thighs, your outer thighs,
and your inner thighs, basically the whole of your thigh
that leads into your hip.
Speaker 2 (03:42:20):
And it goes down to your knee joint.
Speaker 3 (03:42:30):
Now, this is a big area, it's a very heavy area.
Speaker 1 (03:42:38):
It's very strong, probably the strongest muscles in your body.
Speaker 3 (03:42:45):
Or in your thighs.
Speaker 2 (03:42:56):
But I don't think we.
Speaker 4 (03:42:59):
Perhaps give enough attention to our thighs. Perhaps we don't
acknowledge how important our thighs are to our lives, how
(03:43:34):
much they actually do for us all through our lives.
And it may seem to sound really weird, but.
Speaker 2 (03:43:55):
I think that all of.
Speaker 3 (03:43:57):
Our body parts, especially our thighs, need some TLC, a
bit of love shown, a bit of acknowledgement, thank you,
(03:44:24):
gratitude for our thighs do for us. And I know
this may sound a bit strange. Maybe you think, why
am I? Surely I should be out in the garden
(03:44:46):
hugging a tree or something. Well, it's hard to set
a microphone up on a tree. That's why I'm doing
this indoors. Otherwise I would be outside her in the tree.
I can't see the television.
Speaker 2 (03:45:03):
From the tree.
Speaker 4 (03:45:10):
If you move down to your knees, were gaining such
an important part, And I think we don't necessarily.
Speaker 3 (03:45:23):
I want to speak for myself. I don't necessarily appreciate
all that my needs do for me until I have
a problem with my knee. It's occasionally, if I ever,
maybe i'll bash it, or it's aching for some reason.
(03:45:47):
It's then that I realize how much it does. You know,
the benefit of being able to use my legs without
any kind of physical discomfort.
Speaker 2 (03:46:04):
Is a beautiful thing.
Speaker 3 (03:46:08):
That's possibly not appreciated until it's temporarily removed. You know
that's comfort.
Speaker 4 (03:46:21):
But as you focus on your knees, regardless of how
your knees feel, you can have that sense of gratitude.
Speaker 2 (03:46:34):
And love to your knees for all that they do
for you.
Speaker 3 (03:46:48):
And you can still have that attention on your thighs
and maybe notice how your thighs feel. Maybe you've noticed
that they are are relaxing more deeply as you focus
(03:47:15):
now on the bottoms of your legs, your shins and
your calf muscles and the bones between your knees and
your feet, incorporating of course your ankles.
Speaker 2 (03:47:34):
So important.
Speaker 3 (03:47:40):
You know, anyone that's had even like the slightest sprain
of an ankle knows how how much we take our
ankles for granted. And kind of strange in a way
(03:48:01):
when you think that, you know, logically our wrists are
a lot thinner than the rest of our arms, which
is okay, it doesn't you can't see any problem with
that because we're just picking stuff up by our ankles
(03:48:21):
so much thinner than the rest of our legs, and
from a physics perspective or logical.
Speaker 4 (03:48:35):
Even it doesn't really make sense that all this weight
would ultimately be resting on your ankles then leading to
your feet that thin area, thin bone. Yeah, it does
(03:49:01):
so much great work. Supports us, supports our body for
a lifetime, helps us to balance, It helps you to
(03:49:22):
get around and be mobile. And there's the calf muscles.
Of course, when I was younger, I couldn't see the
point in calf muscles didn't seem to do anything. Okay,
(03:49:45):
if I walked around on tiptoes, then my calf muscles
get some work, But of course that's not true. The
calf muscles are being used whenever we use our legs,
and your shins.
Speaker 3 (03:50:07):
There to protect your lower legs shaped in a way
almost as a protector for the bone, leading of course
(03:50:30):
to your ankles.
Speaker 2 (03:50:34):
And your feet.
Speaker 3 (03:50:40):
But we're not going to focus on your feet. We're
just going to focus on the legs. I realize, and
now that I've mentioned your feet, you'll probably focusing on
them anyway, So maybe I should focus on your feet.
Speaker 4 (03:50:55):
A little bit. You can have them in your awareness
the same as you have your thighs in your awareness.
Speaker 2 (03:51:08):
Even though we haven't.
Speaker 1 (03:51:09):
Been focusing on your thighs for a few minutes and
been focusing on your ankles, there's still that sensation of
comfort in your thighs, and there's that movement.
Speaker 2 (03:51:41):
Of energy.
Speaker 3 (03:51:44):
Because the thighs hold lots of different sensations. Of course,
there's the muscles, the big strong muscles that we have
in our thighs, but the skin on the outside of
(03:52:09):
the thighs, as in the outside of all of our body,
can be very sensitive, sensitive to the touch, sensitive to temperature,
(03:52:34):
and inside your thighs the bones, there's the muscle.
Speaker 4 (03:52:41):
There's the blood, vessels, the ar trees to all this
stuff inside your thighs. And I guess sometimes it'd be
nice if you could actually put your fingers inside your
thighs and a message, so you can message on the outside,
(03:53:06):
of course, but to be able to get deep into
the muscles and to be able to just message inside
your thighs, message in the bones of your leg.
Speaker 3 (03:53:20):
Massage in or the veins, just gently healing your thighs
and you can move down message and inside your knees.
(03:53:40):
Just message in those bones, but with healing.
Speaker 4 (03:53:44):
Fingertips, spreading that healing energy deep into the choice of
your knees.
Speaker 3 (03:53:58):
Of course, there's the back okay, your knee, you know,
the inside crease where your knee is. It's a very
sensitive area. Very it feels very nice when you stroke it.
That might be because it's an area that's not really
(03:54:19):
touched very often. It's almost like a hidden part, that crease.
Speaker 2 (03:54:28):
In your legs. It's almost like a part that.
Speaker 3 (03:54:35):
Has a sensitivity which is a little bit different. Of course,
it's protected by your legs. So you can imagine putting
(03:54:57):
your fingers into that crease your legs fold in between
your legs. You can just message with your fingertips. Imagine
your fingertips going inside message in the muscle tissue. You
(03:55:24):
can cause fielder the bones.
Speaker 4 (03:55:27):
Of your knees, heading through your fingertips, and then if
you go down.
Speaker 3 (03:55:43):
To your calf muscles, and that's the part I'd like
to be able to really put my fingertips deep inside
my calf muscles, the message in every single tissue of
the muscle.
Speaker 8 (03:56:02):
Healing every part.
Speaker 1 (03:56:10):
And then doing the same for my shins, massaging and
generally stroking the bones, generally stroking them, healing in a
loving way, because they deserve to be treated as the
(03:56:31):
precious bones that they are. Because our legs are so
precious as in all the other parts of our body,
the more precious at any chul.
Speaker 3 (03:56:46):
On the planet. When you start to.
Speaker 2 (03:56:57):
Think about your legs in this way, it.
Speaker 3 (03:57:08):
Can change your perspective.
Speaker 2 (03:57:13):
It might sound a bit.
Speaker 3 (03:57:17):
A bit silly to start with the idea of having
love for your legs, showing appreciation for your thighs, wanting
to be able to put your hands in your thighs,
(03:57:39):
massage the muscles and the bones, and to get your
fingers deep in there and releasing all tension, just to.
Speaker 4 (03:57:53):
Show how much you care about your legs, how much
you care for what your legs do for you regularly,
your knees.
Speaker 3 (03:58:12):
Your calves, your ankles. The strength of your ankles, considering
how thin they are compared to the rest of your legs,
especially your thighs. Yeah, they're so strong, so flexible, absolutely
(03:58:44):
amazing things. Your ankles are truly a gift.
Speaker 4 (03:58:55):
Because of what they do for you, supporting all that weight.
Regardless of how what weight you are, even if you
only eat ate stone, there's still a lot of weight
(03:59:16):
for these little ankles. Now I'm a lot heavier than
eight stone.
Speaker 2 (03:59:24):
Double down.
Speaker 3 (03:59:28):
Get my ankles support my body all the time. Whether
they do give off a sigh of relief when I
sit down, that's my whole.
Speaker 2 (03:59:45):
Legs to.
Speaker 3 (03:59:49):
My feet feel also go my toes clap so happy.
(04:00:16):
Your legs really are amazing. And I know that talking
about talking about your legs is probably.
Speaker 4 (04:00:31):
Possibly among the most most boring things I've ever heard
anyone say.
Speaker 3 (04:00:37):
Possibly you're boring or not. Everything I said is true.
Your legs are amazing. Your legs is not just respect.
(04:01:08):
They deserve to relax.
Speaker 2 (04:01:11):
Deeply.
Speaker 3 (04:01:19):
They deserve to take some time out of the day.
Speaker 2 (04:01:24):
To just let go completely relax.
Speaker 3 (04:01:50):
I really can relax. And because the legs are so
such a most you know, very important part of your body.
When you relaction your legs, the rest of your body
(04:02:13):
also naturally follows in that journey of comfort, Like I
feel it in my hips. My hips feel really loose,
(04:02:40):
and also my lower back as well. My lower back
really feels it feels stretched, even though I'm just sitting
in a chair and there's no stretching as far as
I'm aware that I'm doing. But it's almost as if
the lessels are just relaxed so much that there is
(04:03:03):
a natural stretch.
Speaker 2 (04:03:06):
As the tension has reduced.
Speaker 8 (04:03:11):
A lot.
Speaker 3 (04:03:28):
And I'm now going to count down from ten down
to one, and you.
Speaker 2 (04:03:36):
Can continue to feel wonderfully relaxed.
Speaker 8 (04:03:46):
Ten nine.
Speaker 3 (04:03:54):
Eight, seven, six, five, four.
Speaker 2 (04:04:14):
Three two one relax.
Speaker 3 (04:04:37):
So I'm just going to count down for five down
to one, and as a countdown, if you just focus
on the numbers, just the numbers counting down, and notice
how you feel.
Speaker 2 (04:04:59):
In this moment as you hear the numbers counting down,
knowing that those numbers.
Speaker 3 (04:05:10):
Counting down represent you feeling calmer, not just in your body,
but also relaxing your mind.
Speaker 2 (04:05:27):
Just notice how you feel.
Speaker 4 (04:05:30):
There's nothing to do, there's nothing to say, there's nothing
to think about.
Speaker 2 (04:05:39):
Starting with number five.
Speaker 3 (04:05:52):
Four three.
Speaker 2 (04:06:12):
Two one. Now, as you.
Speaker 3 (04:06:29):
Notice the gradual.
Speaker 2 (04:06:37):
Letting go.
Speaker 1 (04:06:40):
Of the tension in your body, you may also begin
to notice and be aware of how your mind is
starting to slow down. This is just a natural thing
(04:07:02):
that happens.
Speaker 3 (04:07:06):
It's not really a special procedure. It's just natural because
as your body relaxes, your mind also starts to relax.
And the more your mind relaxes, the more your body relaxes.
It's just a continuous circle of relaxation. And is that
(04:07:34):
calmness that comes from relative quietness. You know, even even
if this background sounds either your side or mind, it's
still going to be quite calm. You know, you haven't
(04:07:54):
got the television on, there's no music in the background,
unless you're listening to the recording with music. Of course,
you're very likely not going to be sitting in a
room with other people. Of course you might be, but
generally it's more ideal if you can do this on
(04:08:17):
your own, so no distractions, and when you stop thinking
about stuff, relaxation automatically rises. A sense of comfort starts
(04:08:46):
to grow, and.
Speaker 1 (04:08:53):
Without trying to build it up into something fantastical or
something magical, this is just a natural process, something.
Speaker 2 (04:09:10):
That's easy to accomplish. In fact, it's.
Speaker 3 (04:09:18):
Almost you know, the sense of relaxing completely happens really
when you put no effort into it. It's not something
that you can really force. It's something that happens naturally.
(04:09:41):
And part of the process of this recording and others
is simply two allow you to take advantage of this space.
Speaker 2 (04:10:04):
This time, to just.
Speaker 3 (04:10:13):
Let go, to just be here, to be in tune
with how you feel, yet with the intention of wanting
(04:10:36):
to relax deeply and maybe even to fall asleep, depending
on what it is that you wish for yourself in
this moment. As we know, relaxing is the majority of
(04:11:11):
the process of falling asleep. The actual falling asleep part
is the tiny bit at the end. The deeper relaxed
you become, the easier.
Speaker 2 (04:11:33):
You find.
Speaker 1 (04:11:35):
Yourself drifting. But you can also if you choose stay
focused on my voice and really enjoy the process of
(04:12:09):
gradually relaxing each muscle.
Speaker 2 (04:12:27):
In your body.
Speaker 3 (04:12:32):
Effortlessly and just observing the sensation.
Speaker 8 (04:12:53):
Of letting go.
Speaker 2 (04:13:01):
Completely.
Speaker 4 (04:13:08):
This time, I'm going to count from six down to one,
and you can notice your mind.
Speaker 3 (04:13:22):
Calming down more with each number.
Speaker 11 (04:13:29):
That you hear.
Speaker 3 (04:13:30):
Me say.
Speaker 2 (04:13:35):
Naturally feeling.
Speaker 8 (04:13:39):
Calm and slow.
Speaker 2 (04:13:45):
And peaceful.
Speaker 3 (04:13:52):
Sex fivehhhhhhhhhhh, four three two.
Speaker 2 (04:16:18):
One, being aware of how your mind to slowed right down, sinking.
Speaker 3 (04:16:55):
Deeply into real life session. And as you focus on
your mind, you may notice that there are some thoughts
(04:17:25):
still there, maybe some stubborn thoughts that.
Speaker 2 (04:17:33):
For some reason perhaps need your attention. That's what you
can do is.
Speaker 3 (04:17:53):
Send love to those thoughts. Sprinkle those thoughts.
Speaker 8 (04:18:05):
With love.
Speaker 3 (04:18:07):
Like little petals from a flower. Just sprinkle it over them,
petals filled with love towards those thoughts, to let those
thoughts know that you're not abandoned in them.
Speaker 2 (04:18:26):
You just need them. You require them.
Speaker 3 (04:18:32):
To just calm down, slow down, quiet down for now.
(04:18:52):
So as you focus on those remaining thoughts, as we
count down this time from seven down to one. With
each number, just imagine sprinkling those flower petals love, love, kindness,
(04:19:19):
gratitude over those thoughts, which will allow them to just
melt away and relax deeply. With every number, those thoughts
(04:19:47):
will become more and more relaxed. St with number seven, six, five, four.
Speaker 2 (04:21:22):
Three one, how.
Speaker 3 (04:22:31):
As you now notice how relaxed you're feeling in your body,
(04:22:56):
We're going to focus on your hands, because the more
relaxed your hands are, the more relaxed your body and
(04:23:17):
mind are. There you focus on your hands and your fingers.
(04:23:44):
There's nothing needed to be done. There's no clinching the
fists or tents in the fingers or anything like that.
Speaker 4 (04:24:01):
It's just noticing and focusing on your hands, noticing how
they feel.
Speaker 3 (04:24:31):
Because the more relaxed do your hands feel, the calmer
your mind feels, and the more comforts you feel throughout
(04:24:53):
your body.
Speaker 2 (04:24:59):
Ge may.
Speaker 3 (04:25:05):
Have already.
Speaker 2 (04:25:12):
Noticed you.
Speaker 3 (04:25:21):
Mind is starting drift, fixaim just on your hands and fingers,
(04:26:00):
allowing them to experience a real deepening of that relaxation
in your hands and fingers, more and more relaxed. With
(04:26:34):
each number.
Speaker 2 (04:26:42):
From eight down to one, you can almost.
Speaker 3 (04:26:54):
Feel that healing, relaxing energy spreading into your hands and fingers,
becoming more relaxing with each number you hear, going down
(04:27:33):
eight down to one, drifting drifting again starting with.
Speaker 7 (04:27:56):
Number eighth, seven, four, three, just being here now, nothing
(04:31:57):
to think about, nothing to do, nothing to say, and
everything just feels calmer.
Speaker 2 (04:32:15):
And this is your natural state of being.
Speaker 4 (04:32:22):
This is how you just normally feel when you take
away all.
Speaker 3 (04:32:30):
Of that other stuff that we add, you know, things
like stress and worrying and overthinking, anxiety, tension, just generally
(04:32:53):
thinking about stuff. We take that away, which is what
we do.
Speaker 2 (04:33:00):
What we do now.
Speaker 3 (04:33:08):
You're left with.
Speaker 2 (04:33:11):
A real sense of peacefulness.
Speaker 3 (04:33:18):
Which comes to you very quickly because ultimately it's just
a feeling, a feeling of comfort. It's almost as if
(04:33:40):
you've gone inside yourself and you've found a special place
where everything is peaceful, a place where you can film
relaxed and your natural sense and comfort, a place where
(04:34:09):
you can be you, where you can accept yourself and
who you are, the place where you're not trying to
please anybody else ever, a place where you can actually
(04:34:40):
not just love yourself, but in some ways more importantly,
you can like yourself, appreciate.
Speaker 8 (04:34:52):
Who you are.
Speaker 3 (04:35:02):
That sense of gratitude, it's in the air all around you.
That's also a place where you can actually feel the
(04:35:24):
healing energy soaking into your body. Healing energy soaking into
your body.
Speaker 2 (04:35:45):
The healing energy.
Speaker 3 (04:35:47):
Spreads through your veins, traveling to each and every single
part of your body, and you start to realize that
(04:36:08):
actually that healing energy.
Speaker 2 (04:36:13):
It's not just entered into your brain.
Speaker 3 (04:36:18):
It's become part of your brain, and the spinal fluid
is now mixed with healing energy, not just allowing you
(04:36:41):
to feel so much more relaxed and healthy.
Speaker 2 (04:36:48):
In this moment, but also.
Speaker 3 (04:36:58):
You start to realize that actually, what's happening now without healing,
relaxing energy spreading through your body is actually changing your life.
(04:37:22):
It's actually changing the way you're going to feel not
just now, but tomorrow and the next day. As your
health improves, not just your physical health, but your mental health.
(04:37:47):
Things that used to bother you in the past, for
some reason, no longer.
Speaker 2 (04:37:56):
Have the effect that they used to.
Speaker 3 (04:38:01):
Because something has changed.
Speaker 2 (04:38:05):
Deep within you.
Speaker 3 (04:38:11):
Maybe things that used to cause you to feel anger
no longer have that power to control you.
Speaker 2 (04:38:32):
The way they seem to be able to before.
Speaker 1 (04:38:38):
As you realize that you're the one who decides what
affects you, you're the one who decides to feel relaxed
(04:39:01):
and calm when you choose.
Speaker 2 (04:39:09):
To enjoy.
Speaker 3 (04:39:11):
Noticing these natural developments.
Speaker 2 (04:39:19):
Of healing.
Speaker 3 (04:39:22):
Continuing to grow.
Speaker 1 (04:39:27):
And improve your life day by day, including of course,
your ability.
Speaker 3 (04:39:41):
To relax so much easier than sleeping.
Speaker 1 (04:39:55):
It's the most natural thing in the world to you
because Falling asleep is something that you've done so many times.
Speaker 2 (04:40:15):
In your life, and you know that you were born,
as we all.
Speaker 3 (04:40:23):
Were, with the ability to fall asleep naturally. We were
born with that ability.
Speaker 2 (04:40:40):
To just drift off into a deep, healing sleep.
Speaker 3 (04:40:54):
Even when we're kids, sometimes will fall asleep when we
don't even want to.
Speaker 2 (04:41:02):
Try to think of stay awake.
Speaker 3 (04:41:05):
Maybe it's a birthday in the morning, or it's Christmas
or holiday or something we look forward to.
Speaker 2 (04:41:12):
We don't want to go to sleep.
Speaker 4 (04:41:16):
But the more we want to stay awake, the more
we just start to drift. And the more you fight drifting.
We're try to stop yourself.
Speaker 3 (04:41:32):
And drifting asleep, the deeper and strongerout drifting becomes. Because
we're born not just with the need to relax deeply
(04:41:52):
and to naturally fall asleep, but it's our birth right,
it's part of our DNA, and sometimes as we get
(04:42:13):
older in life, perhaps at times we have forgotten.
Speaker 2 (04:42:24):
Relaxing completely.
Speaker 3 (04:42:28):
It's not only a wonderfully pleasant experience, it's also really easy.
Speaker 2 (04:42:53):
It's very very.
Speaker 3 (04:42:55):
Easy to let go because that's all it.
Speaker 8 (04:43:01):
Is, is just.
Speaker 1 (04:43:05):
Deciding to let go. And when you press the play
button on my recordings. You have given permission.
Speaker 2 (04:43:27):
For my voice to elect.
Speaker 4 (04:43:33):
When you press that play button, you have given me
permission for my words.
Speaker 2 (04:43:44):
To effect.
Speaker 3 (04:43:47):
You in a positive, only a positive way, opening up
your mind.
Speaker 2 (04:44:07):
To useful and healing.
Speaker 3 (04:44:16):
Suggestions that can have such an amazing effect on how
you feel right now, as well as those changes that
(04:44:45):
continue long after the recording ends, those changes within you
that continue to flow, wish and grow, transforming your life
(04:45:10):
in a positive, beautiful way, allowing you to move forward
in your life in the direction that you choose for yourself.
(04:45:39):
And this feeling, this feeling that you can experience a safety, comfort, calmness.
Speaker 2 (04:45:58):
This feels so nice.
Speaker 3 (04:46:09):
It's such a healthy place to be, and that positivity
grows within you. Eat and every day moving forward, you're
(04:46:43):
going to find that you're more relaxed physically and in
your mind is more relaxed. And it's not that you're
thinking slower. It's just that your mind will be less
(04:47:09):
clogged up with unnecessary negativity because from now on, your
mind rejects negativity. From now on, you're going to start
(04:47:31):
noticing when negativity arises and you can just say stop, stop,
and that negativity will turn around and leave you alone.
Speaker 2 (04:48:05):
Stop and then negativity.
Speaker 8 (04:48:14):
Would disappear.
Speaker 3 (04:48:23):
And as you notice that you feel way more relaxed
than you probably expected.
Speaker 2 (04:48:39):
You can now.
Speaker 1 (04:48:43):
Congratulate yourself because you're the person that has done this.
You are the one that has opened your mind up
to the simple facts. You can feel more relaxed in
(04:49:05):
your body and in your mind.
Speaker 3 (04:49:14):
You've opened your mind up to the birthright of being.
Speaker 8 (04:49:20):
Able to just.
Speaker 2 (04:49:23):
Fall asleep easily when you choose.
Speaker 3 (04:49:37):
And that's a nice feeling.
Speaker 2 (04:49:40):
Don't you think.
Speaker 3 (04:49:43):
It feels nice?
Speaker 2 (04:49:44):
Doesn't it?
Speaker 3 (04:49:47):
To feel calm? All that healing energy is spreading through
your body in your mind to spend time in a
special place where negativity can no longer enter. Negativity is banned,
(04:50:24):
it's barred, it's not allowed entry. Doesn't it doesn't.
Speaker 2 (04:50:32):
This doesn't deserve to be here.
Speaker 3 (04:50:34):
It doesn't belong here. Negativity has no place in your life,
which makes room for more comfort, more healing, more relaxation,
(04:51:08):
more peace. It feels nice, doesn't it.
Speaker 2 (04:51:29):
Just let go with everything.
Speaker 3 (04:51:51):
I'm gonna count down now from twenty down to one.
You can conte in you to relax. If you choose,
you can.
Speaker 2 (04:52:08):
Drift to sleep with every number.
Speaker 3 (04:52:18):
You hear me say you can fill twice is relaxed
or if you choose you can fill twice sleeping now
(04:52:46):
twenty nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twoeve eleven ten, nine, eight,
(04:54:36):
seven six five.
Speaker 2 (04:55:02):
Oh oh, this is your time.
Speaker 1 (04:55:39):
To just take a break, your time to relax, to
allow your mind to slow down, to give yourself permission.
Speaker 2 (04:56:11):
To take a break.
Speaker 3 (04:56:18):
From everything. Ensure the only person that can make that decision.
You're the only person that can actually tell your mind
(04:56:38):
to just relax, to just take some time off so
(04:57:03):
that you can focus on your body, getting in touch
with how you feel.
Speaker 8 (04:57:12):
Physically.
Speaker 4 (04:57:21):
And in the process of this body scanned where you
focus on different parts of your body, those parts that
you focus on and observe.
Speaker 1 (04:57:44):
Even though you're not purposely requesting for those parts of
your body to relax, it's.
Speaker 2 (04:57:56):
Kind of expected, bect.
Speaker 3 (04:58:01):
When you listen to my voice to feel more relaxed naturally,
because when you're listening to me, your attention is focused
(04:58:25):
on my words, and as my words guide you.
Speaker 2 (04:58:36):
To focus.
Speaker 1 (04:58:41):
On those parts of your body, your focus increases, which
actually can't comes your mind. And when your mind calms down,
(04:59:17):
your body relaxes, and when your body calms down, your
(04:59:39):
mind relaxes. And even though we've not really started to
focus on your body, you can already.
Speaker 3 (05:00:04):
Feel that healing energy spreading through your body, pushing out.
Speaker 4 (05:00:21):
Stress and tension, healing all the parts of your body,
including your skin, your bones, your blood, all of your
(05:00:41):
organs inside your body, all of the muscles, all of
the fat, all.
Speaker 2 (05:00:50):
Of everything, every hair on your body is filled with
that healing energy.
Speaker 3 (05:01:07):
Than when your brain fills without hearing energy. The feeling
of comfort, relaxation.
Speaker 2 (05:01:31):
Increases, deeply, increases in a way that your mind.
Speaker 3 (05:01:56):
Starts to fill perhaps bit drowsing because it's not needed,
and it may.
Speaker 2 (05:02:14):
Start to drift if that's what's needed. So if you're
listening to this and what you need is deep relaxation, that's.
Speaker 8 (05:02:39):
Where you get. If what you need is to fall asleep.
Speaker 3 (05:02:48):
Naturally and easily, that your mind drifts, that's also what happened.
Speaker 2 (05:03:04):
Because by.
Speaker 4 (05:03:07):
Pressing a play button on the podcast and listening to
me give permission.
Speaker 3 (05:03:17):
Your body and your mind. In fact, you give the
command to your body and your mind to relax deeply.
Speaker 2 (05:03:41):
And to drift off to sleep, if that's what you want,
or need them.
Speaker 3 (05:03:58):
As I focus.
Speaker 2 (05:04:01):
On the different.
Speaker 3 (05:04:02):
Parts of your body, you may start to just drift,
and then you come back again and you hear me
talk again, and I'm focusing on a different part of
(05:04:25):
your body.
Speaker 4 (05:04:31):
You may.
Speaker 3 (05:04:34):
Find yourself drifting, be able to realize you're drifting. Until
you stop drifting, you're alert again to my voice. Focusing
on a different part of your body starts to relaxing
(05:04:58):
and deeper, because that drifting is basically here already in
the sleep zone. And the more you drift, the longer
(05:05:20):
you drift, the longer you drift. Eventually, that drifting continues
into sleep, and that's the last you remember until you
(05:05:43):
wake up in your own time, when.
Speaker 4 (05:05:50):
You've experienced the right amount of sleep. Fear because when
you do it, and if you don't fall asleep, it's
extremely pleasant, so relaxing, so deep healing.
Speaker 2 (05:06:20):
Sleep.
Speaker 3 (05:06:31):
I feel so nice to relax into your own body
and mind. If you feel that healing image is spreading
through you, relaxing us so deeply excit sic start to focus.
Speaker 2 (05:07:17):
On your eyes.
Speaker 8 (05:07:26):
Moving down.
Speaker 2 (05:07:30):
To you, jaw.
Speaker 3 (05:07:38):
Down, till lack, your shoulders, arm, fingus, you chest, stom.
Speaker 18 (05:08:35):
You bank, spine, your hips, your legs, your face, your.
Speaker 3 (05:09:19):
Tes, feeding, spreading grin inside your body, feeling you up.
(05:09:54):
Now let's focus again on parts of your body, focusing
this time on your forehead. Now on your mouth, your lips,
(05:10:20):
your tongue, the whole of your mouth. Focusing on your fingers.
Speaker 2 (05:10:46):
Maybe you could.
Speaker 3 (05:10:48):
Move your fingers a little bits. You can focus on
each one individually, both hands.
Speaker 2 (05:11:06):
And even though if you focus on both of your hands.
Speaker 4 (05:11:10):
Now they almost seemed to just melt into one. Where
is your right hand, starting your left hand and almost
as if just mixed together. Now focusing on your knees,
(05:11:45):
just noticing how your knees hell. Now, focusing on your helpers,
(05:12:11):
focusing on both your elbows, just absurd, the feeling.
Speaker 3 (05:12:26):
Of your elbows now, focusing I'm sorry, the back of
(05:12:57):
your neck, energy, the bacon.
Speaker 4 (05:13:45):
Upside echoes. It's a good of sensation, acos.
Speaker 2 (05:15:07):
Can I just say now your ties, but if of
your faint.
Speaker 3 (05:15:26):
Being with how your ties feel right now, ninety cents,
(05:16:22):
how you entire body fails, not to sin, your mind.
Speaker 2 (05:16:48):
Fails.
Speaker 4 (05:16:52):
Now letting go, letting go, letting go everything, letting go,
(05:17:52):
letting go, letting go, h everything, everything.
Speaker 3 (05:18:26):
I'm going to start now, and I'd like you just,
first of all, just to see yourself lying down on
their message table, lying on your front. Your head is supported,
your arms are supported, and you feel comfortable.
Speaker 4 (05:18:50):
And breathing is really easy, and you feel you feel
comfort in how you look as well. So there's none
of that issue of body problems or shyness, because I'm
a professional and this is a therapy session, so none
(05:19:17):
of that stuff matters whatsoever.
Speaker 2 (05:19:23):
This is about you.
Speaker 3 (05:19:27):
This is about how you feel and how you can
enjoy that sense of comfort and relaxation that comes from
letting go and allowing my hands my fingers to relax
(05:19:47):
you by messaging your body. So I want to start off.
I placed in my hands on the back of your head,
just gently, just so you can feel my hands feel
(05:20:11):
like really on you. So you can maybe feel the
warmth of my hands on the back of your head.
Speaker 4 (05:20:24):
With my hands to the side of your head, not pressing,
but just holding there very gently, maybe over your ears,
and a little bit on your face, just so you
can feel my hands.
Speaker 2 (05:20:42):
So you can become accustomed to them.
Speaker 3 (05:20:54):
And now put my hands on the back of your
head again and gently them slide down onto the back
of your neck.
Speaker 4 (05:21:12):
You can feel my hands gently stroking the back of
your neck to start with, just so you can get
used to the feeling of my hands on your skin,
(05:21:34):
get accustomed to realize that you're safe and it's all good, it's.
Speaker 3 (05:21:43):
All fine, and I'm going to start gently messaging the
muscles in the back of your neck with both hands.
(05:22:10):
And this is a very trusting situation really, because our
next is so fragile and to have someone have their
hands around your neck in that way can sometimes be
problematic for people, which is why massages are quite good,
(05:22:32):
because it allows you to relax and get in touch
with trust, to feel peaceful and calm. There's a massage
(05:22:59):
decides of your.
Speaker 2 (05:23:00):
Neck gently.
Speaker 4 (05:23:04):
Moving from the bottom of your neck. It would be
sort of near where your shoulders start, I guess.
Speaker 3 (05:23:13):
All the way up.
Speaker 4 (05:23:16):
To your jaw, your ears, kind of area the side
of your neck. Of course, it's a lot longer than
the front of your neck. And message in the back.
Speaker 3 (05:23:43):
Of your neck, especially that area where perhaps we hold tension,
and there's that area's message. You can actually feel a
sense of release in the back of your neck and
(05:24:08):
maybe you can breathe it out as well. Notice how
it feels, Notice how you feel. And they're moving down
to that area between your neck and your shoulders, that
(05:24:32):
muscle area, starting to massage that area on both sides.
Speaker 4 (05:24:43):
I mean, this would be the area that a lot
of people would message if they were going to give
you like a shoulder message. Even that's not technically the shoulders,
but it's all the muscles that lead to the shoulders.
Speaker 2 (05:24:58):
From the neck.
Speaker 3 (05:25:01):
And again that can hold tension and stress and when
massaged sometimes a nice deep message is useful. And you
decide how deep that message is, and just allow my
(05:25:32):
knuckles just to dig in to get to those muscles
and to really.
Speaker 2 (05:25:42):
Relaxed them.
Speaker 3 (05:25:46):
All the time, and being firm yet gentle with you
and just stroking down the area to your actual shoulders,
(05:26:12):
moving to the muscles of your shoulders, and maybe initially
just pulling up the shoulders a little bit off the
table just to give you a little bit of a stretch,
but very gently. And you've got the muscles at the
(05:26:40):
front of your shoulders, the sides and the back. Again,
this is a part that can really take quite a
bit of pressure, quite a bit of needing. If if
(05:27:04):
you wish to really release the tension.
Speaker 4 (05:27:12):
To really get into those muscles, and you can let
your fingers in there and make you feel really nice.
Sometimes just being stroked gently or being massaged quite strongly
(05:27:35):
can all be beneficial to the reorxation with the muscles
in your shoulders.
Speaker 3 (05:27:56):
Now to move down your arms, were doing one arm
at a time. Starting with your right arm, what I'll
do is I just lift your arm up, just hold
(05:28:20):
it to the side of you, don't words still be attached,
and I just message the tops of your arms all
(05:28:43):
the way down to your forearms into your wrists, gently
massaging that part, the softer part, which is the under
(05:29:14):
part of the arm, which leads to the crease in
your elbow. The inside it's much more sensitive skin. Sometimes
(05:29:35):
just having that stroked feel really nice, pleasurable and relaxing.
Speaker 2 (05:29:55):
Now moving down to your right hand, just holding your hand.
Speaker 4 (05:30:09):
In both of my hands, just pressing gently on the
back of your hand, stretching your fingers.
Speaker 3 (05:30:26):
Ever so lightly, at the same time pressing down and
massaging each finger, and then starting to massage the palms
(05:30:48):
of their hand.
Speaker 2 (05:30:56):
Just turning the hand gently, stretching it gently, and actually.
Speaker 3 (05:31:07):
Have in your handheld can really be an emotional experience
sometimes even if it is a stranger. So when you
don't know very well, like a massage person or a therapist,
maybe because it's intimate, you can feel nice, you can
(05:31:41):
feel safe. As I put that right arm back down
where it was and did the same with your left arm,
(05:32:04):
exactly the same, massaging the muscles.
Speaker 2 (05:32:13):
In your arm all the way down to your.
Speaker 3 (05:32:16):
Wrist, stroking the inside of your arm, just being gentle
or as firm as you require. And then massaging your
(05:32:44):
left hand, stretching the fingers, gently massaging the palm of
your left hand.
Speaker 2 (05:33:13):
You feel so m so relaxing, so comforting, and I'll.
Speaker 3 (05:33:41):
Just rest your left arm back down. The start to
message your back, the biggest part of your body, starting
(05:34:04):
at the top, starting again where he already have been,
the area at the top in between your shoulders, near
your neck. Going back and massage in the area again,
but this time moving downwards, taking it downward. Stroke to
(05:34:36):
the middle of your back, working from the outside inwards.
Speaker 2 (05:34:43):
So massage in that your back, but the.
Speaker 3 (05:34:50):
Outsides of your back, the pads we are arms would
maybe rest against almost the part that connects your front
(05:35:14):
to your back.
Speaker 2 (05:35:24):
Just messaging down.
Speaker 3 (05:35:28):
Firmly but gently as firm as you want, moving down
and moving across a little beard, moving all the way
down again, be very gentle yet firm as you choose.
(05:35:55):
Eventually we get to the spine. We can mess out
just the muscles and either side of your spine.
Speaker 2 (05:36:04):
From the top of your neck all the way down
to your lower back.
Speaker 4 (05:36:17):
We can do that a few times. Sometimes people use
the knuckle or the you know, two fingers and just
go either side of the spine almost just push down,
(05:36:37):
go all the way down to the bottom.
Speaker 3 (05:36:39):
Of the spine, each time releasing tension and opening up
the body, stretching your body so that you feel more
relaxed but at the same time rejuvenated.
Speaker 4 (05:37:14):
And now I'm going to move to one side, to
your right side, and from the bottom of your ribs.
Speaker 3 (05:37:27):
To your pelvis, I'm going to message that area of
your back. I'll stretch over the other.
Speaker 4 (05:37:36):
Side and i will pull the muscles gently and massage
and push from one end that side or the way
to my side in the middle of fact to where
your spine is, massaging that side of your spine the
(05:37:58):
opposite side to where I'm standing. Then it's almost like
kneading bread. There's that big area.
Speaker 2 (05:38:08):
Which is.
Speaker 3 (05:38:10):
Firm yet lots there to message.
Speaker 4 (05:38:19):
Potentially one of the most important places to actually have
a message.
Speaker 3 (05:38:26):
Because you really feel it. You really feel the release
and the pleasure of having your lower back massaged. It
releases so much from your body that's not useful, starting
(05:38:49):
a healing process which will continue long after this recording
is over. The message in this part of your body
not only feels.
Speaker 4 (05:39:09):
Really good for you, it's actually fun to do because
it is, as I said, like kneading bread, it's a
part that you can really get hold of.
Speaker 3 (05:39:24):
And really message deeply. If that's your choice.
Speaker 4 (05:39:37):
They're not going to move over to the other side
of your body and do the same with the opposite
part of your lawer bag.
Speaker 3 (05:39:52):
Kneading and messaging from your sides or way to the
middle of your back where your spine is pressing and
kneading firm and gentle at the same time. It feels
(05:40:20):
so releasing. This mixture of pleasure, comfort, release, calmness, relaxation
or mixed together. Plus there's that feeling from your stomach
(05:40:45):
as it's being stretched. Even though you're in your stomach now,
you can feel it being stretched because that whole area
is connected to your stomach.
Speaker 4 (05:41:04):
Now we're going to move or move further up to
your top of your body, and I'm we do the
same this time, starting with your upper back. Put my
hands forward.
Speaker 3 (05:41:22):
Over and massive massage in that area up to your spine,
from the side of your body up to your spine.
So some of that message area, the muscle tissue or
whatever fatty tissue even will be possibly from your chest
(05:41:47):
because it's all connected, chest and the back connect together.
I'm going to be massaging and just pulling some of
that skin from your side up and message in that
area of your upper back all the way to your spine.
(05:42:18):
And then I'll move down a bit and I'll continue
with the middle of your back doing exactly the same thing.
Speaker 2 (05:42:27):
As gentle, as deep as you choose.
Speaker 4 (05:42:40):
Now I'll move or the other side again and do
the exact same thing with the top of your back
on the other side, from.
Speaker 3 (05:42:56):
Pretty much underneath your arm area really to your spine,
and then continuing that all the way down.
Speaker 4 (05:43:16):
Including your lower your middle of your back. I'm gonna
go to your thighs, the backs of your thighs and
(05:43:40):
the sides of your thighs, starting with your right leg,
Massage in the back and the sides of your thighs
gently and firmly. There's a lot of muscles there. It's
(05:44:06):
an area that can be very tense at times and
maybe needs a little bit more pressure than the rest
of the body that's up to you. You can gently
stroke the back of your legs where you know, opposite
(05:44:29):
your knee joint or underneath your knee joint. It's very sensitive,
gentle area.
Speaker 3 (05:44:44):
And then working down to your calf muscles. Massage in
your calf muscles thoroughly and deeply, if you choose, using
both hands fingers, digging deep to your ankles, in the
(05:45:19):
back of your back of your ankles, just gently message
in that area, maybe lifting the leg and stretching it.
Speaker 2 (05:45:38):
A little bit.
Speaker 3 (05:45:49):
Moving to the right foot, massage in the bottom of
your feet and the sides of your feet gently but
(05:46:19):
firm enough so they don't tickle, and just allow the
pleasure that you get from heaving your feet massaged to
just overtake you. As I continue to message your feet,
(05:46:46):
the bottoms of your feet, the sides your arches, your heel.
You can put a lot of pressure into your heel
and if it was amazing, yet.
Speaker 4 (05:47:03):
The arches need to be a bit more gentle. Stretching
your toes gently and massage in the bottoms of your
toes with my fingers, each one individually.
Speaker 3 (05:47:33):
Moving over to the left leg to do exactly the
same thing. Starting at the top of the thighs. Work
in the back of the thighs and the sides, massaging
deeply and gently.
Speaker 4 (05:47:55):
The whole area, working all the way down. And this
is an area that maybe you could like to spend
(05:48:16):
more time relaxing and massaging. Perhaps, if you wanted, I
could make a future recording. I want to spend more
time on one particular area.
Speaker 2 (05:48:37):
As you moved down.
Speaker 3 (05:48:41):
To your calf muscles, massagy and your calf muscles.
Speaker 2 (05:48:52):
Firmly and gently, moving down.
Speaker 3 (05:49:04):
Your ankle into your feet, Massage in the backs of
your feet, the bottoms of your feet, stretching your toes
and message in each toe individually. And that feeling of
(05:49:27):
pleasure and release. The experience when you're having your feet
massaged feels really good. Now, she turn over in your mind.
(05:49:57):
Laying on your back, I'm just gonna start again.
Speaker 4 (05:50:10):
Your neck area, in your shoulders, just to get back
in touch with that area, and as you move up,
(05:50:42):
I can clean my hands, make them more fresh, because
now I'm gonna message your face simply.
Speaker 2 (05:50:55):
Starting off with your forehead.
Speaker 3 (05:51:04):
Your eyes are closed, I can just stretch your eyes
a little bit, pushing up on your eyebrows, just massaging
around your scalp, massaging down your cheeks, around your ears,
(05:51:37):
into your jaw, shently the side of your neck.
Speaker 8 (05:51:50):
Chin.
Speaker 3 (05:52:02):
They're just moving down.
Speaker 4 (05:52:07):
From your neck down to your chest, starting him by
message in the very top of your chest.
Speaker 2 (05:52:21):
Where the collar bone is.
Speaker 3 (05:52:24):
Give a side of the collarbone, and then just message
in the hole of the chest, moving the chest around.
(05:52:57):
Because it's quite a large area. You can move from
one side to the next, moving my hands underneath pretty
much your arms are stretching up, stretching some of the
(05:53:23):
muscles of your back in the process, moving up over
your chest, and they're moving down again the little laying
(05:53:53):
my hands. They're just massage gently and slide down to
your stomach, starting in the middle of your chest, and
then gradually my head's moving apart and massaging and sliding
(05:54:16):
at the same time, moving down.
Speaker 2 (05:54:23):
To just below your red cage, moving.
Speaker 3 (05:54:35):
Down and then messaging up again, giving your chest all
the attention.
Speaker 2 (05:54:47):
That it needs.
Speaker 3 (05:54:50):
To feel completely relaxed.
Speaker 4 (05:55:01):
Remembering that I'm also going to be focusing on your
sides as well, an area that really doesn't get much
attention but feels really good when it's massaged. Just stroking
(05:55:22):
my hands down the.
Speaker 3 (05:55:24):
Sides of your body, just below your arms all the
way down to your hips. Now moving to your stomach area,
(05:55:47):
I'm going to stand on one side of you like
I did when I did your lower back. I'm gonna
do a similar process of just stretching the muscles from
your side, gently messaging from one side to the next,
(05:56:16):
move in.
Speaker 4 (05:56:19):
The whole area from below your ribs all the way
down to below your belly button, and then move.
Speaker 3 (05:56:34):
Around to the other side of you and repeat that
process of relaxing, deeply, calmly. You feel loose, you feel free.
Speaker 4 (05:57:00):
And it's something about having your stomach massage that's different
from any other part.
Speaker 3 (05:57:09):
Because we do have a tendency of holding a different
kind of stress in your stomach that we may not
be aware of. There's an ol massage your stomach. In
front of your stomach, they can circles around your belly
(05:57:36):
button and then going the other way around. There a
gentleness and a freedom that comes from feeling how you're feeling.
Speaker 2 (05:58:04):
As I now move down.
Speaker 4 (05:58:07):
The tops of your thighs, muscles, massaging them, and I
can do this to your legs at the same time,
pressing down, massaging deeply those muscles in your thighs, the
(05:58:29):
front of your thighs, and moving down to your knees,
gently massaging your knees, sliding down your shins, putting pressure
(05:58:51):
on either side of your shin gently softly but firmly,
moving down to your ankles, stroking the tops of your feet,
(05:59:19):
and then with each foot in each hand, just gently
messaging the whole of the foot, the top, the bottom,
your heel, your ankle, your toes, messaging every part of
(05:59:42):
your feet.
Speaker 3 (05:59:48):
Feels so good, Just to let go and enjoy the process.
Speaker 4 (06:00:00):
Joy feeling so deeply relaxed. So much comfort and so
many feelings become just from touching your skin.
Speaker 2 (06:00:35):
And you can just lie there.
Speaker 4 (06:00:40):
For as long as you choose, enjoying the feeling of
deep comfort.
Speaker 3 (06:00:53):
From being massaged by me, Enjoy.
Speaker 2 (06:01:09):
Fearing deeply, ra And all we're gonna do is blow
(06:01:31):
out some candles in your mind.
Speaker 3 (06:01:46):
There're gonna be a hundred candles, and you're gonna blow
each one out, okay, individually, one by one, starting at
(06:02:07):
one hundred. As I count down.
Speaker 4 (06:02:15):
All the way down to one, and each time I
say a number, you can imagine that candle in front
of you, and I'd like you to actually physically.
Speaker 3 (06:02:42):
Generally blow that candle out, just so it's not big blows,
just a gentle, and that candle will extinguish. And then
(06:03:13):
I'll say the next number.
Speaker 2 (06:03:16):
So we move down. Then you can just.
Speaker 4 (06:03:24):
Blow that one out as well. And as we move
down the numbers, you'll find yourself feeding.
Speaker 3 (06:03:43):
More and more relaxed, and if you need to sleep,
you'll also find yourself becoming incredibly tired and sleepy. In fact,
(06:04:04):
you may struggle to blow.
Speaker 2 (06:04:10):
Out all one hundred of these candles.
Speaker 4 (06:04:22):
As you feel more and more deeply relaxed, more and more.
Speaker 2 (06:04:44):
Deeply tired, and the fur you go down, the more
your mind.
Speaker 3 (06:05:04):
Starts to drift. You may find that you stop listening
to me after a while, and even though there maybe
(06:05:31):
background sounds where you are, you'll be aware of those sounds.
Speaker 2 (06:05:43):
At the moment he may start to just not even
notice them at all.
Speaker 3 (06:06:07):
Because they're unimportant. Where I am, I've got the sounds
of the birds. There's all horrors, the pigeon who likes
(06:06:28):
to say hello. Sometimes there's the odd plane that goes by,
maybe traffic and trains.
Speaker 2 (06:06:43):
In the distance.
Speaker 3 (06:06:50):
But none of that scene is important whatsoever. Or candles
you blow out, the less important.
Speaker 2 (06:07:08):
Anything is.
Speaker 3 (06:07:15):
Or candles you blow out. The furv seemed to.
Speaker 2 (06:07:26):
Move away.
Speaker 4 (06:07:33):
From sounds, from general date days. Stuff seems to just
move away.
Speaker 2 (06:07:53):
On its own. Feel more.
Speaker 3 (06:08:03):
Calmer with every candle you blow out, guiding you.
Speaker 4 (06:08:24):
To the next number. Did you hear me say? And
then you blow that candle out?
Speaker 2 (06:08:40):
Too?
Speaker 3 (06:08:48):
So easy, so simple. I'm gonna start by introducing the
(06:09:12):
first candle. This is a hundred.
Speaker 2 (06:09:24):
First candle, this.
Speaker 3 (06:09:29):
Is one hundred. When you blow that candle out, you'll
find immediately a slight.
Speaker 2 (06:09:53):
Change in how you feel, as well as a real
sense of.
Speaker 3 (06:10:08):
Positivity growing within you, relaxation and sleepiness expanding. Starting with
(06:10:43):
one hundred, blow out that candle now ninety nine candle
(06:11:27):
ninety eight, candle ninety seven, che mid this six candle,
(06:13:05):
ninety five, candle.
Speaker 2 (06:13:27):
Ninety four candle n.
Speaker 3 (06:14:02):
Thorree, I like you too, ninety one candle ninety, can
(06:15:54):
eighty nine, hand eight eight, candle eightis, candle eightius eighty
(06:18:47):
five and cansh.
Speaker 8 (06:19:51):
Can eighty two and two eight two onehhhhhhhh.
Speaker 3 (06:22:26):
Seventy nine, Candle seventy eight, candle seventy seven, candle seventy six,
(06:24:11):
candle seventy five, candle seventy four, candle seventy three, candle
(06:25:16):
seventy two, candle seventy one, candle seventy one, candle seventy
(06:26:33):
and sixty nine, candle sixty eight, candle sixty seven, candle
(06:27:30):
sixty five, candle sixty four, candle sixty four, candle sixty three,
(06:28:42):
candle sixty sixty one, candle sixty, handle fifty nine, candle
(06:30:37):
fifty eight, candle fifty seven, candle fifty six, candle fifty five,
(06:32:14):
handle fifty four, handle fifty three and fifty two cand fifty,
(06:34:08):
candle fifty two, candle fifty one, candle fifty, candle forty nine,
(06:36:16):
came forty eight, forty seven, candle forty six, candle forty five,
(06:38:39):
handle forty two, Can do you candle forty, candle thirty nine, eighth,
(06:42:04):
candle thirty seven, candle thirty five, thirty four candle thirty three,
(06:44:55):
candle zero one, candle thirty candle twenty eighteen nine candle,
(06:47:54):
twenty eight, candle twenty seven, twenty six candle twenty five,
(06:51:00):
two four and twenty thirtyshhhhhh.
Speaker 8 (06:52:23):
Can to.
Speaker 2 (06:52:26):
To te t.
Speaker 8 (06:53:00):
And twenty one.
Speaker 2 (06:53:41):
And waiting.
Speaker 3 (06:54:24):
And don say seventy can.
Speaker 8 (06:56:37):
Six day four twohhhhhhhhhh.
Speaker 2 (07:00:35):
And nine.
Speaker 19 (07:02:51):
Two eight came can dohhhhhhh.
Speaker 2 (07:08:03):
Candle or let go.
Speaker 4 (07:08:19):
Of all of those thoughts, worries, concerns about the past,
thoughts about the future, and even things you've been thinking
about today.
Speaker 2 (07:08:34):
Just let it all go because none of it.
Speaker 1 (07:08:39):
Is useful in this moment. This is your opportunity to
just focus on feeling relaxed, allowing yourself to get in
(07:09:08):
touch with that natural sense of peace.
Speaker 3 (07:09:17):
That we all have within us. It's available for everyone.
It just sometimes takes a little bit of effort to
set up the.
Speaker 2 (07:09:30):
Right time and place.
Speaker 3 (07:09:35):
In order for you to just let go. Because when
you do decide to let go and relax, that's what
your body starts to do because you've chosen You've chosen
(07:09:58):
to just allow your body to unwind and your mind
starts to slow down, and it's a nice feeling It's
a nice feeling at the beginning, just to know that
you have chosen to decide to relax deeply, and because
(07:10:28):
you've made that decision, your body will just follow suit.
Speaker 1 (07:10:36):
Because sometimes all the muscles in your body need is
just permission from you to relax.
Speaker 4 (07:10:49):
Because so often we're busy, we're going from here to there,
we're walking around, and we're doing stuff, and the body
does and have any time or space to really relax deeply.
(07:11:11):
So it kind of waits for you to lead the way, waits.
Speaker 2 (07:11:16):
For your permission. And when you do.
Speaker 3 (07:11:24):
Give your permission, when you give the say so, when
you say okay, it's time.
Speaker 2 (07:11:34):
For your body.
Speaker 4 (07:11:37):
To let go completely and relax totally, your body just follows.
Speaker 2 (07:11:49):
So like a breath of relief. Ah good, I can
now relax.
Speaker 3 (07:11:58):
That feeling at the end of a day of very
physical day that you may experience in the past, where
you get home and you just sit down on a chair,
maybe you kick your shoes off, and.
Speaker 2 (07:12:14):
Feels so nice.
Speaker 3 (07:12:18):
I know that you don't have to get up again
for a little while at least, and if you choose,
you can just sit there for maybe an hour to
feels blissful and just by sitting down like that, your
(07:12:42):
body knows that it's time to relax. Your body has
been given permission from you because it's a mindset.
Speaker 2 (07:12:55):
In your mind head to let go of everything.
Speaker 3 (07:13:06):
And just completely allow all the stress of your body
to evaporate. Any tensions can just gradually.
Speaker 2 (07:13:25):
Vanish.
Speaker 3 (07:13:32):
It's almost like magic, really, because that sense of relaxation
in your body, it's a very natural state. It's not
something unusual. It may feel unusual when you first start
(07:13:55):
to relax. You if you haven't really spent a lot
of time focusing and giving yourself this space to let
go completely and relax, they seem almost alien, but it isn't.
It's actually the most natural thing in the world to
(07:14:19):
let go completely, to relax totally, the most natural thing
in the world to allow yourself to feel really calm
(07:14:42):
in your mind. And it is almost like a literal unwinding.
It's like you press a button.
Speaker 4 (07:14:57):
And all at tension just releases, and it's like a wheel,
like a cog, like the inside of the clock just unwinding.
And he's almost I could see that the little wind
up knob that's used just going the opposite way that
(07:15:18):
you choose to wind it up, and the energy that
frenetic stress for energy gradually winding down, losing its power, losing.
Speaker 8 (07:15:36):
Its strength.
Speaker 3 (07:15:40):
As a sense of relaxation becomes stronger and deeper, and
you may find a The more relaxed you feel, your
mind starts wonder, maybe seem to stop listening to me
(07:16:08):
for a while, Your mind goes somewhere else, and then
you realize you're listening to me again, and now it's
just your mind to drifting to sleep, which is quite natural,
(07:16:31):
because sometimes when we're stressed and tense.
Speaker 4 (07:16:38):
We're not May I actually be aware of what we
need or we physically your emotionally.
Speaker 2 (07:16:47):
Need in this moment.
Speaker 4 (07:16:51):
But when you allow your body and mind to relax completely,
you let go of all.
Speaker 2 (07:17:02):
Thoughts, concerns, worries.
Speaker 8 (07:17:06):
Ideas.
Speaker 2 (07:17:08):
All ngo allow them to drop onto the floor. You
start to.
Speaker 3 (07:17:21):
Get in touch with the feelings of such relaxation. Feelings
so nice to be in touch with the calmness of
the different body parts as they become looser.
Speaker 8 (07:17:49):
And looser.
Speaker 4 (07:17:54):
Even your breathing seems easier than more natural, effortless.
Speaker 3 (07:18:06):
As I call out as through your mouth or nose
into your lungs, breathing in comforts and relaxation and then
just breathing out any excess remain intentional stress from every
(07:18:31):
part of your body.
Speaker 2 (07:18:34):
And mind.
Speaker 3 (07:18:38):
As you start to focus on your mind, maybe you
notice that things have come to a standstill or maybe
just much much lower than before.
Speaker 2 (07:18:59):
Because your mind is not really needed.
Speaker 3 (07:19:05):
When listening to my voice, which allows your mind to
relax just as deep as your body. And that's synchronicity
between the relaxation of your body relaxation of your mind.
Speaker 8 (07:19:36):
Let you know that.
Speaker 2 (07:19:40):
Feeling completely calm, loose, and.
Speaker 3 (07:19:46):
Relaxed really is.
Speaker 2 (07:19:52):
A great healing experience fear and has so many.
Speaker 4 (07:20:07):
Positive benefits for your body, mind, and your life. To
be able to let go.
Speaker 3 (07:20:19):
Everything and to relax completely, you know, all parts of
your body and mind, even your boneses are relaxed, or
(07:20:40):
your muscles are relaxed.
Speaker 4 (07:20:50):
Even the skin that covers your body is relaxed. Every hair.
Speaker 8 (07:21:07):
That you have is also.
Speaker 2 (07:21:12):
Deeply relaxed. And your brain really starts to feel the benefits.
Speaker 8 (07:21:30):
Of this.
Speaker 2 (07:21:32):
Heathing relaxation. Unless you focus.
Speaker 4 (07:21:43):
On the in the side of your scalp where your
brain is, you can start to realize and notice the
benefits of your brain relaxing deepay, initial brain.
Speaker 3 (07:22:07):
Continues to relax sends those messages to the rest of
your body.
Speaker 2 (07:22:21):
And your mind to really relax e.
Speaker 3 (07:22:29):
More deeply, relaxy, more completely, letting go of any remaining
(07:22:52):
thoughts or concerns, allow them just tru up onto the
floor because they're not loen necessary in.
Speaker 2 (07:23:08):
This moment, this moment of deep.
Speaker 4 (07:23:15):
Relaxation and calmness. Feeling your brain.
Speaker 2 (07:23:27):
With deep concentrated.
Speaker 3 (07:23:32):
Heeling, calming, relaxing, every part of your brain.
Speaker 2 (07:23:54):
Feeling so and comfortable, so relaxed.
Speaker 4 (07:24:09):
And be peaceful. Your brain feels so light, that's so healthy.
That sense of deep deep comfort really does allow you.
Speaker 8 (07:24:39):
To enjoy.
Speaker 3 (07:24:42):
Those ever increasing sensations of comfort that are spreading throughout
your body, in each and every muscle of your body.
Speaker 8 (07:25:08):
Eat deeper.
Speaker 4 (07:25:15):
And deeper, much more deeper than before, much more comfort
spreading through your body.
Speaker 8 (07:25:39):
Your mind, be.
Speaker 2 (07:25:45):
So peaceful and calm, so.
Speaker 8 (07:25:54):
Very very.
Speaker 3 (07:25:58):
Peaceful in avery part.
Speaker 2 (07:26:05):
Of your body.
Speaker 8 (07:26:08):
Let you go.
Speaker 4 (07:26:11):
The a everything averything, so peaceful and calm, so relax.
Speaker 2 (07:26:35):
Very second the passes you feel.
Speaker 20 (07:26:45):
Dadpath relaxed, dper.
Speaker 2 (07:26:59):
And deper lest.
Speaker 8 (07:27:06):
Calm, so calm, peace for.
Speaker 4 (07:27:19):
So very peace from your head down to your toils.
Such peace and comfort growing all the time, Such peace
(07:27:46):
and comfort spreading through your body and mind deeper deeper,
such comforts spreading and sinking deeper into a muscle of
(07:28:16):
your body, so that you feel amazing, so relaxed, so piece, so.
Speaker 2 (07:28:38):
So relax.
Speaker 8 (07:28:44):
And peace.
Speaker 2 (07:28:48):
Letting go everything I do you scan.
Speaker 1 (07:29:02):
Focusing on firstly how you feel in your body, not
trying to change how you feel, not trying to relax,
not trying to move away from any discomfort or stress
or tension. Just accepting, observing and accepting how you feel in.
Speaker 2 (07:29:29):
The different parts of your body.
Speaker 3 (07:29:32):
Just allowing yourself to be exactly as you are, to notice,
to get in touch with how you actually feel in
this moment. I'm going to start off by focusing on
(07:30:01):
your hands.
Speaker 4 (07:30:06):
Just be aware of your hands, like you to move
your hands around, just maybe move your.
Speaker 2 (07:30:18):
Fingers a little bit.
Speaker 4 (07:30:22):
I've been enclosing your hands very gently, just so that
you can get in touch with how your hands and
your fingers feel, very very slow movements. Focusing now on
(07:30:57):
your feet, and if you can just do kind of
an equivalent with your.
Speaker 2 (07:31:06):
Feet, is you've just done with your hands.
Speaker 3 (07:31:12):
Maybe turning your ankles, moving your feet around, moving your
toes gently, only very.
Speaker 1 (07:31:28):
Gently and very slowly, noticing how your feet feel.
Speaker 3 (07:31:40):
In this moment. Focusing now on your eyes, I'd like
you to just focus on your eyelids. Maybe you can
(07:32:01):
open and close your eyes a couple of times to
really get in touch with how you feel.
Speaker 2 (07:32:09):
When you do close your eyes.
Speaker 3 (07:32:12):
The muscle changes.
Speaker 4 (07:32:17):
In your eyes when you do close them, maybe raising
your eyebrows.
Speaker 3 (07:32:25):
It stretches the tops of your eyes, perhaps squinting your eyes,
scrunching up your eyes.
Speaker 2 (07:32:39):
Just so you can heally get in touch.
Speaker 3 (07:32:45):
With all aspects of how your eyes feel.
Speaker 2 (07:32:56):
Right now.
Speaker 4 (07:33:05):
Now focusing on your thighs, then you know it just
starts you to gently tense your thighs, just very very gently, just.
Speaker 3 (07:33:22):
Enough so you can become.
Speaker 2 (07:33:28):
More attuned to the physical sensation.
Speaker 3 (07:33:38):
Of your upper legs, the front of your thighs, and
the backs of your thighs, noticing and observing how your
thighs fear right now, moving your focus.
Speaker 2 (07:34:11):
To the back of your neck. Just noticing the.
Speaker 3 (07:34:17):
Back of your neck the muscles, and of course they
lead to the side of your neck. They also lead
to the top of your back, which leads to your shoulders.
So as you focus on the back of your neck,
(07:34:41):
maybe you can move your head gently upwards as if
you're looking up. Maybe moving your head down as if
you're looking down. Perhaps moving your headside to side, right
(07:35:03):
to left, but only.
Speaker 4 (07:35:08):
Very slowly, very gently. I'm not trying to force anything.
Speaker 2 (07:35:20):
It has to be very very gentle, just so you can.
Speaker 8 (07:35:32):
Be more.
Speaker 3 (07:35:35):
In touch with the feelings, with the sensations, the physical
sensations of how the back of your neck.
Speaker 2 (07:35:52):
Feels. Right now, as we now focus.
Speaker 4 (07:36:09):
On the tops of your arms, the parts where your
biceps and your triceps are between your elbow and your shoulders.
So you focus on those parts and tops of your arms,
(07:36:30):
you may like to just tense them, but very.
Speaker 2 (07:36:38):
Very gently and slowly.
Speaker 4 (07:36:44):
See you're not.
Speaker 1 (07:36:45):
Straining or putting any pressure whatsoever.
Speaker 8 (07:36:53):
On your arms.
Speaker 2 (07:36:56):
It's just so you can gain more of a sense
of how your upper arms are feeling in this moment.
Speaker 4 (07:37:18):
Just notice them as you gently, very gently and slowly.
Speaker 3 (07:37:30):
Tighten the muscles and then LEO, notice how the tops
of your arms feel right now, as we now focus
(07:38:00):
on your stomach, the area the lower abdomen area below
your belly button, moving all the way down to your hips,
just above your grind. Maybe you're able to tense these muscles.
Speaker 2 (07:38:32):
In that area very very gently and slowly.
Speaker 3 (07:38:47):
If that's a difficult thing to do, maybe you can
just move.
Speaker 2 (07:38:55):
Your body.
Speaker 3 (07:38:58):
Push in your stomach up, maybe moving a little bit
of a side using your hips, just so.
Speaker 2 (07:39:08):
As you can get more in tune.
Speaker 3 (07:39:15):
With how your lower abdomen area.
Speaker 2 (07:39:23):
Is feeling.
Speaker 8 (07:39:27):
In this moment, just noticing.
Speaker 2 (07:39:37):
The physical sensations or your lower abdomen.
Speaker 8 (07:39:57):
Has.
Speaker 2 (07:39:58):
Move your attention to your mouth, noticing your lips.
Speaker 3 (07:40:13):
And inside your mouth, your teeth, your guns, your tongue,
just noticing how your tongue and your mouth feels. It
(07:40:40):
may help by.
Speaker 4 (07:40:43):
Moving your tongue around your mouth, moving it to your left,
maybe pressing it gently against the side of your mouth,
and then to the right, gently to the side of
(07:41:04):
your mouth, perhaps pressing up against the top of your mouth,
and then down gently against the bottom of your mouth,
always very slowly.
Speaker 2 (07:41:28):
And a very very gentle.
Speaker 8 (07:41:38):
So that you can.
Speaker 4 (07:41:42):
Be aware of how you feel in your mouth area.
(07:42:06):
Now I got to focus.
Speaker 2 (07:42:14):
On your wrists and don't I'll ask you to maybe
just routine.
Speaker 3 (07:42:32):
Your wrists by moving your hands in a circular motion
very gently and slowly, just soly can feel the sensations
(07:43:06):
that you are currently.
Speaker 4 (07:43:10):
Experiencing in your risks. Perhaps move in your hands.
Speaker 2 (07:43:25):
Up and down.
Speaker 3 (07:43:29):
Again very very champlain and slowly, very chancel and slowing
(07:44:10):
the start to observe your lower back.
Speaker 2 (07:44:26):
The bad part is just above your hips where your
coxis are.
Speaker 3 (07:44:45):
A whole area which also really does include the signs
of your body because those muscles are very much connected.
There's those muscles also move.
Speaker 4 (07:45:06):
Into your hyperia, connect into your buttocks the side of
your hips, and if you're physically able to do so,
(07:45:32):
maybe you can very gently just move your body.
Speaker 2 (07:45:42):
Eviss slightly, very slowly, some side to side, just enough.
Speaker 8 (07:45:58):
For you to gauge how you feel.
Speaker 4 (07:46:11):
Your lawer back, perhaps sickly even move your hips gently.
Speaker 2 (07:46:29):
Up and down.
Speaker 4 (07:46:34):
Gently slowly, in order to.
Speaker 2 (07:46:45):
Be in touch with the physical sensations of your lawer back.
(07:47:12):
As we know, your attention to your jaw an area
from your chin all the way up to near your
(07:47:34):
ears are.
Speaker 4 (07:47:37):
Oh your jaw, and you can, just if it's okay
to do same, gently open your mouth nor wide, nice stretching,
(07:48:05):
just very gently and slowly opening your mouth and closing
your mouth very gently and slowly.
Speaker 2 (07:48:36):
So you can be in touch.
Speaker 4 (07:48:48):
With how your jaw feels now to sit down your
(07:49:25):
chest area. You don't need to do anything to move
your chest because it moves every time you breathe. It
(07:49:52):
moves very gently.
Speaker 8 (07:49:56):
And slowly.
Speaker 2 (07:50:00):
Automatically with each breath you take. As you focus on
your chest fils when you breathe, move in your.
Speaker 3 (07:51:02):
Focus to your forearms, your elbows.
Speaker 2 (07:51:15):
Maybe you're able to very gently.
Speaker 8 (07:51:23):
And slowly.
Speaker 4 (07:51:27):
Dense the muscles in your forearms, and when you do that,
you can feel.
Speaker 2 (07:51:40):
Your elbows as well, very gently.
Speaker 8 (07:51:57):
And slow.
Speaker 3 (07:52:08):
Gently and softly observing your forums delpas. No focus.
Speaker 2 (07:52:56):
The rest of go back your upper back.
Speaker 3 (07:53:07):
In the middle, the middle of your back. Again, this
part of your body moves also every time you breed.
Speaker 8 (07:53:40):
You may not notice that.
Speaker 4 (07:53:44):
Usually mace you observe your upper back in the middle
of your back. It can really fail.
Speaker 8 (07:54:07):
Hitt.
Speaker 2 (07:54:56):
Maybe your focus to your hip area, your butt as.
Speaker 4 (07:55:09):
A brain, there's muscles and those bones in your midsection.
Speaker 2 (07:55:46):
Just noticing.
Speaker 4 (07:55:49):
How your hips feel right now, you can very very
(07:56:10):
gently move your hips.
Speaker 3 (07:56:20):
Maybe side to side very gently and.
Speaker 2 (07:56:28):
Sor yeah, very gently softly.
Speaker 10 (07:57:07):
Mm.
Speaker 4 (07:57:14):
Everything starts to slow down, including the thoughts in your mind,
and your mind.
Speaker 1 (07:57:34):
Itself just starts to gradually. It doesn't have to be instant,
but just gradually starting too. It's almost like time is
storing chin It's a slower path to maybe what you're
(07:58:04):
used to in your day to day life.
Speaker 4 (07:58:11):
It's a slower movement of energy, very small movements which
(07:58:38):
make up the larger movements, which is always the case.
Now when you move your hand, it might seem like
it's one movement, but it's lots of minute different muscles moving.
Speaker 3 (07:58:59):
In a audience with each other. And what happens in
this space that we're sharing is we move from.
Speaker 2 (07:59:22):
That big.
Speaker 4 (07:59:29):
Movement into those smaller movements. Starting to focus on.
Speaker 2 (07:59:46):
How your body feels, not just as a whole, not
just oh, i'm feel in this way.
Speaker 4 (07:59:55):
I'm feeling stressed or tense, or I'm feeling laxed and calm,
I'm feeling this way, I'm feeling that way.
Speaker 3 (08:00:08):
Starting to notice that your body begins to present to
you small feelings around your body, small physical sensations.
Speaker 4 (08:00:37):
In your legs, whether pleasurable or not. Maybe resisting the
temptation to label them.
Speaker 2 (08:00:57):
Or to judge them.
Speaker 4 (08:01:00):
Those feelings, just thinking them, thinking about them is just
being neutral, just feelings, not being particularly concerned, just noticing
(08:01:25):
what your body is telling you. Feelings in your arms
instead of feeling the whole of the arm. Maybe notice those.
Speaker 1 (08:01:49):
Individual feelings, all those different muscles.
Speaker 8 (08:01:55):
And skin in.
Speaker 2 (08:02:03):
The hairs of your arms.
Speaker 4 (08:02:07):
All the internal parts of your arms, the veins, the bones,
just being aware of maybe your elbow on your right
(08:02:30):
arm has a certain feeling. Maybe your left wrist.
Speaker 2 (08:02:40):
Also has.
Speaker 4 (08:02:44):
Its own individual physical sensation. What about your forearm on
(08:03:05):
your right arm, you're right forearm. There may not be
any particular feeling that you could even give a name to,
(08:03:29):
may not feel like anything other than just a feeling. Yeah,
it's there. The feelings in your shoulders, perhaps your shoulders
when you think about them, kind of almost like they're
(08:03:51):
the same, you know, the same feeling, almost like both
of your shoulders are just one thing.
Speaker 2 (08:04:02):
Of course they're not.
Speaker 4 (08:04:12):
And when you focus on your left shoulder and then
on your right shoulder, maybe find that you move the
muscles a little bit, maybe tense the muscles gently, noticing
(08:04:36):
the difference in each shoulder. Your lower back, the left
(08:05:07):
side of your lower back and the right side of
your lower back.
Speaker 3 (08:05:20):
Of course, that connection to your buttocks and to your hips,
and also moving up into the middle of your back,
(08:05:46):
and sometimes like right now, actually, when I focus on
their part, When I focused on my buttocks.
Speaker 2 (08:05:56):
And then I focused on.
Speaker 4 (08:05:58):
The middle of my back, I almost felt like the
muscles in my lower back were being stretched very gently,
just stretched a little bit. Even though I wasn't doing
anything to try to stretch.
Speaker 3 (08:06:23):
Your lower back, it just seemed to happen.
Speaker 2 (08:06:27):
The feeling of.
Speaker 4 (08:06:30):
Very gently stretching your lower back comes along.
Speaker 2 (08:06:48):
I have feeling.
Speaker 3 (08:06:55):
In your chest, just.
Speaker 4 (08:07:04):
Noticing what sensations you are experiencing in your chest right now.
(08:07:30):
And there's so much of the chest. Of course, there's
the collar bone leading to the chest. You've got the
chest bone, You've got the muscles in your chest.
Speaker 2 (08:07:49):
Of course.
Speaker 4 (08:07:49):
If you're female, there's possibly the breasts. If you're male,
you've got the different well my not that different these days,
but there may be more muscles at the top of
(08:08:11):
the chest, but at the side underneath, it's pretty much
the same.
Speaker 3 (08:08:20):
Whether you're a man or a woman. There's muscles there, muscles.
Speaker 4 (08:08:25):
That stretch out to your back as well as breast
tissue stretches and moves into your back to just being
aware of your chest, being with whatever feeling there is
(08:09:00):
in your chest. And when I noticed that, I focus
on my chest. I feel it in my back, my
(08:09:26):
upper back. I mean, I guess the obvious reason would
be because you know I'll.
Speaker 3 (08:09:32):
Grieve in.
Speaker 2 (08:09:37):
In then it stretches my chest and my back at
the same time. It feels.
Speaker 3 (08:09:56):
It feels okay, doesn't feel.
Speaker 2 (08:10:07):
I got a little bit of pain in my right.
Speaker 3 (08:10:11):
Chest, a little bit, not pain, but little discomfort, maybe
stiffness possibly, I don't know. I notice my shoulders are also.
Speaker 2 (08:10:29):
Wanting to flex for some reason.
Speaker 3 (08:10:35):
I think that's probably part of my upper back, that
connection between my shoulders and my upper back, because I
can move my shoulders and stretch the muscles in my back,
(08:10:55):
moving the shoulders backwards or up, which then moves I
think it's the scapulous.
Speaker 2 (08:11:06):
In your back.
Speaker 4 (08:11:16):
It feels quite nice. Actually, A good thing about this
is you can, if you want to, you can just
flex or stimulate the various muscles in your body gently
(08:11:46):
in order to get more of a sense of how
they feel.
Speaker 3 (08:11:57):
And when you're relaxing, when you do tense and muscle
and you let it go and you let it relax.
It relaxes.
Speaker 2 (08:12:14):
Way more than it would normally. But you have to feel.
Speaker 4 (08:12:27):
That you're able to do that.
Speaker 2 (08:12:29):
There's no point in doing it if.
Speaker 3 (08:12:31):
There's an issue with the per part of your body.
You need to be gentle with yourself at all times
when relaxing deeply. It's important to be kind to yourself
(08:13:08):
as you notice your mind. How much has your mind
slowed down since we started this recording, How came and peaceful.
Speaker 2 (08:13:47):
Is your mind right now?
Speaker 3 (08:13:55):
We have nothing to think about, and you my voice
to listen to, because you know the intention behind this
recording is relaxation. At the very least, for you to
(08:14:20):
feel more relaxed at the end of the recording than.
Speaker 4 (08:14:25):
You did at the beginning. At the very least, for
your mind to slow down as your body.
Speaker 2 (08:14:45):
Continues to relax, because that's what you.
Speaker 4 (08:14:58):
Want to happen. That's what you expect to happen, for relaxation.
Speaker 2 (08:15:22):
To fill.
Speaker 4 (08:15:25):
Your body, maybe calm in your mind to the point
of boredom. When you start maybe to drift away, drift
(08:16:12):
in it's almost as if you're moving further away from
(08:16:35):
your body and your mind just leaving that there, kind
of liking it an escape pod in a spaceship a movie,
a space movie. You know, when they get into a
(08:16:57):
little part in it sends the man far away from
the spaceship, safe.
Speaker 2 (08:17:16):
To dream.
Speaker 4 (08:17:25):
And continued to relax, to drift in slow and peace,
(08:18:43):
so rare and peace, and focusing on.
Speaker 2 (08:19:21):
That feeling.
Speaker 3 (08:19:29):
Of those individual parts of your body, that relaxing.
Speaker 2 (08:19:42):
One by one.
Speaker 4 (08:19:50):
You may.
Speaker 2 (08:19:52):
Find that every now and then.
Speaker 3 (08:20:02):
You realize that you weren't listening.
Speaker 2 (08:20:09):
To my voice because your mind started to imagine something different,
maybe started to.
Speaker 3 (08:20:27):
Almost move into.
Speaker 4 (08:20:30):
Some kind of a dreamy state, and then you become
aware of my voice again. And even though you may
want to focus on my voice, you may also wish
(08:20:54):
to allow your mind to just drift naturally into that
space of comfort and safety.
Speaker 2 (08:21:19):
As you feel warm comfort.
Speaker 4 (08:21:31):
Spreading through your body like a warm blanket.
Speaker 2 (08:21:42):
Covering you chently, keeping your body it just.
Speaker 4 (08:21:54):
The perfect temperature, and even if you can hear background sounds,
(08:22:17):
they just don't seem to matter anymore.
Speaker 2 (08:22:28):
There's that sense of.
Speaker 3 (08:22:32):
Peace spreads through your mind like a gentle breeze, yet
strong enough to blow away.
Speaker 4 (08:22:55):
All negativity, strong enoughter remove from your mind any anxiety
or stress that was there before, and blow away any
(08:23:26):
other thoughts.
Speaker 2 (08:23:29):
Or feelings that just don't fit with the sense.
Speaker 3 (08:23:49):
Relaxation that is feeling.
Speaker 2 (08:24:00):
Your body and your mind.
Speaker 4 (08:24:21):
And as you focus on your mind and count down
from ten down to one, and with each number you hear,
your mind will become slightly more.
Speaker 3 (08:24:56):
Relaxed, just just slightly, from ten down to nine, just
a slight movement, from nine down to eight, just another.
Speaker 4 (08:25:17):
Small change in how you feel. Eight down to seven.
That feeling is a gap, almost like a gap that
(08:25:40):
starts to get wider, the gap between those feelings that
you used to have in your mind compared to the
feelings you have, the growing now feelings of comfort and
(08:26:05):
security and confidence, and the gap becomes wider. Eight down
to seven, seven down to six, And when you get
to five, the mind will start to have a certain
(08:26:32):
physical sensation, most like there's a magnet outside of your
head sucking the tension and the stress and any remaining
feelings that you don't want, sucking them out through your skull.
Speaker 2 (08:27:04):
And then down to four you could start to really
experience that sense of.
Speaker 4 (08:27:14):
Not just emptiness, but space, a place full of fresh air,
place where.
Speaker 2 (08:27:30):
You can stretch.
Speaker 4 (08:27:35):
It's almost as if as you go down to four
and three, your mind is expanding, with this sense of peace.
Speaker 2 (08:27:50):
And tranquility growing.
Speaker 4 (08:27:55):
As it moves down to When you get to one,
in mind just feels exactly how you want to feel,
almost perfect feeling, maybe a sensation that.
Speaker 2 (08:28:32):
You'd like to keep a place that's safe, where nothing
can affect you at all.
Speaker 21 (08:28:59):
And you can in that.
Speaker 3 (08:29:02):
Space of comfort and confidence, confident in your own ability
to create this space and this feeling of comfort within
your own mind.
Speaker 2 (08:29:22):
Just by counting ten.
Speaker 4 (08:29:26):
Down to one.
Speaker 2 (08:29:31):
And this is something that you can do yourself when
you're on your own.
Speaker 4 (08:29:41):
A time when you can maybe sit down, maybe just
for a few minutes, close your eyes, just counts slowly
from ten.
Speaker 2 (08:30:02):
Down to one.
Speaker 3 (08:30:07):
And re experience these feelings in your mind. And when
you feel that way in your mind, your body copies
(08:30:29):
your mind, and that feeling is spread through your spine
and your nervous system into every part of your body,
travels through your blood stream, healing and relaxing every article
(08:31:03):
of your existence.
Speaker 4 (08:31:17):
And we can we can practice this a few times
before the end of the recording, and then you can
practice on your own, and each time you count from
ten down to one.
Speaker 2 (08:31:43):
The feelings of comfort, calmness, and deep.
Speaker 4 (08:31:51):
Deep relaxation becomes stronger and deeper. Feeling your mind and
your brain with these positive chemicals that spread through your body,
(08:32:19):
relaxing you so quickly, relaxing your whole body and mind.
Speaker 2 (08:32:31):
So very very easily, just by counting for ten down
to one.
Speaker 4 (08:32:50):
So we're going to do now, I'm going to count
from ten down to one. I'd like you to repeat
the number after me. So when I say ten, you
can just repeat to yourself ten. Just notice, be aware
(08:33:18):
of how you feel in your mind and your body,
and when I say nine, you can repeat.
Speaker 3 (08:33:35):
To yourself.
Speaker 8 (08:33:39):
Nine.
Speaker 2 (08:33:43):
We gain noticing the increase.
Speaker 3 (08:33:49):
In comfort and calmness in your mind and in your body.
The same want to say eight.
Speaker 4 (08:34:08):
When I say seven, six, I want to say five, four,
when I say three, two, and lastly when I say one,
(08:34:38):
you can beat that number.
Speaker 8 (08:34:48):
Now.
Speaker 2 (08:34:48):
Of course, when you do this on your own.
Speaker 4 (08:34:53):
Without listening to me, you can say the numbers or
whatever speed that you feel is necessary for you, so
you can adapt. So you feel you want to say
(08:35:15):
the numbers ten down to one faster than I do.
Then you go ahead and do that, or if you
feel when you do it yourself that you'd like to
have more more space between the numbers, maybe take a
(08:35:38):
lot longer to get from ten.
Speaker 2 (08:35:43):
All the way down to one. That's your choice also
to do. So I'm gonna count from ten down to one.
(08:36:10):
I want to get to one. That will be the
end of this recording. The let's of course, you're listening
to music, and the music will continue.
Speaker 3 (08:36:31):
Ten nine, five, twenty, nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twelve.
Speaker 8 (08:41:48):
Eleven, ten.
Speaker 3 (08:41:58):
Nine, eight, seven, six, five, four, three.
Speaker 2 (08:42:33):
Two one. Now open your eyes, noticing.
Speaker 3 (08:42:56):
How you physically feel having counted out from twenty to one,
allowing stress and tension to leave through your fingertips and
your tastes. And as you focus on your fingertips.
Speaker 4 (08:43:15):
Maybe they feel a little bit tingling, which is I
suppose quite understanding, considering the tension has been exiting your
body through your fingertips.
Speaker 2 (08:43:35):
So now I'm going to count from twenty down to
one again.
Speaker 11 (08:43:38):
This time.
Speaker 1 (08:43:43):
You're to feel relief of tension and stress, any anxiety.
Speaker 21 (08:43:49):
That you may have.
Speaker 4 (08:43:55):
Leaving through your stomach, just leaving through your stomach, almost
as if it's just releasing.
Speaker 22 (08:44:08):
The whole of your stomach, your navel to just above
your chest or below your chest, rather so surrounding your
belly by an.
Speaker 2 (08:44:18):
Area, the whole area.
Speaker 4 (08:44:21):
You can feel the tension of your body where there's left,
just releasing from that area, and you may notice that
your stomach will become very relaxed.
Speaker 2 (08:44:35):
As I countdown from twenty down to one now twenty.
Speaker 3 (08:44:50):
Nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirty, twelve, eleven, ten, nine, eight, seven, six, five.
Speaker 8 (08:46:02):
Oh three.
Speaker 21 (08:46:11):
Two what.
Speaker 4 (08:46:22):
You can open your eyes again if you cheers, or
you can just keep them closed because it feels relaxing.
Speaker 3 (08:46:30):
Just notice saying your stomach feels Notice as your focus,
just do a little scan of your body, notice saying
your body feels focusing upper body, back, chest, stomach, les, arms, hands, feet,
(08:46:57):
just noticing, and you know you may start to feel
more a sense of tiredness, which may be the reason
listening to this recording, because you're like to.
Speaker 2 (08:47:18):
Let go completely of everything and drift.
Speaker 3 (08:47:25):
Off into a nice, natural, calm, relaxing sleep.
Speaker 2 (08:47:40):
So now the.
Speaker 4 (08:47:41):
Focus on your forehead, and if you choose, you can
incorporate your eyes in this focus as well, with your
forehead and your eyes whole area. Basically almost as if
(08:48:03):
you were wearing a mask, you know, like a batman
mask or something.
Speaker 23 (08:48:10):
Or.
Speaker 4 (08:48:13):
I'm trying to sorrow or something, you know, the kind
of mask that covers your eyes but also covers quite
a lot of the forehead. Focusing on that area because
that's the area that we're now going to release tension,
stress from your mind, your brain, from your mind, and
(08:48:35):
any tension that you may have remain in your face,
in your neck, your jaw, your eyes, and your forehead
or your scalp.
Speaker 3 (08:48:49):
So basically any intension within your head area, including your
mind and your brain that's going to be released through
your fullhead in your eyes. As I count down again
(08:49:10):
from twenty down to one now twenty nineteen, eighteen, seventeen, sixteen, fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twelve, eleven, ten, nine, eight, seven, six.
Speaker 2 (08:50:35):
Five, four, three, one, noticing.
Speaker 4 (08:51:06):
As you scared your face with jaw, your eyes of
cheap bads, your ears, your forehead.
Speaker 2 (08:51:19):
Your scalp, your neck, back of your neck, front of
your neck.
Speaker 4 (08:51:27):
The size of your neck, and your throat. Noticing being
aware of the comfort.
Speaker 2 (08:51:41):
Increased in.
Speaker 4 (08:51:46):
Relaxation, not just in your head and neck and mind,
will say the rest of your body.
Speaker 3 (08:52:00):
Just note sound loose.
Speaker 2 (08:52:03):
And calm you felt. How easily.
Speaker 21 (08:52:09):
It is to just let go.
Speaker 2 (08:52:13):
Completely, they go completely?
Speaker 4 (08:52:28):
How easy?
Speaker 21 (08:52:37):
So I need to do bow is.
Speaker 2 (08:52:40):
To focus on the top of your head and we
can allowed every last piece of tension or.
Speaker 3 (08:52:56):
Stress the way be lingery hiding in your body, your mind,
on my head.
Speaker 21 (08:53:06):
Just be sucked down on the top of your head
at least.
Speaker 4 (08:53:18):
Yeahs sack down into the clouds. Magine a big cloud
of put the head almost like a whirlpool.
Speaker 21 (08:53:31):
It's is gonna.
Speaker 4 (08:53:32):
Suck that tension.
Speaker 21 (08:53:35):
Out the top of your head.
Speaker 4 (08:53:39):
Just take away, good.
Speaker 2 (08:53:46):
You focus.
Speaker 4 (08:53:47):
Imagine an opening on top of your head without tension
stressed in remaining issues maybe worries of the sad st
u st Now you will all be sucked down. Lad,
I've taken away. As I count down again, twenty down
(08:54:13):
to one now twenty nineteen, eighteen, seventy sixteen fifty.
Speaker 21 (08:54:59):
Four tea too well.
Speaker 2 (08:55:19):
Even day nine eight.
Speaker 3 (08:55:46):
Seven six.
Speaker 21 (08:55:56):
Boy ooh.
Speaker 2 (08:56:06):
Three wa. Pray you notice it how you feel.
Speaker 4 (08:56:40):
How relaxed and calm you physically and mentally feel.
Speaker 2 (08:56:49):
Right now, help peaceful.
Speaker 4 (08:56:59):
You might feels.
Speaker 3 (08:57:03):
It feels so nice to just let go, to give
yourself some space to breathe easily, to think calmly.
Speaker 4 (08:57:22):
Just to take a break from all that pointless worry
concerns about things that you don't need to think about
right now, because.
Speaker 21 (08:57:42):
This is your time to let go.
Speaker 2 (08:57:45):
This is your space to enjoy.
Speaker 4 (08:57:49):
Feeling deeply relaxed, peaceful in your mind, relaxed in your body.
You can feel so good, so nice to just not
(08:58:11):
have to do anything, to be able to really enjoy
that serenity that comes of letting go completely, that peacefulness that.
Speaker 8 (08:58:31):
Comes with.
Speaker 21 (08:58:38):
Being in this.
Speaker 3 (08:58:41):
Peaceful space. And you can keep this sense of calmness
for as long as you choose. If you choose to
(08:59:04):
drift off into a deep, healing, natural sleep, then you
can do that. It's completely up to you, and you
can keep this feeling of calmness physically and in your mind.
Speaker 2 (08:59:29):
It's long as you choose to feel.
Speaker 4 (08:59:33):
Completely relaxed, completely relaxed, and I'd like you to make
up your mind, then you got to relax. I want
(09:00:03):
to explore that with you, what it feels like when
you actually decide that you're going to relax not forcing yourself,
but giving yourself that.
Speaker 2 (09:00:20):
Yes, it is a command, really, isn't it When.
Speaker 4 (09:00:22):
You're telling yourself relax in a gentle but firm way,
that only you.
Speaker 21 (09:00:33):
Can really.
Speaker 2 (09:00:35):
Tell yourself in that way.
Speaker 4 (09:00:38):
You can't really have someone.
Speaker 2 (09:00:39):
Else saying to you and now it relax, relax.
Speaker 4 (09:00:43):
You know.
Speaker 21 (09:00:45):
It needs to be.
Speaker 4 (09:00:46):
Gentle, but you can't. Someone else can't really have the
same the same kind of influence or power that you
have over your own physicality, over how you feel, because
(09:01:12):
when you say it to yourself, it means more.
Speaker 2 (09:01:18):
It's personal, and.
Speaker 4 (09:01:21):
Your brain and your unconscious mind and your body listens
to what you say. So for example, we'll test it
out and do a little test if you little tests
along the way, and you can get more of an
idea of the force, a positive force that you can
(09:01:46):
have in creating a sense of comfort and relaxation.
Speaker 2 (09:01:53):
In your body and your mind quite quickly.
Speaker 3 (09:01:59):
Just buying you telling yourself.
Speaker 2 (09:02:03):
To relax.
Speaker 4 (09:02:09):
So I'm going to start by it's focus on your hands.
Speaker 2 (09:02:16):
So focus on your hands and just tell your hands
to relax, and just say relax.
Speaker 4 (09:02:23):
As you focus on your hands, you could say my
hands are relaxed, or I want my hands to relax.
Speaker 2 (09:02:35):
I think if you actually do it.
Speaker 4 (09:02:36):
Directly by focusing and imagining that your hands.
Speaker 2 (09:02:44):
Can hear what you're saying.
Speaker 21 (09:02:46):
You know, they've got little ears, you see a little weird.
Speaker 4 (09:02:51):
So talking to your hands and just say relax, nodicine
how your hands start to relax. Now, focus on your
(09:03:24):
eyes and tell your eyes to relax. If you just
say in the same word relax and find the right
tone for you. You know, I might say relax, but
you you might say relax or relax. You know, you
(09:03:49):
might say it differently to yourself, and that's important for
you to gauge what feels right for you. To just
tell your.
Speaker 2 (09:04:02):
Eyes to relax, whilst focusing.
Speaker 4 (09:04:06):
On your eyes, your eyelids, the muscles around your eyes,
your eyebrows, and just tell your eyes directly relax now. Now,
(09:04:47):
I just did that myself, And sometimes you may feel that.
Speaker 21 (09:04:58):
You need a bit more time.
Speaker 4 (09:05:02):
Or the different parts to relax, you know, because I
started talking again and maybe that part hasn't relaxed fully.
But what happened is that we just continue to relax
even don't talking, And that's happened with my eyes.
Speaker 3 (09:05:21):
Something else I noticed is.
Speaker 2 (09:05:24):
When I started focusing on my eyes.
Speaker 4 (09:05:27):
That actually almost became they got worse before they got
better in a way. So I felt a degree of
tension growing in my eyes and then disappearing. So I
think what that was really it was just me becoming more.
Speaker 2 (09:05:43):
Aware of the tension that was already.
Speaker 4 (09:05:48):
There, but I wasn't I wasn't focused on it before,
so I wasn't really acknowledging it or really conscious to
those feelings. Yeah, my eyes is still continuing to relax,
(09:06:16):
as well as my hands. Actually, my hands have got
a certain kind of energy, like not buzzing, but I
can kind of feel a degree of energy in my hands.
(09:06:36):
Maybe that's where the tension is being released. Maybe that's
causing that.
Speaker 2 (09:06:49):
The next part, I think we should focus on the
back of the neck.
Speaker 21 (09:06:52):
That's the part is quite often.
Speaker 2 (09:06:56):
Well for me, holds tension.
Speaker 4 (09:06:57):
I don't know about it for yourself, that I think
is quite a standard place where attention is sometimes held. So,
and I'm doing it exactly what you're doing as you
do it as well, so I'm telling my body parts
to relax as well.
Speaker 21 (09:07:17):
So if you tell your neck the back of your neck.
Speaker 2 (09:07:20):
Focus on the back of your neck and just say.
Speaker 4 (09:07:25):
Relax in your own words, in your own tone, in
your own voice. You can say out loud, or you
can just say it to yourself internally. But you're focusing
and you're saying it literally to the back of your neck,
as if the back of your neck can actually hear
(09:07:46):
what you're seeing. So do that now, Just say relax
to the back of your neck, and I'll do the same.
(09:08:35):
Then what I noticed, and you may have had similar
thing is even though I was focusing on the back
of the neck, other parts started to I don't know
showed themselves to me or maybe because they want to
(09:08:58):
be relaxed as well. But I started noticing the feelings
in my shoulders, at tension in my shoulders and in
my upper back. Whether that was because my back of
my neck was saying I'm pretty much okay. It's the
(09:09:19):
other parts that need attention, but my low of my
back of my neck is still relaxing.
Speaker 2 (09:09:31):
But I just became more aware of other parts that
needed attention.
Speaker 21 (09:09:38):
Now, this might happen, and it's not.
Speaker 4 (09:09:42):
It doesn't mean that it's going wrong. It just means
you're being notified of more places but also want to
feel relaxed.
Speaker 2 (09:09:56):
So I'm going to focus on.
Speaker 21 (09:09:58):
My upper back, so you can do the same, even
if you don't have any.
Speaker 4 (09:10:06):
Feelings of tension that are obvious in your other back.
Speaker 2 (09:10:12):
You just focus on your back the whole area from
the shoulder blades.
Speaker 21 (09:10:18):
Down to the middle of your back, and.
Speaker 2 (09:10:22):
Your spine needs more, the shoulder blades more.
Speaker 21 (09:10:32):
Yeah, that's the parts they're really sort of given me.
Speaker 3 (09:10:39):
That, not.
Speaker 2 (09:10:41):
That it needs relaxing.
Speaker 21 (09:10:43):
The sounds gonna ask that much to relax, and you
can do the same.
Speaker 2 (09:10:47):
Now, relax up. There's something strange happened there.
Speaker 8 (09:11:14):
And this.
Speaker 4 (09:11:16):
Often happens.
Speaker 2 (09:11:17):
I've been doing this.
Speaker 4 (09:11:20):
For sixteen years or something, and often I'm one surprised
but amazed.
Speaker 21 (09:11:29):
Really bad.
Speaker 4 (09:11:32):
It can be a feeling. So when I was focusing
on the back of my neck, the back was starting
to feel quite stressed and in need of attention. As
soon as I started talking to you about.
Speaker 21 (09:11:50):
My upper back and talking.
Speaker 4 (09:11:53):
About, you know, getting ready to ask the upper back
to relax, like the back, he started to relax. It's
almost as if it doesn't need to hear the words,
just needs intention, just needs to be noticed. That is
(09:12:26):
something that often happens in this.
Speaker 2 (09:12:30):
Type of situation.
Speaker 4 (09:12:33):
Is when you start to relax a couple of parts
of your body, as we've done with our hands, our
eyes and eyelids, and now.
Speaker 21 (09:12:49):
Back of the neck, top of the back, up the bank.
Speaker 4 (09:12:58):
The rest of the body seems to just take notice.
Speaker 2 (09:13:04):
And decide in its own way to start relaxing.
Speaker 21 (09:13:12):
Other plants of your body.
Speaker 4 (09:13:14):
Start to just.
Speaker 21 (09:13:17):
Become loser.
Speaker 4 (09:13:23):
I suppose it's kind of like a bit of an avalanche,
you know, the little ball starts rolling before you know it.
The whole of your body is completely relaxed and cold.
(09:13:43):
And if you focus on your face, you focus on
your eyes, the eyelids, your eyebrows, and the muscles around
your eyes. Maybe you start to notice that your forehead
(09:14:09):
is more relaxed.
Speaker 23 (09:14:10):
Than it was.
Speaker 4 (09:14:13):
Maybe your face is more relaxed.
Speaker 21 (09:14:18):
I would say my entire face is a lot more
relaxed than it was.
Speaker 4 (09:14:34):
So I'm going to focus now on your shoulders again,
just like before.
Speaker 21 (09:14:42):
Just tell your.
Speaker 4 (09:14:43):
Shoulders and you can do them individually. You can do
right shoulder and left shoulder. I just didn't do both
at the same time. Just tell your shoulders as you
focus on them in your mind some heavy film, maybe
(09:15:03):
you can see them in your mindside. Just tell your shoulders.
Speaker 2 (09:15:14):
To relax.
Speaker 21 (09:15:52):
It's nice as they relax.
Speaker 4 (09:16:04):
But didn't notice. I mean, especially with my back, is
the connection between the different parts the back and shoulders,
the neck being more connected and being such a large.
Speaker 21 (09:16:29):
Part of your body, it's always hard to.
Speaker 4 (09:16:34):
Separate them from each other. My lower back is starting
to relax on the.
Speaker 21 (09:16:44):
Same Maybe I'm going too.
Speaker 4 (09:16:51):
Slow and that could be an issue because we will
go at different speeds.
Speaker 2 (09:17:01):
And the idea of giving that this recording.
Speaker 4 (09:17:05):
Was for you to be able to just say to yourself,
relax without focusing on any particular part of your body.
(09:17:26):
Because when you know that, turning your hands.
Speaker 21 (09:17:32):
To relax and your hand relax, you tell.
Speaker 4 (09:17:41):
Your eyelids, your eyes and muscles around your eyes and
your eyebrows to relax, and they relax.
Speaker 2 (09:18:03):
Until the back of your neck.
Speaker 4 (09:18:08):
Relax, relaxes, until you're up the back legs differ, relaxes.
Speaker 2 (09:18:50):
You tell your shoulders.
Speaker 4 (09:18:54):
To relax, they relaxed. You told your hands to relax,
(09:19:32):
They relaxed, and they continued to relax. You told your eyelids,
the muscles around your eyes, your eyebrows to relax.
Speaker 2 (09:19:54):
They relaxed.
Speaker 21 (09:19:58):
And conte h to relax.
Speaker 23 (09:20:08):
And you told the back of your neck, on the
back of your neck.
Speaker 21 (09:20:16):
And told it to relax.
Speaker 2 (09:20:22):
And relaxed.
Speaker 21 (09:20:25):
And continued to relax. And you told you are welcome back.
Speaker 4 (09:20:42):
To relax, be relaxed, and continued to relax.
Speaker 21 (09:20:58):
That's what your shoulders.
Speaker 4 (09:21:02):
Told your shoulders to relax, and your shoulders relaxed, tens
to relax.
Speaker 8 (09:21:22):
And it's not just that, it's.
Speaker 4 (09:21:30):
But the rest of your body is also been listening.
The relaxation has been spreading.
Speaker 11 (09:21:41):
So from your.
Speaker 4 (09:21:41):
Eyes, the relaxation spread to your forehead, round your face.
Speaker 21 (09:21:49):
Into your skin, intouture.
Speaker 4 (09:22:02):
To the fronts and sides of the baby, my dad,
chest and stom.
Speaker 2 (09:22:15):
Relaxed hands and shoulders.
Speaker 21 (09:22:19):
Meets up through your arms, relaxing from arms too, upper arms,
no birds, your wrists. Let's go back hips, but exploy.
(09:22:52):
Just start to relax and tea comforts spreading through your eggs,
poor way down your ankles, the tops of your feet,
(09:23:17):
the sight of your feet, the bottoms of your feet, relaxing,
der toes to lexicles, and it's.
Speaker 2 (09:23:58):
Your body relaxing.
Speaker 4 (09:24:00):
Want your mind comes slower, peaceful.
Speaker 21 (09:24:23):
It's a point where, if you choose, it's a fool asleep.
He can easily do that easy drift the way because
(09:24:53):
it's nothing you have only your mind right, it is
peaceful your body. You teens two lines that you picture
(09:25:42):
between the body and relaxing. The word you say to
yourself lights mean steppy day eat, the focus on just
(09:26:03):
one part. You can just focus on your retire body.
Say aboutful word, that's it's uh, that's sensations of elephants
(09:26:46):
spading throughout the body. You say, easing every moment to
be by rest.
Speaker 8 (09:27:30):
So what you need to do for now, just.
Speaker 11 (09:27:36):
Tell him something.
Speaker 21 (09:27:40):
Nice being beaten, starting down becomper tighty ninety eighteen seventy
(09:28:59):
six fifty four eight zero.
Speaker 23 (09:32:28):
Yes, yes.
Speaker 21 (09:33:56):
U ss ss m.
Speaker 23 (09:39:10):
M m m so.
Speaker 21 (09:42:20):
Capta down ten to one.
Speaker 23 (09:42:23):
Ten nine.
Speaker 21 (09:42:27):
Eight seven.
Speaker 23 (09:42:33):
Six five.
Speaker 4 (09:42:38):
Four three.
Speaker 21 (09:42:44):
Two one. And maybe that was a little too quick
in order to lace you go too fast to this
(09:43:05):
calm of the body. Maybe even.
Speaker 23 (09:43:14):
You're count down things one escape man, it's certainly just
the do.
Speaker 11 (09:43:22):
It just because you're count down.
Speaker 21 (09:43:30):
Fine, it's time, bus line, it's time you focus.
Speaker 23 (09:43:39):
On your body before.
Speaker 21 (09:43:46):
Just wights.
Speaker 2 (09:43:49):
And your body does.
Speaker 21 (09:43:52):
Start right eight seven
Speaker 13 (09:44:36):
Six as
Popular Podcasts
New Heights with Jason & Travis Kelce
Football’s funniest family duo — Jason Kelce of the Philadelphia Eagles and Travis Kelce of the Kansas City Chiefs — team up to provide next-level access to life in the league as it unfolds. The two brothers and Super Bowl champions drop weekly insights about the weekly slate of games and share their INSIDE perspectives on trending NFL news and sports headlines. They also endlessly rag on each other as brothers do, chat the latest in pop culture and welcome some very popular and well-known friends to chat with them. Check out new episodes every Wednesday. Follow New Heights on the Wondery App, YouTube or wherever you get your podcasts. You can listen to new episodes early and ad-free, and get exclusive content on Wondery+. Join Wondery+ in the Wondery App, Apple Podcasts or Spotify. And join our new membership for a unique fan experience by going to the New Heights YouTube channel now!
Dateline NBC
Current and classic episodes, featuring compelling true-crime mysteries, powerful documentaries and in-depth investigations. Follow now to get the latest episodes of Dateline NBC completely free, or subscribe to Dateline Premium for ad-free listening and exclusive bonus content: DatelinePremium.com
On Purpose with Jay Shetty
I’m Jay Shetty host of On Purpose the worlds #1 Mental Health podcast and I’m so grateful you found us. I started this podcast 5 years ago to invite you into conversations and workshops that are designed to help make you happier, healthier and more healed. I believe that when you (yes you) feel seen, heard and understood you’re able to deal with relationship struggles, work challenges and life’s ups and downs with more ease and grace. I interview experts, celebrities, thought leaders and athletes so that we can grow our mindset, build better habits and uncover a side of them we’ve never seen before. New episodes every Monday and Friday. Your support means the world to me and I don’t take it for granted — click the follow button and leave a review to help us spread the love with On Purpose. I can’t wait for you to listen to your first or 500th episode!